Home

DOEHRS-HC System Support and Service

1. 211 Find Subject Dialog Box 110 First TOSEaseretoo trees 128 format validation 241 formats for import or export 194 196 203 formatting data fields 199 FOSHM esses endrerit 16 216 218 265 Page 346 of 396 data transfer using third party databases acepto etse is 216 proceduren reiteeni n eiie 218 setting as Database Interface 16 G General TA ica nie irn don 61 graph of sound levels 221 H hand switch 3 65 eftOT so eese 64 65 installing aea e li oae 3 hardware key 19 235 for annual calibration 235 for Plus Package ssse 19 hearing impairment 126 HearTrak DOS 16 216 219 data transfer using third party databases cesses tete ute 216 procedure ssssseeesse 219 setting as Database Interface 16 HearTrak Windows 16 216 219 and data transfer occ eee 216 jEOGOdUE ue eure ded eara n n 219 setting as Database Interface 16 histories 98 99 119 151 Add History push button in DAVE PRIME uua Core io mae 88 list of histories on screen 98 questionnaire ssseeeee 120 T pOFt E eerte 151 responses to questions 122 right click menu sss 98 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC History Context Me
2. 127 setting OSHA as Regulation 103 STS Baseline eese eoe 126 STS with age correction 225 STS without age correction 225 OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline TRE SEIT CN E NE 117 OSHA STS Baseline 117 Other Ear First check box 58 P PINE eee erage ee va a none te ee ae 97 passwords 3i eeepc ea 13 39 for database on network 13 TOR DSefS ropes bct etel pn 39 persistence 2 ond un 102 and Age Correction 102 calculated only with Automatic Baseline Revision 102 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Index Persistent Improvement 129 131 Persistent STS 130 132 Persistent Improvement 129 Persistent S TS toe 130 playing voice instructions 66 Plus Package 19 95 PnP Instrument Serial No Assignment 15 Print on Save au rient 90 Print to Seteeli ouv Ge ancteres 90 printed documentation 45 printing erede beo enu 89 audiograms 0 0 0 eeeeseeceeeseteeceeseeeeees 89 changing report that prints at test end sat oases coun TERR RENE 90 daily calibration reports 78 manual PDF file 45 Multiple Report Print 90 Print on Save o euet ae ta 90 Print to Sereen is ea etecu notru iine 90 Procedure combo box 62 prohibiting audiogram start 67 68 without annual calibrat
3. Company Exception List Company Medical Referral List Company Recordable Reportable Shift List Company Recordable Shift Line Out List Company ROSIGE Lev tete Telnet Ers Company Retest List Company STS Exception List Company STS List sesssssss Company Summary eese Company Test Schedule List Report Select Sorts Select SOrts ide duce uvae Report Selection Criteria Report Options Report Options sssssseseseesess Custom RepOFES ooi cocco ri bn oru ida Adding a Report An Overview Modifying a Report An Overview Adding a Report Template Modifying a Report Template Deleting a Report Template Custom Select Sorts Adding a Select Sort Modifying a Select Sort Deleting a Select Sort SQL Syntax Functions SQL Syntax Functions The ASK Function ssssss The ASKSYS Function The ASKEX Function Backup and Restore Backing Up Records An Overview B
4. ssssseseese 87 with Systoc ssssssseessseee 220 asterisk in test display 56 Audiogram Context Menu 98 Audiogram Graph 15 60 audiograms seseseee 117 analysis eessss 63 118 125 analyzing 63 118 125 baseline sseess 58 93 98 display on screen ssssss 56 PTA He s sensns eem bla idv 15 60 list on screen in Storage 98 performing sssseseeene 88 PrN C ean 89 145 prohibiting start ssssssse 68 SAVING eta Ree 88 transferring eesssseeeeeee 215 Audiograms page on screen 97 98 99 Audiometer Context Menu 53 audiometers 3 15 53 changing configurations 17 CONTOS cioe E cp elo eni 47 installing sssesseeeeeeeeee 3 SOUS US uoto esee 15 17 specifications ssssesssseeee 229 Automatic Assign on Start check Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Index Automatic Baseline Revision 102 Automatic Clear on Test Save check DOX Goes cO bledeis 63 Automatic Retest page 70 Automatic Save on Test Complete Check bokan ainiaan 63 B background noise 67 70 221 backilpo an dvo en cuttin 171 DAS GMCS Hay heinien 93 Automatic Baseline Revision 102 codes in reports ssssssssss 146 columns in Storage
5. sssse 3 Multi Station Installation of the CCA 200 sssss 6 Single Station Installation of the CCA 200mini 8 Multi Station Installation of the CCA 200mini 10 Walli IOLA EG e Q 12 Initial Administrator Log In and Setup 12 Database Password and Windows Security 13 Audiormeter Selina cei duse coii unesietboeio uta Yide zinc ennnen 14 Database Interfaces eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeee 15 Setting Up the Audiometer sseeeeeee 16 Volume for Instructions and Microphone 17 Changing Configurations sss 17 Plug and Play Configuration sseseeeeseeesseeeeeeeeee 17 Manual Configuration non Plug and Play 17 Plus Package Installation 19 Installing the Plus Package sseeeeeesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 19 Bio Acoustic Simulator Installation 21 Installing the Bio Acoustic Simulator sssse 21 Installing the BAS 200 with the CCA 200 sssss 21 Installing the BAS 200 with the CCA 200mini 23 BAS 200slm and SLM 200 Installation 27 Installing the BAS 200slm or SLM 200 ssss 27 Installing the BAS 200slm with the C
6. 125 compared to test in real time 58 display during test 58 report containing eeesss 151 revising manually 93 revising with Automatic Baseline Revisi n aeren reer TN 102 Separate Left Right Baselines 103 setting a baseline manually 93 batch transfer using RA 500 protocoles iee 218 Bette nnar rere 128 Bio Acoustic Simulator 21 75 bitmapped field 201 C Calculate STS using Age Correction check box 102 calibration of audiometer 15 239 enabling warning about 15 entering warning message about 239 262 Page 343 of 396 hardware key for ss 235 manual calibration 238 menu WOME piacere eeso 47 prohibiting testing without 68 calibration of Sound Level Meter e dae seas sane MEINT 222 enabling warning about 15 entering warning message about 223 hardware key for s 235 MENU GT oe dee ee M pares 47 ptocedu te cosmos tenen poem 222 prohibiting testing without 67 care of the audiometer 227 changing See also modifying 17 audiometer configurations 17 company of a subject 113 Subject ID format 105 clearing subjects from audiometer dicas Per mel ed co Feel eia 5
7. The AMC493 is cost effective and sim ple to use Its patented design converts the vibrator velocity output to an acous tic signal measured with the system s sound level meter It is integrated with the AEC100 artificial ear to perform both ear and bone conduction tests using essentially the same equipment The AMC493 has an extremely low thermal mass compared to mas toids that require hours to reach the 23 C calibration temperature recom mended in the standard The AMC493 is ready for use within minutes Put it in your pocket instead of hitting your knees carrying a heavy case While polymers used in other mastoids are affected by aging and environmen tal exposure the AMC493 polymeric parts are completely replaced each year during its inexpensive calibration and certification COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION AMC493 Artificial mastoid coupler use with LD AEC100 SPECIFICATIONS Frequency 125 Hz 8 kHz individually range calibrated Static force 5 4 N with added mass ring Materials Black anodized laser etched aluminum disk with polymeric inserts stainless steel mass Dimensions 0 3 H x 1 2 dia 7mm H x 30mm dia Weight 0 3 oz 8 7 9 coupler only Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC AEC101 IEC318 Coupler AEC100 NBS 9 A Coupler An optional coupler for extended A rugged instrument for testing frequency earphone testing TDH earphones Circumaural earphones are often used The AEC100 Cou
8. 233 Batch Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol 234 Third Party Databases c f ioo eur Eee E PUE REEL teat 234 DOFISSSBIO a rrr Does ertet Settee Abeta d 234 go cal Pe 235 Hear Trak DOS soSelactas carnage o desires estas SUM MIN Oc Esp 235 HearTrak WindOWS eiie ndn nen deep ixe Citue tnn 235 Meddale ti see do b dulce te ptt dc eu EE 236 Gee 236 cle p ME Vm 236 Sound Level Meter 239 Sound Level Meter 2 4 eiecerunt ca uc attt ce 239 Sound Level Meter Information Tab ssusesussss 239 Sound Level Meter Annual Calibration sssss 240 Sound Level Meter Calibration Warning 241 STS Definitions 243 Standard Threshold Shift STS sesssssssssss 243 Standard Threshold Shift with Age Correction 243 DOD Significant Threshold Shift sssessessssss 243 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC xi Page 80 of 396 Table Of Contents Cleaning 245 i o tte Geis ictal ne eR aa 245 Specifications 247 Audiometer Specifications cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 247 Trademarks 249 Trademark Information cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 249 Warranty 251 cuam M 251 Annual Calibration 253 Annual Calibration of the Audiometer 253 Access to Annual Calib
9. 63 voice instructions SEE instructions automatic 61 66 VO UITIB cniin lareo reis 17 for voice instructions 17 of microphone ssssses 17 W Wait Intervals tab 70 warranty eeeeeeeeeeeennen 233 273 Page 354 of 396 Index wildcard character 199 Z 274 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 355 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 356 of 396 Audiometer Technical Training Course Consulting LLC Sample Calibration Forms System Support and Service Benson Medical Instruments Co CCA 200mini BAS 200 Audiometric System DOEHRS HC Audiometer Refresh SRMi Consulting LLC Lindor Skip Maletzke 715 276 2947 715 850 1568 Cell 24 7 skipm srmi com Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 357 of 396 This Page is blank Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 358 of 396 Acoustic calibration of audiometers 1910 95 App E Page 1 of 2 U S Department of Labor Occupational Safety amp Health Administration www osha gov Regulations Standards 29 CFR Acoustic calibration of audiometers 1910 95 App E i Search GQ Advanced Search A Z Index E Regulations Standards 29 CFR Table of Contents e Part Number 1910 e Part Title Occupational Safety and Health Standards e Subpart G e Subpart Title Occupational Health and Environment Control e Standard Number 1910 95 A
10. Audiometer Technical A Say Training Course us a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Annual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Annual Calibration Procedure 1 Linearity Check 1 With the earphone in place set the frequency to 1000 Hz and the HTL dial on the audiometer to 70 dB 2 Measure the sound levels in the coupler at each 10 dB decrement from 70 dB to 10 dB noting the sound level meter reading at each setting For each 10 dB decrement on the audiometer the sound level meter should indicate a corresponding 10 dB decrease This measurement may be made electrically with a voltmeter connected to the earphone terminals Audiometer Technical 7 Se Training Course er at a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Annual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Annual Calibration Procedure 1 Tolerances 1 When any of the measured sound levels deviate from the levels in Table E 1 or Table E 2 by or 3 dB at any test frequency between 500 and 3000 Hz 4 dB at 4000 Hz or 5 dBat 6000 Hz an exhaustive calibration is advised An exhaustive calibration is required if the deviations are greaterthan 15 dB or greater at any test frequency Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 42 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout i uS Au
11. from the side wall Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures adis An Installation Template is available from SRMi Consulting LLC 800 356 5239 or sales srmi com Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 14 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures ER ite The In Booth mount provides advantages in that the Jack Panels Patch Cords and Booth Wiring is eliminated It starts with a BAS 200 Wall Mount Bracket installation Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures ERY A This is followed by the CCA 200mini Wall Mount Bracket The bracket is installed in the BAS 200 Bracket by three screws matching the punched holes in the BAS 200 Bracket Audiometer Technical p Training Course EP a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures This is followed by the CCA 200mini Wall Mount Bracket The bracket is installed in the BAS 200 Bracket by three screws matching the punched holes in the BAS 200 Bracket Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 15 of 396
12. sseeee enn 115 Pee cleg pel esse X ia i 115 Modifying a Subject sssssssssseen 116 Deleting a Subject ueteris pietuccdge n bd ueber etas 116 Finding a SUbJBDL ce aer erp ER DEP EP rho uia toceneseens 117 Moving a Subject to a Different Company 117 Combining Two Subjects in Different Companies 118 Combining Two Subjects in the Same Company 119 Audiograms and Histories 121 PUGIOQIEING e 121 Refer Subject data field ac osc cbe Det menge 121 Reject Audiogram check box sss 121 Sound Level Meter group box ssse 122 STS Caloculation eese nennen 122 Adding an Audtogralm eeu t eee RC potet Ee nena 122 Modifying an Audiogram sess 123 Deleting an Audiogram ioci otto nint ecc eri peoih ends 123 Subject History occrsatccnccttacenceaeartapsaas taser acdddeseastagedecsryarpiadoias 124 Subject History Questionnaire 0 cette ee eter eeeeeeee 125 User Defined Questions for Subject History 126 Entering Responses to History Questions 126 Default Responses to History Questions 127 Addirig a HISIODV sii t et un Dec S 128 Modifying a History iine ki nta ciue pbi tne ep ict ha pha pe nad 128 Deleting a History cccccccsceeessssseeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaanaseeeeeeeeeeenea 129 Analysis 131
13. 2 Choose the instruction you wish to play 3 When finished with the Play Instruction dialog box choose Cancel Stop Test on Error The behavior of this feature in the Test Configuration varies depending on the setting of the Error Voice Instructions check box When the Stop Test on Error check box is checked and the Error Voice Instructions box is not checked the test will be stopped when one of the following error situations occurs Continuous Response or Multiple Response see Error Descriptions a No Response error on the first frequency tested two No Response errors if neither occurs during the first frequency tested An alarm will also sound if the error alarm has been enabled in the Setup dialog box If both the Error Voice Instructions check box and the Stop Test on Error check box are checked the test is stopped and an automatic voice instruction is delivered for the situations described above Ifthe Stop Test on Error box is not checked the test sequence will respond to errors as described in Error Handling Retest on Noise Above MPANL The sound level meter that is mapped to the audiometer may determine that the ambient noise level for the current stimulus and response exceeded the Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Level MPANL If the Retest on Noise Above MPANL check box is checked the Status column in the Test Display indicates Noise the current stimulus and response are disregarded and the
14. 64 Control Window 47 CR abbreviation for Continuous Response ots pip abet 65 Crystal Reports 52 e 159 263 Page 344 of 396 D daily calibration 75 135 check box in Information Tab 58 THEN TEINS eo pei idu tpec eus 50 procedure ssssseeeseee 75 reference audiogram 78 report do not have Plus Package 78 reports have Plus Package 141 storage of daily calibrations 135 Daily Calibration check box 58 Daily Calibration List report 142 Daily Calibration Summary report PRATER 142 Daily Calibration Test report 141 data transfer suuuss 215 Data Transfer between Benson Products emit 216 Data Transfer using a Third Party Database uscite epit 216 Data Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol 45e veo 217 data validation 188 211 for user defined fields 211 on T port s aL 188 Database edit box 13 Database Interfaces combo box 16 database password 14 Database View 97 98 databases i o emite Rem 215 dB SPL decibel Sound Pressure EAS A 221 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Index default entries 122 210 for user defined fields in general 210 to history questions 122 Delete All sioe ote O 52 deletifip ii ee He 119 audiograms for daily
15. Audiometer Control Clear F6 from selected audiometer s Functions Z Enables talk over microphone Audiometer Control Microphone On F7 o selected audiometer s Functions 2 Disables talk over microphone Audiometer Control Microphone Off F8 io selected audiometer s Functions cS Places an audiometer in manual Audiometer Control testing mode Functions Turns the alarm off that sounds Audiometer Control when the test is complete or Functions when an error occurs Available only with Database Interface set to Storage OHM or MedGate Available only with Database Interface set to Storage T Appears in the toolbar only if you have chosen the Test Complete Alarm or Error Alarm to be Continuous in the Setup Audiometer dialog box Tool Tips The toolbar buttons display on screen descriptions when the mouse pointer pauses on them These descriptions called Tool Tips give the button function and associated function key if applicable Delete All Delete All is a command that can be applied to subjects audiograms etc However the Delete All command which is a menu item and a push button in some dialog boxes includes safeguards so that important data is not inadvertently deleted First choosing Delete All causes a confirmation dialog box to appear in which you must choose Yes in order to continue with the deletion Second the Delete All Final Confirmation dialog box appears in which you must type
16. Format Type Description dates in the format mm dd ccyy time in the format hh mm ss 24 hour time Social Security number in the format xxx XX XXXX Hearing threshold in dB HTL Valid thresholds are 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 Valid error codes are NR MR SE CR RN PT For an explanation of the codes see Error Descriptions May be either M or m for male or F or f for female Lock to List Validation One of the data validation choices is Lock to List If this is chosen the software ensures that the entry matches an entry in the field s look up dialog box The user may either type the entry or select it from the data field look up box For more information on look up boxes see Look up Boxes 226 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 307 of 396 User Defined Fields Legal Character Validation Legal character validation verifies that the individual characters of a field belong to a particular subset of characters The subsets are defined in the table below Examples of fields for which the legal character type is useful is a department field where the department code is made up of a letter followed by three numerals or a field that may be Y or N In the Legal Characters group box in the Data Validation dialog box Size refers to the minimum number of characters allowable in the field For example if the validation Size is set to 8 a vali
17. From the Report menu in the Control Window choose Modify Letter The Notification Letter dialog box appears Using the Language combo box select the language for which you wish to modify the letter In the General tab select the information to be shown on the letter Choose the Paragraphs tab In the Paragraphs tab make changes to the texts as desired Choose the Medical Referral tab Make changes to the statements as desired Choose the Words tab This tab shows the different words used in the notification letter Change the words as desired 10 Choose the Title tab 11 Make changes to the notification letter title as desired The four edit boxes represent the four possible lines of the title 12 When finished with the Notification Letter dialog box choose Close Subject History Report PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report shows the Subject History Some of the questions for the Subject History are user definable To see the Subject History Questionnaire in the Add History dialog box choose Add from the Edit menu in the Control Window then History For more information on Subject Histories and the Subject History Questionnaire see Subject History and Subject History Questionnaire Subject Summary This report provides an analysis of the current audiogram of the subject and shows how this test compares with the STS Baseline audiogram in audiogram graphs for left and right The other audiograms
18. gt So o r bs gt gt R e B gt Buueyg oeoso opos i59 SOA SSLUSU S9 uoneJqi eo eu ezi Ulojsno oj no smojje uiejs s SOY SUL gt R E E 45y pue yaquyog jeuueuj isa a og tl gp je e 1 59 2H baig geyeuioipne siy Buneigjes uada say sit aproui Af r E E E ioega suog y seuoudyesu seuoudpeeH sj Jgeonpsuei uowwspueg sonsnooyuoog easing fyeeur powoag uomosig jaroqynding Isis agem je e1useeds asionyoaads esoNew esoNpueqwoneN 5 Sa siNsiju0 E Page 393 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC ONI OOSSNVY agny pibu tym Jajdno7 oF agny PIU Uy Jaj no RIED 2 H Spuooes ul uejs s SOY eu Jo uoneJqijeo y xyoeuo pue euoud uoisid e j2euuo2 jejdnoa euoudoiom o euoudie 3 yasu jo ad ayy 493 25 Jajdnog auoudie 3 yesu 481P uci ap piojse y yodu BLOZOO lequnw jenes proise oe wi seuoudoyJoiu JO seAuno esuods ssansuiejoereuo proyse py ay Durfjoeds ajy au 103 25 9J JUSJOMIP SU JO se ge uonoeiJ ploise retour J09 Ul YING seu ulejs s SOV eur 10 seuoudoranu z ad euoudorou ayeique je eu ApeaJ e noA sje dnoo pue Spiojseuu jene seuoudojJoru eui stp woy ajy auoydoroly yodu jequin eua Sousa eee esn oj no swoj e ulejs s SOY SUL 3Sonsiiejereuo auoudorary aty Bur jraads ap ayy 199 35 auoudoroti dnjas juawidinby TRE UTE Page 394 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC woo A
19. 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Confirm Left Phone on Coupler 2 Select Run All AudiometerTechnical 7 ute Training Course er at a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Select Both Ley ttn Pome etn 2 Click OK Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 33 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 The Acoustic Levels are measured and adjusted as needed Audiometer Technical A Hey Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 The Frequency measurements will continue Audiometer Technical 7 Se Training Course er 4 a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 La
20. 75 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 156 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 157 of 396 Manual Testing Manual Testing This Control Window button and menu item under the Audiometer menu allows you to control the audiometer of the selected booth like a manual audiometer You may use the manual mode to test subjects who are difficult to test with an automatic test or to present tones and watch for responses as part of explaining the test to the subject Talk over switching is available in this mode If you wish to have the audiometer automatically set the dB levels and determine a threshold while in this mode see Semi Automatic Manual Mode Push Button Description Microphone enables talk over microphone click push button again to disable microphone Present presents the specified stimulus Stimulus Set NR records the threshold as No Response Set Threshold records the threshold as the current setting of the knobs k Set NT cancels test results and returns the setting to Not Tested Appears only if Semi Automatic Manual Mode is not enabled see Semi Automatic Manual Mode To determine a subject threshold manually 1 Enter manual mode There are a number of methods of doing this one of which is to press F9 and select a booth You may also enter manual mode by choosing Manual from the Test menu in the Control Window 2 Select the ear to test in the Ear group box 3 Select the frequency
21. Benson Medical database you have several options available An important consideration is whether your transfer is of stored data or is done in real time at the end of a test Are You Doing a Real Time Transfer or a Group Audiogram Transfer A real time transfer is one that takes place immediately upon the completion of an audiogram The audiometer is connected by a cable to a computer with the database on it Instead of being stored in the audiometer software the audiogram that has just been performed is transferred electronically to the database software A group audiogram transfer is the transfer of data that has been stored in Plus Package an optional database integrated with your audiometer It can be done electronically directly to the software or it can be accomplished by copying data to a file Which Third Party Database Are You Using For the transfer of a just performed audiogram you will use either a Benson Medical Instruments protocol or an RA 500 protocol depending on your database Data transfer is discussed in more detail in the following sections For Information on ASSIGNING SAVING PRINTING If you are using Storage as your Database Interface see the sections beginning with Assigning a Subject for procedures for assigning a subject saving an audiogram and printing an audiogram 231 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 312 of 396 Data Transfer If you are not using Storage as your Database I
22. DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures The CCA 200mini is then slide into the mounting Bracket This will orient the Serial Cable up to allow easy cable dress for a professional installation Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures The BAS 200 Simulator is then slid into the BAS 200 Mounting Bracket Orient the BAS 200 so the Audiometer Jack and Response Jack down and the Right Phone Cup is on the Right Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures Attach the Serial Cables to the CCA 200mini Computer Female DB9 comes from the Computer or the Previous CCA 200mini The Expansion Male DB9 go to the next CCA 200mini ina multiple station installation This is shown with optional BAS 200slm so Item 4 would continue mee l0 the next CCA 200mini Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 16 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures NY oo I A 6 in 4 in Phone Cable will connect the BAS 200 Simulator with the CCA 200mini Response Jack Audiom
23. Environmental Noise Monitoring Transient Event Measurements o 0 0 6 Audiometer Calibration The Larson Davis System 824 combines advanced sound level meter and real time analyzer capabilities into a rugged user friendly ergonomic package The base unit is an Integrating Sound Level Meter ISM that meets Type I Standards and offers simultaneous measurement of sound pressure levels using fast slow and impulse detectors for A C and flat frequency weightings This feature termed ANY LEVEL measures 48 sound pressure parameters at once with a linear 105 dB range With firmware enhancements the base unit expands as needed to accommodate multiple data processing requirements including Sound Spectrum Analyzer SSA with ANY LEVEL simultaneous sound pressure level measurement real time 1 3 octave frequency analysis spectral Lns and multiple time histories This is your do everything at once instrument Real time Frequency Analyzer RTA provides rapid storage of 1 3 octave spectra at rates to 400 second advanced trigger functions and automated determination of reverberation time e Fast Fourier Transform Analyzer FFT with 400 line resolution from 1 Hz to 20 kHz for specific frequency investigations Includes snapshot data storage THD calculations user definable linear units and more Logging Sound Level Meter LOG provides advanced time and data logging features including automatic logging of data assoc
24. Exhaustive Calibration 5 Rise Fall Times i IKHz Rise20 50mS ii 1KHz Fall 20 50mS iii 4AKHz Rise 20 50mS iv 4KHz Fall 20 50mS Audiometer Technical A Say Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 6 On Off i Left Reference Max Output ii Measure Left No Tone AudiometerTechnical 7 Training Course EP a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 7 Crosstalk i Left Reference Max Output ii Measure Left with Max Output Right Y Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 28 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 8 Linearity i Reference 70dBHL ii Measure up to 100dBHL iii Measure down to limit of SLM iv Record incremental changes each step Audiometer Technical te Training Course TES o a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 2 Aussco ACS100 System Audiometer Technical Nae Training Course
25. Import and Export 5 When finished with the Filters dialog box choose Close 221 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 302 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 303 of 396 User Defined Fields User Defined Data Fields Most data fields with a push button are user definable This means that you may chose a different prompt the text that shows on the button for the field and other options such as real time formatting data validation and default data For an OSHA or MSHA hearing conservation program you will need to specify a data field for the subject s job classification and most recent noise exposure assessment and examiner s name or ID if this information will not be available elsewhere All other required information is automatically gathered by the audiometer All user defined fields allow 40 characters with the exception of the Examiner field 20 characters and the Comment field 4000 characters Data Field Settings Special options for data fields such as look up box entries and validation are set in the expanded dialog box for the given data field To enter or change settings for a data field 1 Press the push button for the data field The data field s look up dialog box appears 2 Press the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Make changes as desired 4 When finished choose OK Modifying a Data Field You can change the prompt and set up features such as validation and r
26. ONI OOSSNW yoeq y uo 1uBu synseJ eui juud pue eyeounieo xuejq e Yasul snf oBo AueduJoo Jno esf SPI uon eJqi eo JO ON e JUL Page 390 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC ON OOSSfIV qgzz gy sonsnoaereju a2ue3 gzzgy sonsnoaeiaqu az qv sansnoaeisqu pI sansnoaeirayu gegy sansnooereyu zzzyy sansnoaeiequ ozzy sansnoaeiaqu spop JaySwoipn y y piezijA H soujeua DG9 v sauauial 10981 009 74 sanyawa 10261 ODG vH saujauia 1061 OOP saujauia 10361 DOE v sanyawa 0984 oleaj j2204 a2uaraG pue syy fiosuac poos 103404 002 33 osue 9 000 LIA oe py D08 v core yy BETH Oep Aed AZW oae jaquinN Jeuac Gv oe jy anz sv sansnosesayu Jossaa2oidoiai4 ueasie 3 aeag ye 4 Svs qem ueoseg ganean Bcc v leapa uosuag epo 739 eapa j uosuag PAS 01 Jaquinyy eua 5 sapo p 1ejatuotpnig 7 sS po Jayawoipny SJ3JAWeEJe j yoeasg ENEC BEES ET Jo yoieas Page 391 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC ol XU 499M SI euop enp sJawojsnD Hote Maday woes ONI OOSSNW Page 392 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC ONI OOSSNVY 53 i EL SI9jeulo ipne pueJq Jjo Jo pjo asoy JO JejeuJo ipne peuijep Jesn e exyeuJ ue e ueo noA bjj gt o jo Di a OOS 0001 gt ce im SJejeuJoipne Jo sj pow pue seyew ueui 10 jes Apeal je seu uM seuioo uiejs s SOY eu
27. PLUS PACKAGE ONLY OSHA and MSHA require that each audiometer be given a daily calibration check Daily Calibration Storage enables you to store daily calibration checks for multiple audiometers thus providing you with evidence of compliance with OSHA or MSHA requirements There are factory defined three daily calibration reports available Daily Calibration Certificate Daily Calibration Summary and Daily Calibration LIst In addition custom daily calibration reports can be created Daily Calibration Storage data will be backed up and restored as part of normal backup and restore operations These data can be moved between product installations using Extract and Merge functions See the Extract sections beginning with Extracting Records An Overview and the Merge sections beginning with Merging Records An Overview Daily Calibration Dialog Box PLUS PACKAGE ONLY In the Daily Calibration dialog box the Audiometers list box shows all audiometers for which daily calibration checks have been stored Push buttons at the right enable you to Add Modify Delete or Delete all audiometers If an audiometer is deleted all the daily calibration audiograms for that audiometer will also be deleted The Audiograms list box shows all stored daily calibration checks for a given audiometer Daily calibration audiograms are displayed for the audiometer that is currently selected above in the Audiometers list box Push buttons at the right enable
28. 1 Functional Check 1 Press Booth Response Switch to start the check Audiometer Technical m SR Training Course A CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Functional Check 1 Functional Test Protocol Start Screen 1 L500 2 L1000 L2000 emm 13000 Hare oU E L4000 nh L6000 Awr Por Pu de doma R1000 y qe L1000 R EI Audiometer Technical E tre Training Course I d CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Daily Calibration 1 Click Audiometer 2 Select Daily Calibration 1 Set 2 Clear 3 Save Print 4 Configuration Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 44 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout vet Audiometer Technical PR tre Training Course dad a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Daily Calibration 1 Click Audiometer 2 Select Daily Calibration 1 Set 1 Select desired Audiometer 2 All Enabled for All cE x41 Audiometer Technical m TU Training Course ad a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration
29. Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 68 of 396 Audiometer Technical Training Course Consulting LLC CCA 200 BAS 200 Operator s Manual System Support and Service Benson Medical Instruments Co CCA 200mini BAS 200 Audiometric System DOEHRS HC Audiometer Refresh SRMi Consulting LLC Lindor Skip Maletzke 715 276 2947 715 850 1568 Cell 24 7 skipm srmi com Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 69 of 396 This Page is blank Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 70 of 396 User s Manual CCA 200mini and CCA 200 Version 6 20 Benson Medical Instruments Co 1996 2008 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 71 of 396 Table Of Contents Audiometer Installation and Setup 1 Audiometer Installation and Setup ssueuueuuuuuss 1 Hardware RequireMents cccscccccccccccecseseeeeeeeeseeeeeansaeeaeess 1 Installation Checklist esee seeeeeeeeeeeee 1 Installing the Software on your Hard Disk 1 Uninstalling the Software eesseeseeeeeeeseeesee 2 Starting the Software ssssssse 2 Plug and Play Installation seeseeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 Installing the Audiometer eseeeeessssesseeeee 3 Two Versions of the Audiometer sssee 3 Single Station Installation of the CCA 200
30. Enter your password in the New Password and Confirm New Password edit boxes 5 Choose OK Do not forget this password or you will not be able to access the audiometer software 6 In the Passwords dialog box choose Close Database Password and Windows Security If you have received instructions from your network administrator that you need to enter a server and a database in the Welcome dialog box that are different from the default ones the security measures of the audiometer software will require you to enter a database user name and database password However you will be using Windows Security you will not need to provide a database user name or database password To enter a database user name and database password or select Windows Security 1 In the Welcome dialog box enter your server in the Server edit box 2 Enter your database in the Database edit box An error message will appear 3 Choose OK in the error message The Database Login dialog box appears 13 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 94 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup Enter your database user name and database password in the appropriate edit boxes OR Select the Use Windows Security check box 4 Choose OK 5 In the Welcome dialog box choose OK Audiometer Setup If you are running the audiometer for the first time also see the next section Setting Up the Audiometer The Setup dialog box contains three pages des
31. From the Report menu in the Control Window choose Modify Letter Notification Letter Dialog Box PLUS PACKAGE ONLY In the Notification Letter dialog box the Language combo box shows the twelve languages for which there are factory defined texts and words for the letter When a language is chosen the texts and individual words of the letter appear in that language The Language combo box shows the sixteen factory languages Any language added by means of the Languages dialog box will appear here also The General page shows the elements of the letter that can be included or excluded Subject ID test data signature line Medical Referral and title The text and words on the Paragraph Medical Referral and Words pages can be changed The Paragraphs page shows the paragraphs of the letter The Medical Referral page shows sentences relating to medical referral The Words page shows words or phrases that will appear on different sections of the letter The four edit boxes on the Title page represent the four possible lines of the title To see the Notification Letter dialog box 1 From the Report menu in the Control Window choose Modify Letter 158 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 239 of 396 Report Templates Subject Reports Modifying the Notification Letter o n QN tA A W 9 PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Only users with administrator access can modify the Notification Letter To modify the notification letter
32. I IV Calibration Reference Setup Start Test All Enabled Audiometers Functional Check Examiner Info Update Reference i Testing Started I EET ce Training Course adf BAS 200 Simulator IV Troubleshooting L No Power Light L Response Switch Plugged in ll Patch Cord to CCA 200min Unplugged ll Daily Calibration Reference Error Failed Headset not seated correctly Damaged or punctured microphone Microphone Jack unplugged Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator V Question and Answer Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Version2 0 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 58 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review Software Specifications L The supplied software will control the audiometers with easy to use Windows Certified software The test and error instructions are delivered through headset in multiple languages It can operate up to 16 test stations The software is the standard CCA 200mini software Essential operation is described in a Operations Manual found in Appendix A ER uc I Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review ll Theory of Operation I The CCA 200mini DOEHRS HC System provides a standard Window Interface allowing for a quick C lea
33. In Audiogram View below the audiograms for that subject will appear IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To see the audiograms or histories for a subject 1 In Subject View select the subject whose audiograms or histories you wish to see 2 Choose the Audiogram or Histories tab The audiograms or histories will appear for that subject 103 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 184 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 185 of 396 Companies Companies If you do not have the Plus Package One company is available for you in Storage All audiograms that are saved will be assigned to this company The subjects of the company are shown in Subject View To see the Company dialog box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company If you have the Plus Package You have the capability of entering multiple companies Companies are listed in alphabetical order in the Company dialog box At the right are push buttons enabling you to add modify duplicate or delete companies All audiograms that are saved will be assigned to the company that is selected in the Company dialog box The subjects of this company are shown in the Subject View The same subject can be entered in different companies If you wish to enter an existing subject in a second company the subject s record and tests in the first company will not be affected You may wish to move a subject to a different company If a subject with the
34. LLC Page 47 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Version2 0 Audiometer Technical Pee Poa Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Daily Calibration Test Progression is displayed 4 Status will be Testing IN At Test End transfer data to DOEHRS Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Troubleshooting 1 Audiometers will not connect 1 No USB CIC installed USB Port not functioning 2 3 USB CIC Drivers not installed 4 22 Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Troubleshooting 1 Audiometer s will not connect 1 Plug and Play PNP turned off 2 Cabling not intact 3 Serial Number Incorrect 4 No power to USB CIC Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 48 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Troubleshooting 1 Audiometer s will not connect 1 Plug and Play PNP turned off insure the box is checked Serial Number Incorrect Cabling not intact No power to USB CIC Audiometer Technical PRY Training Course ad a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Troubleshooting 1 A
35. The selection made here will determine which dialog boxes the report will appear in The Import Report File push button imports a report file When chosen this push button causes the Select Report File dialog box to appear You can browse to the file that you wish to import and choose Open To see the Report Options dialog box 1 Choose Options from the Reports menu in the Control Window The Report Options dialog box appears Modifying a Report An Overview PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This section describes how to copy and modify a factory defined report First copy the report file Any report in the Report Options dialog box including the factory defined report templates can be copied by selecting the report in the Templates list box and then choosing the Modify push button In the Modify 170 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 251 of 396 Report Options Template dialog box you will export the file by selecting the Export Report file push button browsing to a file and selecting it and choosing Open Then choose Close in the Modify Template dialog box In this operation the file that you browsed to is overwritten with the report from the Report Options dialog box This copy of the report can then be modified using Crystal Reports No changes will be made to the actual report in the database The second step is importing the file that you copied and then modified In the Report Options dialog box choose the Add push button
36. and deleting filters To see the list of filters 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Filters 219 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 300 of 396 Import and Export Adding a Filter PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add an export filter 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Export Filters The Filters dialog box appears 2 Choose the Add push button The Add Filter dialog box appears 3 Enter the filter name in the Filter Name edit box 4 Enter the filter expression using SQL in the Filter Expression edit box 5 Choose OK 6 When finished with the Filters dialog box choose Close Modifying a Filter PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To modify an export filter 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Export Filters The Filters dialog box appears 2 Select the filter you wish to modify in the list 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Filter dialog box appears 4 Modify the filter as desired 5 Choose OK 6 When finished with the Filters dialog box choose Close Deleting a Filter PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To delete an export filter 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Export Filters The Filters dialog box appears 2 Select the filter you wish to delete in the list 3 Choose the Delete push button A dialog box will appear asking you whether you wish to delete the filter 4 Choose Yes 220 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 301 of 396
37. based on the AAO HNS medical referral criteria of 1996 Have you recently experienced pain in either ear Have you recently experienced a draining ear Have you recently experienced dizziness Have you recently experienced severe tinnitus ringing Have you recently experienced sudden hearing loss Have you recently experienced fluctuating hearing loss Have you recently experienced ear fullness or discomfort o n nn A L Nel Have you recently had problems wearing hearing protection The second part of the subject history questionnaire is for the examiner only The examiner indicates whether the subject has visible wax or an object in an ear and whether the subject should be referred The third part of the subject history questionnaire is user defined The following are default questions about medical history If you wish to change the default questions see the instructions in the next section Have you ever served in the military Have you ever been to a doctor for an ear related problem Have you ever had a severe head injury Have you ever had ear surgery Have you ever had an ear injury Have you ever had measles Have you ever had mumps Have you ever had kidney disease NO ON Dn FW NO Have you ever had scarlet fever 10 Have you ever had meningitis 11 Do you have diabetes 12 Do you have high blood pressure 13 Do you have an existing hearing problem 14 Do y
38. button causes the Select Report File dialog box to appear You can browse to the file that you wish to import and choose Open This push button appears only if a custom report has been chosen in the Report Options dialog box It does not appear if a factory defined report was chosen The Export Report File push button exports a report file When chosen this push button causes the Select Report File dialog box to appear You can browse to a file 171 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 252 of 396 Report Options and choose Open The file that you browsed to will be overwritten with the report from the Report Options dialog box To see the Report Options dialog box 1 Choose Options from the Reports menu in the Control Window The Report Options dialog box appears Adding a Report Template PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add a report template 1 Choose Options from the Reports menu in the Control Window The Report Options dialog box appears 2 Choose the Add push button in the Template group box The Add Template dialog box appears 3 Enter the name of the new template in the Name edit box 4 Choose the report type in the Report Type combo box 5 Choose the Import Report File push button The Select Report File dialog box appears 6 Browse to the file that you have created using Crystal Reports and select the file The file name and extension will appear in the File name edit box 7 Choose Open The Add Template dia
39. text and numerical data Ww Enable Excd Time History collected on the 824 Export Time History Period 32 history event and spectral data to spreadsheets and text files Connect using serial or Exceedance Time Sat v USB adaptor DVX008A Timed Excd Period 00 00 required Exceedance Trigger Level Page 370 of 396 SYSTEM 824 CAL 250 Calibrator ICP ICP Signal gt e Accelerometers Conditioner B CAL 200 y E Calibrator WS001 Charge output Accelerometers SRC20 Signal Generator RI 1 2 Random incidence Pre n FF 1 2 Free field Pre polarized mic A polarized mic Your choice of precision externally polarized 1 2 mics 2541 Free field FE Free field RE Random incidence HP 2520 1 4 Free field FEL Free field low sensitivity ADP005 ADP007 PRM2100K 2530 1 4 Random A REL Random incidence low sensitivity 4 N gt E a amp 3l ADP043 PRM902 Pre amplifier CCS001 TRP002 Hard shell case 2570 1 Free field cao e EXCXXX Adapter Du 500 Max PRA951 ICP d S gt s Accelerometers BATO10 Internal Rechargeable ADPO008 Battery Pack DNA 824 Utility ui PSA 027 Data Navigation amp Software 7 ES Power supply Analysis Software Bod Modem TE RO Out C ceros gt Gu AC DC Output CBLO06 C cBLoo2 C or cBLo91 CBL108 Control Cable for PRM 2100K i Pee i Use in
40. time windows Hanning rectangular and flat top flexible averaging and user defined inear units showing the actual input voltage the System 824 provides a lot of versatility in a hand held FFT analyzer A full range of accessories allows you to quickly interface with accelerometers or direct signals to measure vibration levels frequency or even total harmonic distortion THD Additionally there are snapshot data storage and display zoom with a factor of 2 4 or 8 Logging Sound Level Meter LOG Ideal for unattended noise monitoring Up to 39 ANY LEVEL parameters may be logged in time steps as short as 1 32 second Log basic sound levels Ln s spectral Ln s and frequency spectra in intervals as short as 1 second Log noise event data levels exceeding user defined thresholds including date time duration Leq Lmax Lmin Lpeak along with event Time History Log 24 hour community noise criteria Leq Ldn Lden and CNEL Using external transducers measure and log Wind Speed average maximum and Wind Direction data with an inhibit feature to stop accumulation of sound level data during periods of high wind speed user defined Excd TH Br Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC SYSTEM 824 Environmental Noise Monitoring Systems Larson Davis provides an extensive range of accessories for short or long term noise monitoring including outdoor microphone systems with electrostatic calibration microp
41. 1996 spec e Save results in a Microsoft compatible database e Print useful reports on calibrations due and cali brations performed Search database by audi ometer serial number model company name or date range e Calibrate more audiometers in less time e Accurate simple and fast Calidratian Contral Panel Hesdotone Leva fes ad Headphone xitstion Nerewtend Nara Least Te reed White Hone Lawn Spesad Nome Leva a Parma Speech Level rostFa cum Ta MANES nr Pela het Aw HN seleen LOT Alan dea et pase duin nd feo nd 32237 J 1 8 Hera doo dae ertibulleve syn Loth Nose aet MA dees tsi Tw dB d m l d Eia Tasa viaa ae Tz Fiw elie anae pe lord h eu wes ne td onn AUSSCO Inc Audiological Service amp Supply Company Phone 800 755 8272 Fax 773 427 4863 Compatible with standard Windows operating systems ET ad cerial port required Visit us on the web at www Audiometry com Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 378 of 396 ONI OOSSNV SU99J9S 9 duies ulejs g uorneJgi e2 4ejeuoipny 00T SOV Page 379 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC m I OOSSNY eyeJgi eo o jueA no Jejeuloipne y pue ueduioo y s yez jpuy jeubis poday uoneique dnas juauudinb 3 jayauuoipng aegen sponuo2 uoneiqye ESB ACH ELA we LES LEZE S404 IA 19g uou fig moug pag G7 9 uei ou OISSN
42. 2947 715 850 1568 Cell 24 7 skipm srmi com Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 5 of 396 This Page is blank Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 6 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course A Comprehensive Training Course System Support and Service Benson Medical Instruments Co CCA 200mini BAS 200 Audiometric System Audiometer Technical Training Course Q Course Overview Your Trainer T Education Lindor Skip Maletzke B S Physics UW Stevens Point Principle Member Technical Training Consultant Benson Medical 92 CAOHC Faculty Member 35 Years Experience in Occupational Health Systems Conauting ULC Hearing Conservation Systems PO Box 190 Mountain WI 54149 Noise Exposure Measurements 800 356 5239 Office Noise Abatement Consulting 24 7 Audiometer Technical Training Course Q Course Overview Your Course I Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer Il CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration USB Computer Interface Cable IV BAS 200 Simulator V Software Systems Review VI Computer System Review Examination Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Version2 0 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Page 7 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical ee o Poa Training Course ad v a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiome
43. 2i detener teet cane 88 Deleting a Language iei elicited eis 89 Testing Saving and Printing with STORAGE 91 Performing an Audiogram seeen 91 Assigning a Subject cet eb ee ep eR R Rn nns 91 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 74 of 396 Table Of Contents Verifying Correct Audiometer Setup sssssss 92 Beginning Automatic Testing eeesssssssssssss 92 Saving an Audiogram ssss ee 93 Printing an Audiogram 552 2 tes eot iniuste the des Cre eae i quetdbds 94 Save Print Options essssssssesssesseeeee eene enne 94 Multiple Report Print Options esses 95 Add Multiple Report Print dialog box sssussssse 95 Adding a Report for Multiple Report Print 96 Modifying a Report for Multiple Report Print 96 Deleting a Report for Multiple Report Print 97 Revising a Baseline Manually sseeeesessssssss 97 STORAGE PLUS PACKAGE 99 Storage Plus Packag amp 5 nito Rr eseothe t x irpotus beste 99 Storage Plus Package Features nenene rererere rnrn 99 Database View 101 Split Scr e N ssia a AE TEE e aE i 101 Database VIGW ioci ideoa Foe sepe Re tee Uca dc ie Eug Ga uh tb E rs d du aad 101 SUDIOCE VIOW C 102 Subject Context Menu sssssee HH
44. A coupler AEC100 NBS 9 A coupler CAL250 Acoustic calibrator AMC493 Artificial mastoid for bone vibrator test 2575 1 pressure air condenser microphone CAL250 Acoustic calibrator EXA010 10 ft extension cable 2575 1 pressure air condenser microphone CCS007 Airtight insulated custom fiberglass case EXA010 10 ft extension cable Adaptors For electrical and ambient noise testing CCS007 Airtight insulated custom fiberglass case Adaptors For electrical and ambient noise testing Features amp Specifications Measurements and Features Hearing level linearity Frequency accuracy Pulse measurements Frequency modulation Total harmonic distortion Narrowband broadband Speech crosstalk Bone vibrators Earphones Speakers Ambient noise Test adjust user selected frequencies and levels with prompts out of tolerance indication Precision counter averages readings of audiometric or extended frequencies Simultaneous test of pulsed stimulus rise fall on and off times on off ratio and width Minimum maximum frequencies modulation and repetition rate at all test frequencies Hands off test of THD using FFT analysis reports fundamental and harmonic levels THD Narrowband stimulus level modulation and repetition rate test at all test frequencies Microphone tape CD output signal test or speech noise test as well as crosstalk Hearing level and other tests for forehead or mastoid placement using AMC493 or B amp K mastoid RE
45. Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review ll Theory of Operation ll The following methods can be used for Function and Menu selection in the System k Windows Point amp Click Selection L Hover Function will show selection options I Windows Dropdown Menus Ill Keyboard Function Keys Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 60 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review Ill Installation Procedures I Place the CD in the DoD Computer Login by an Administrative Level Login and allow the installation to start If AutoPlay does not start then browse to CD Location and double click Setup exe Application Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review lll Installation Procedures Il Follow Installation Screens a clean new install will show the following screen while a cosas previously installed system will Recommend an upgrade The install shown is an MS XP sp2 install Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review lll Installation Procedures Ill Select Default Locations for system installation Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 61 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Co
46. Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACS100 System pme 1 Opening Screen Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 38 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical INE Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACS100 System 1 Audiometer Selection Audiometer Technical A Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACS1 00 System 1 Test Setup Screen AudiometerTechnical 7 Training Course EP a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACS100 System 1 Calibration Control Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 39 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical A Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACS100 System 1 Headphone Output Tes
47. Check 1 Daily Calibration 1 Click Audiometer 2 Select Daily Calibration 2 Clear 1 Select Audiometer 2 All Enabled ert iori o ng Ds Cil Ja d Audiometer Technical 7 pA Training Course ES a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Daily Calibration 1 Click Audiometer 2 Select Daily Calibration 3 Save Print 3 Select Desired Audiometer Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 45 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical ee Poa Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Daily Calibration 1 Click Audiometer 2 Select Daily Calibration 3 Configuration 1 Bio Acoustic Simulator Bio Acoustic Simulator w 8kHz Human Ear Human Ear w 8kHz CRI Audiometer Technical PRY tre Training Course xm a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Daily Calibration 1 Click Audiometer 2 Select Daily Calibration 3 Configuration f ana 1 Bio Acoustic Simulator 2 General Screen E R EI Audiometer Technical E s toe Training Course a a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibratio
48. Continuous and Off to disable the alarm Errors are discussed in the topic Error Handling Your choice in the Database Interface combo box will vary depending on the commercial database that you are using with the audiometer If unsure refer to Database Interfaces The Name ID Subject ID Format combo box allows you to set the Name ID Subject ID field in the Control Window to display the subject s name Last Name First Name ID or Subject ID SERIAL NUMBERS The Serial Number page shows the serial numbers of the audiometers and if you have one or more Sound Level Meters the serial numbers of the sound level meter s Serial numbers are assigned to audiometers and sound level meters in the order of connection To change the order see Changing Configurations If you enter serial numbers manually serial numbers do not need to be entered in the order that the instruments are physically connected Ignore unused fields SOUND LEVEL METER MAPPING For information on the Sound Level Meter Mapping page see Configuring the Sound Level Meter Database Interfaces The audiometer can transfer data to third party hearing conservation databases A unique feature of the audiometer is its ability to work real time with information from a database This feature allows the audiometer software to choose starting levels and perform analysis and retests based on previous and baseline tests The Database Interfaces combo box in the Setup dia
49. Enter other information as desired Plus Package Only Choose the Save push button This action stores the audiogram as the reference audiogram in Daily Calibration Storage Do Not Have Plus Package Choose the Update Reference push button then choose Close The current data is now stored as the new baseline reference audiogram Daily Calibration Save Print Options This dialog box shows the available report templates and Select Sorts for the daily calibration report Other options can also be set here The table below summarizes the options specifies the template file to be used when printing a daily calibration report Daily Calibration Certificate is the available report if you do not have the Plus Package Report Select Sort specifies what data will be included in a report Print on Save prints the daily calibration Plus Package report when the daily Only calibration audiogram is saved Print to Screen selecting this check box causes the data to be printed to the screen clearing it will cause the 83 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 164 of 396 Daily Calibration Check data to be printed to the printer specifies how many copies of the daily calibration report will be printed The Report Template combo box specifies the daily calibration report template that will be used for printing For descriptions of the reports see the sections beginning with Daily Cali
50. FUNGON S wis cincincecucatd ra pex atcur vo dox pa De cuba aes taa deberes 47 Daily Calibration Submenu eeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeee 50 MOOIDAR sere ennen aneka Cots done pi aa EE OI vaa ALE 51 Eee BITc o ar ner 52 Delete PAN auk siot aceite pectet td atkodibwap e hu RTL ou uer doen e RUE 52 Individual and Group Control seessssesseeeeeses 53 Enabling an Audiometer eeeeseseessseeeeeeeeeeeee 53 Audiometer Context Me nu cccccceecceessseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeees 53 Audiometer Control Functions eseeeeessssseeeeeeeeeee 53 Instructions for Mouse and Keyboard sssessss 55 Test Display ii iei terii tex RR RR TREE FIRE 57 Audiometer Information Tabs esses 59 Information Tab Fields ieri Led omn qtu turi aima 59 Audiogram Graph sss aiit ono te tree Eo e Depot Ugo er caen 61 Viewing Information Tabs sssemmm 61 Automatic Testing 63 Standard Test Configurations sess 63 Test Configuration Dialog Box s 63 General Tab Test Configuration ssssssssss 63 Languages for Voice Instructions sseeseeessessssss 63 Threshold Determination sssseeeeeee 64 Real Time STS Calculation cccccccccessnsseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 65 Automatic Assign Save and Clear check boxe
51. Field Mapping columnar list All other requirements of Field Mapping apply For export if the bit is set to 1 then the string in the ASCII column in the Field Mapping columnar list will be written to the ASCII field When the first match is found no others are checked Refer to the table below for the bits indicating particular types of baseline tests Test Type Bit Number reserved Bit 1 Left OSHA MSHA STS Bit 2 Baseline Left OSHA Recordable Bit 3 Baseline Right OSHA MSHA STS Bit 4 Baseline Right OSHA Recordable Bit 5 Baseline Left MSHA Reportable Bit 6 Baseline Right MSHA Reportable Bit 7 Baseline reserved Bit 8 24 user defined Bit 25 32 You can create a bitmapped field by adding one or you can duplicate a format that contains a bitmapped field and modify that format 214 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 295 of 396 Import and Export Leading and Trailing Spaces PLUS PACKAGE ONLY In creating or modifying a format you will need to consider whether to trim leading spaces or trailing spaces or to fill them with a specified character Your best course of action will depend on the particular database you are importing from or exporting to For example certain databases right justify the last name field and in this case it would be best to trim the leading spaces In another example however the month of July may be entered in one database as simply 7 rather than 07 and here it w
52. In the Add Template dialog box enter the name that you wish your new report to have in the database Choose the report type for your new report using the Report Type combo box The report type that is chosen determines the dialog box es that the report you are adding will appear in The report type choices are listed below Report Types Company Subject Audiogram Daily Calibration Annual Calibration SLM Annual Calibration Finally choose the Import Report File push button and browse to the report file that you modified Select the report file and choose Open In the Modify Template dialog box choose OK Your new report will appear in the Report Options dialog box Modify Template Dialog Box In the Modify Template dialog box the Name edit box shows the name of the report that you selected in the Report Options dialog box If the report you selected in the Report Options dialog box is a factory defined one this edit box is gray cannot be changed If on the other hand the report you selected is not factory defined the contents of the Name edit box can be changed If the contents are changed the new name of the report will appear in Report Options after you choose OK in the Modify Template dialog box The Report Type combo box lists the available report types The selection made here will determine which dialog boxes the report will appear in The Import Report File push button imports a report file When chosen this push
53. Instrumentation SLM Mfg Model SLM Serial Number SLM Calibration Date Microphone Mfg Model Serial Number Mic Calibration Date 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz On Off Ratio Crosstalk Remarks 8 28 2008 Larson Davis System 824 A3847 3 24 2008 2575 1874 3 24 2008 Calibration conforms to ANSI 3 6 1989 Right Pre cal dB HL 65 3 64 2 64 9 64 4 69 5 69 7 70 0 Rise mS 38 0 38 5 38 0 38 5 38 5 38 5 38 5 Technician Signature Post cal dB HL 69 7 69 6 70 3 70 4 69 5 69 9 70 0 Fall mS 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 104 0 105 3 THD dB 46 7 55 3 47 7 53 5 50 1 51 0 48 4 OS dB 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB dB Date Page 365 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 366 of 396 Audiometer Technical Training Course Consulting LLC Calibration Systems System Support and Service Benson Medical Instruments Co CCA 200mini BAS 200 Audiometric System DOEHRS HC Audiometer Refresh SRMi Consulting LLC Lindor Skip Maletzke 715 276 2947 715 850 1568 Cell 24 7 skipm srmi com Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 367 of 396 This Page is blank Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 368 of 396 SYSTEM 824 Sound Level Meter and Real time Analyzer Advanced Sound Level Measurements Real time 1 1 1 3 Octave Building Acoustics Measurements Real time FFT Analysis
54. LLC Page 11 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Il Theory of Operation PC Hardware Requirements version 6 20 software The audiometer software requires an IBM PC compatible computer with a 1 GHz or higher processor running Microsoft Windows XP SP2 2000 SP4 or Vista minimum 256 megabytes 2000 XP or 1 GB Vista RAM and 500 megabytes free hard drive Talk over and voice instructions SoundBlaster 16 or 100 compatible full duplex sound card and microphone are required For the CCA 200mini one free USB port is required Audiometer Technical PRY F Training Course ap a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Il Theory of Operation Audiometer Specification The CCA 200mini audiometer meets or exceeds ANSI S3 6 1989 Dimensions 3 in x 5 in x 136 in Weight 3 Ibs with accessories Case White ABS chassis Storage Temp Range 0 120 F 18 49 C Operating Temp Range 50 90 F 10 32 C Operating Humidity 20 80 96 non condensing h Audiometer Technical E pA Training Course er d CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Il Theory of Operation Audiometer Specification The CCA 200mini audiometer meets or exceeds ANSIS3 6 1989 Continued Test Frequencies 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 6k 8kHz crystal controlled Stimulus Continuous 1 second or Pulsed 200ms pulse 2 5 pulses second Outpu
55. LS TS AS DLL ase retet inse RA Ed sato 125 Language combo box 58 149 languages for Notification Letter 83 YG 000 esee 83 changing at testing time 58 deleting ite ees 84 modifying an eein u oan a 84 numbers assigned to in database 189 OV CIVIC WIS eese hath tni RR NT ERE E 61 setting for a test configuration 61 setting preferred language for subject eeu a i LA d LL uus 109 leading spaces 201 left pane soto e pv 97 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC legal characters validation 212 Lock to List validation 212 log Hle ori cvm bb ett 187 188 look up boxes 209 M manual DES soe t decet 118 of audiograms eesse 118 of daily calibration reference 78 of Sound Level Meter readings 117 manual PDF ile 45 manual testing sssss 73 mapping cuc eet ee bees 34 field mapping for custom formats 199 Sound Level Meters 34 Mark for Retest 47 53 Medjgate 16 216 219 data transfer using third party databases der ree tute pnta 216 procedure sess 219 setting as Database Interface 16 medical histories 98 119 151 medical referral 117 147 MENUS 5s dot c i a e vs 47 at top of screen sssssssssss 47 right click menu for Audiograms 98 right click menu for
56. MALETZKE III POLBOX 190 PRINCIPAL MEMBER MOUNTAIN WI 54149 800 356 5239 SKIPMOSRMI COM Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 363 of 396 CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE AUDIOMETER MANUFACTURER MODEL SERIAL CALIBRATION DATE EXPIRATION f T Attentuator Linearity o o uo uo m o Copyright 2005 SRMi Consulting LLC All rights reserved worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 364 of 396 Audiometer Calibration Date 8 28 2008 Audiometer Audiometer Model Audiometer Serial Number Left Phone Serial Number Right Phone Serial Number Last Calibration Date Calibration Freq Pre cal Hz dB HL 500Hz 500 70 1 1kHz 1000 70 0 2kHz 2000 70 0 3kHz 3000 70 6 4kHz 4000 70 5 6kHz 6000 70 2 8kHz 8000 69 9 Linearity Left Level Step Error Total Error dB HL dB dB 100 6 0 0 0 1 95 6 0 1 0 1 90 5 0 0 0 0 85 5 0 0 0 0 80 5 0 0 0 0 73 3 0 0 0 0 70 5 0 0 0 0 65 5 0 0 0 0 60 4 0 1 0 1 55 4 0 0 0 1 50 4 0 0 0 1 45 4 0 0 0 1 40 4 0 0 0 1 35 4 0 0 0 1 30 4 0 0 0 1 25 4 0 0 0 1 20 4 0 0 0 1 15 4 0 0 0 1 10 4 0 0 0 1 Calibrated by Skip Maletzke SRMi Consulting LLC PO Box 190 Mountain WI 54149 800 356 5239 Annual Calibration Certificate Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Left CCA 200m 60338 C404682 C404690 7 3 2008 Post cal dB HL 70 2 70 0 70 0 70 5 70 5 70 1 70 0 THD dB 46 0 57 0 46 9 56 4 54 8 51 0 48 6
57. MPANLs tab in the Test Configuration dialog box See MPANLs Sound Level Meter Annual Calibration You will need a calibrator in order to perform annual calibration of the sound level meter Instructions are given on screen during the calibration First you will be asked to attach the microphone to the calibrator and the sound level meter When calibration is finished you will be instructed to attach the microphone to the audiometer and the sound level meter so that linearity can be checked The hardware key that is used for sound level meter annual calibration is the same one that is used for annual calibration of the audiometer To perform annual calibration for the sound level meter 1 Install the hardware key see Installing the Annual Calibration Hardware Key 2 From the Control Window select Sound Level Meter Annual Calibration from the Audiometer menu The Calibration Sound Level Meter dialog box appears 3 In the Description field enter the sound level meter location reason for calibration or other comments 4 Enter the name of the individual or company calibrating the sound level meter in the Calibrated By group box and information about the test equipment in the Sound Level Meter Audiometer and Acoustic Calibrator group boxes Choose the Calibrate push button Follow the on screen instructions for calibration When calibration is finished follow the on screen instructions for linearity checking ont O
58. PACKAGE Using the Backup dialog box you can back up data on all companies subjects audiograms import export formats export filters and Notification Letter preferences including user defined fields You may back up data to either a file database or an SQL database You can create the file or SQL database upon backup or use an existing database If you are using an existing database any data that is currently in it will be overwritten upon backup The same security measures are in force as for the initial log in to the system The Database Type group box shows two choices File database and SQL database The File mdb edit box is used if you are backing up to a file database Enter the name of the file database in this edit box or you can browse for the file using the Browse push button The default backup file and location are d stx mdb The Server and Database edit boxes are used if you are backing up to a SQL database The default server and database respectively are BMIMSDEServer and STXBAK If you need to change servers you may enter the server name in the Server edit box or browse for it using the Browse push button If you are already on the right server you may enter the database name or browse for it using the Browse push button 183 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 264 of 396 Backup and Restore If the Write log file check box is selected a log file will be created that you can check later for
59. Right Status Help Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Control Window NR No response The subject did not respond to two stimulus presentations at the maximum intensity MR Multiple response The subject responded twice or more to a single stimulus presentation SE Subject error A threshold was not determined in 20 stimulus presentations CR Continuous response The hand switch was not released since the start of the previous stimulus presentation RN Retest not valid The threshold of the programmed retest varies by more than 5 dB PT Presentation time out More than sixty seconds have elapsed from the start of a threshold determination without a threshold being established Displays test data or progress by frequency for the right ear See above for explanation of contents Displays current audiometer status One of eight messages is displayed Idle not testing Testing automatic test in progress Finished automatic test is complete Error an error occurred during automatic testing 58 Page 139 of 396 Control Window Keep test is complete and the Busy subject is being kept busy see Keep Busy Noise sound level meter indicates noise exceeds permissible level Mic On talk over microphone is enabled Instruction voice instructions are being given The small column to the left of the Status Help column will contain an asterisk character if the information has not been save
60. Skip to Step 8 5 In the Prompt edit box enter the prompt name or label for the Subject ID Note that if the Social Security Number radio button is selected in the Legal Characters group box you will not be able to make changes to the Prompt Maximum Size or Minimum Size edit boxes If you wish to make changes to these edit boxes you will have to select something other than Social Security Number 6 In the Maximum Size edit box choose the maximum number of characters that will be legal Entering a size that is smaller than that of the current Subject ID may lead to loss of data 7 In the Minimum Size edit box choose the minimum number of characters that will be legal 8 Choose OK 9 In the Modify Company dialog box choose OK 10 In the Company dialog box choose Close Adding a Company If you do not have the Plus Package To add a company 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company The Company dialog box appears 2 Enter the company s name and address in the appropriate edit boxes 3 Enter other information and settings as desired 4 When finished choose OK If you have the Plus Package To add a company 1 Choose the Add push button at the right of the Company dialog box The Add Company dialog box appears 2 Enter the company s name and address in the appropriate edit boxes 3 Enter other information and settings as desired 4 When finished choose OK 110 Copyright 2008
61. To turn off the microphone click the Microphone Off button If controlling multiple audiometers click on the audiometer number or All Enabled Audiometers button to turn off the 56 Page 137 of 396 Oto Window Window Press F7 If controlling multiple audiometers type the number of the audiometer To turn off the microphone press F8 If controlling multiple audiometers type the number of the audiometer or A to turn off all audiometers Click the Alarm Off button off Test Display Press F10 The on screen display gives information on status test progress and subject name or ID SSN depending on the option selected When controlling multiple audiometers this information is displayed for each audiometer The five display columns are described below Column Aud Name ID SSN Left Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Description Audiometer number 1 16 Displays name of subject if a subject has been assigned You may choose to display subject ID number or Social Security number See Audiometer Setup Displays test data or progress by frequency for the left ear Number Threshold in dB HTL black Number current stimulus in dB red HTL being presented This display can be used to watch the bracketing in progress to assure that the subject understands the test NT No test Indicates that a frequency has not been tested or was not selected for test 57 Page 138 of 396
62. Waysks SOY eui 1nd 1seJ y u amp noJui noA s dwoJd ulojs s SOV eu pue 1s9 y uo xor Ajduuis ulJJoyed o jue noA S9 eu esoouo oj no smojje ulejs s SOY SUL Page 383 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC auog Ig ea dH ZH Aguanbal4 48539 AP WZ AL 00S oo 002 dS 18487 ainssald punog ap eed gp 2437 2H fouanbas4 senjeA painseayy YW uo 39i ejqnop aqe ayy ul fouanbay e o dunl o 00L 00g 000E BZ 2 ooz 00S ooo os see xs m ow we penu oneuojig e apop isa jpuueyg yig e jpuueyg YET _ jeuueu isa Teso jeuueu JOVEYIOSQ yejs o Apeay gp 19429 zZH amp ouanbaiJ Jonuo say sunas rajauoipnig 4531 1243 Indjng auoydpeayy Ee NI O9SSNY O GP Jo Y OL L 0 uwop uoneJqijeo JO pjoysaiy esioaid y Jes 0 NOA smoje uieis s SOY SUL s8 1XOU BU 0 uo HuIAOW BJO aq Ja awoipne ysnipe oj noA Jo pem USA IM Waysks SOV 9u awh ead Ul uop SJE SJUBLUSINSESLU y y uoneJqijeo ul SI J9jeuuoipne y mouy nof saui pa y ueewjeq si sul u31 y J IEM Se 3 solydesb y 1nq eyep ay Sjoe oo juo 1ou uiajs s SOY eu Page 384 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Ee NI O9SSNY O Isi 2919 k 1813 axe os o9 ese az ooo oo asm oo 8 9 S Z ax oar 0 0 t Q 0 0 G 0 sanje painseay
63. also create custom Extract Configurations It may be easier to duplicate an existing configuration and modify that rather than adding one Databases comprise a set of tables each of which hold certain types of data For example the Subject table holds the subject demographic data The Add Extract Configuration dialog box allows you to choose which tables to include in the Extract Selecting the check box in the Extract column will include the contents of that table in the Extract Configuration It is often useful to choose only a subset of data from a given table The Filter buttons allow you to add a SQL expression that chooses the records from each table that will be included in the Extract Relational databases follow a hierarchy of tables For example in this database every audiogram must be associated with a particular subject Therefore the Subject table must be included when the Audiogram table is included This happens automatically in the Add Extract Configuration dialog box The Check SQL button in the Extract Configurations dialog box will cause the audiometer software to examine the SQL expressions for errors If the SQL expressions contain one or more errors an error message will be displayed that 189 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 270 of 396 Extract and Merge shows the error s found The Check SQL button will also show the dialog boxes that will ask for ranges if the configuration involves ranges Refer
64. another database on a server or in a file created by Extract or Backup You can choose the type of data you want to merge into the database Subject demographic audiogram and history data may be merged for more than one company at a time Factory defined Merge Configurations are available or you can create your own configurations You will need to use SQL when entering the filter expression A log file may be created with details of the Merge operation Subject demographic audiogram and history data may be merged for more than one company at a time Companies are matched at Merge time by an exact match of the Company Name field That is if the Company Name field in the data to be merged exactly matches the corresponding field in the database to be merged into 192 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 273 of 396 Extract and Merge the data is merged into that company If there is no exact match a new company is created In the case where more than one company is an exact match an error is displayed Since merging data into the database carries the risk of overwriting data that is needed the Trial Merge feature enables you to determine the effects of merging Ifa Merge action is carried out with this check box selected no data will actually be merged into the database but a log file is created After the trial merge is complete you can check the log file for information on what would have resulted if this had been an actual m
65. automatic test is in progress when the frequency is marked the retest occurs after all frequencies have been tested If the audiometer status is idle the retest occurs immediately after the Start button is pressed If the audiometer status is Keep Busy the retest occurs after the audiometer is stopped Stop button and restarted with the Start button The retests are handled in order from left to right on the display Even if a frequency that was marked for retest had a previously determined threshold the threshold that is determined during the retest is the one that is retained 54 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 135 of 396 Control Window Manual This button and menu item controls the selected audiometer like a manual audiometer See Manual Testing Play Instructions This menu item allows you to play the voice instruction of your choice See Playing Voice Instructions Alarm Off This button and menu item turns off the alarm that sounds when a test is complete or when an error occurs Alarm Off appears as a toolbar button and menu item only if you have chosen the Test Complete Alarm or the Error Alarm to be Continuous in the Setup dialog box Instructions for Mouse and Keyboard The following tables list common audiometer functions in the left column and tells how to perform these functions in the right column with either the mouse or the keyboard Many users feel most comfortable using the mouse when learni
66. automatically filled in is correct 6 In the Microphone Correction Values group box enter the microphone correction values that were listed on the microphone s certificate of calibration The edit box entry for 1000 Hz cannot be changed since 1000 Hz is always considered to be zero 7 Choose Next The Audiometer Calibration SLM Mic Information dialog box appears 8 Enter the information about the sound level meter and the microphone in the appropriate edit boxes 9 Choose Next The Audiometer Calibration Technician Information dialog box appears 10 Enter the information about the technician who is performing the calibration 1 1 Choose Next The Audiometer Calibration Test Options dialog box appears 12 Choose a test or choose Run All to run all tests Follow on screen instructions during the calibration 255 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 336 of 396 Annual Calibration When the on screen instructions ask you to set up the Larson Davis 824 to obtain electrical readings use the following Larson Davis parts or equivalents 1 CBL097 cable 2 ADP010 adapter and 3 BNC coupler Remove the cable connected at the top of the Larson Davis 824 that connects the Larson Davis 824 to the microphone coupler and pre amp assembly Then use the BNC coupler to attach the ADPO010 adapter to the CBL097 cable Connect the appropriate end of the CBL097 cable to the top of the Larson Davis 824 Plug the phone jack of the ADPO
67. available The entry in the Size edit box should include any leading or terminating characters for each record e g a terminating carriage return or line feed The Field Definitions group box contains Add Modify and Delete buttons for adding modifying or deleting fields in the custom format Fields in Import Export Formats PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Add Field Modify Field dialog boxes enable you to add or modify fields in import export formats that are not factory defined One way of seeing the Add Field dialog box is by choosing Formats from the File menu in the Control Window then choosing Add in the Formats dialog box then choosing Add in the Add Format dialog box In the Add Field or Modify Field dialog box the ASCII Field group box contains the Export Default check box If this box is checked the field will only be used when exporting Use this check box to add characters such as a carriage return or other static text to formats used as exports If the Format has a fixed Record Size then the Offset represents the number of characters to the right of the first character that the first character of the field resides The first character of the record has an offset of 0 The Size edit box is for the size of the field The size is the number of characters in the field This edit box is not used for a delimited field gt Import If the ASCII field is larger than the database field all extra characters of the ASCII field wi
68. calibration 119 audiograms for subjects 119 COMPANIECS cccceceseseeceeeeseceeeeees 107 Delete AIL uisa certe certo 52 Extract configurations 178 Till etse o eve ado on Pedo 207 FaSEODIGS ee ee t bcati 124 import export formats 204 languages osa o eee 84 Merge configurations 185 report in Multiple Report Print 92 report templates usssse 163 Seletl SOILS roetan ienie 164 USetSan sete te tete een 41 disabling s o seo 52 age correction 0 0 eeeesceceeeeseeeeees 102 audiometers as ca edle 52 AE MAE TAEA TATY 214 Prohibit Audiogram feature 67 68 Disabling Data Validation for a ITE C PEE 214 DOD Significant Threshold Shift mre E 225 DOHRS HC 16 216 218 data transfer using third party database uses eth 216 prOCequte s coe Eie 218 264 Page 345 of 396 setting as Database Interface 16 Downloading Data 215 duplicating oon io ore 107 companies 107 Extract configurations 179 import export formats 204 Merge configurations 185 E employees 110 111 112 113 Enabled in Multiple Report Print ES 90 SHADING do ac o oe 52 age correction sssssseseee 102 aUo RICE CES c0 cao Ho qud todas leido 52 ATA STU E ER MID 211 Error Toten e a ie s 43 GLTOIS san dete tees tete tered 64 65 data va
69. data of multiple calibration checks There are four Select Sorts available for this report Current Audiometer Test Date Range Test Date Range Exclusive and All If Current Audiometer is chosen all calibration checks will be printed for this audiometer Test Date Range will select all daily calibrations for audiometers that have a daily calibration in that range Test Date Range Exclusive will select only daily calibrations in that range On the report the Audiograms section shows the daily calibration check data for each test The Results column indicates whether each calibration check passed or failed 150 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 231 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage The Results section shows whether the latest daily calibration check passed or failed with an explanation The Key section shows that the thresholds are listed in dB HL and explains abbreviations that may appear in the report Daily Calibration List report PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Daily Calibration List report shows the latest daily calibration check and the reference audiogram for multiple audiometers There are two Select Sorts available for this report Test Date Range and All Test data is shown from the most recent daily calibration check and the reference audiogram An indication of PASSED or FAILED is given for the most recent daily calibration check In the Totals section the Period line shows the time period
70. export the database performs several functions as desired These are performed in the following order 1 field mapping 2 import export formatting Database Field Definitions PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The table below show the database field definitions DescriptionField Size Type Company NamelCompany gt Name Company Address line 2 Company gt Addr Company State Company State Company Zip Code Company gt Zip Company CountryCompany gt Country 20 Text Company Contact Company gt Contact Company Comment Company gt Text Number Age Correction STSCorr 1 Use Age Correction 0 No Age Correction Company Automatic Company gt Number Baseline RevisionBaseRevAuto 1 Use Auto Revision 0 No Auto Revision Company Separate Company gt Number Left Right Baselines SeparateBase 1 Use Separate Base 0 Don t Use Separate Base Company Baseline RevisionCompany gt Number Criteria BaseRevCriteria 0 NHCA 202 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 283 of 396 Import and Export Company Retest Period Company gt Number of days RetestPeriod Number Number 0 OSHA 1 MSHA Subject DfSubject gt Subjectld Subject First NameSubject gt FirstName Set gt Birthdate User Defined m Sujet gt Usrdefl 7 Text Subject LanguageSubject gt Lang Subject Comment Subject gt Comment Subject in Hearing Conservation Subject gt InProgram Number 0 Not in Program 1 In
71. for the languages are as follows English 0 Spanish 1 Hmong 2 German 3 Hindi 4 Tibetan 5 Vietnamese 6 French 7 Bosnian 8 Cambodian 9 206 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 287 of 396 Import and Export Russian 10 Somali 11 Italian 12 Japanese 13 Polish 14 Tagalog 15 Formats for Importing and Exporting PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The import and export functions are available only with the Plus Package The database has pre defined formats for importing from and exporting to leading hearing conservation databases The same formats are used for import or export so you may also export in a format that may be read directly by a third party database The format is chosen at the time of import or export If you are exporting data to Systoc version 7 2 see Systoc Export You may also create your own format s See the Custom Formats The factory defined formats cannot be changed To see the list of formats 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Formats Systoc Export The information in this section applies to users of Systoc version 7 2 a product of Occupational Health Research who wish to export data from Benson Medical Instruments products to Systoc SETUP In order to export to Systoc each subject record must contain the Systoc Company ID CID code in the subject record UsrDef0 field Refer to the figure below The CID is generally an eight digit number For information on changing the Prompt for a
72. for this subject are also printed 159 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 240 of 396 Report Templates Subject Reports Subject Test This report gives you a summary of the subject s current test and demographic data without STS analysis Subject Test STS This report gives you a summary of the subject s current audiogram and demographic data including STS analysis Age Correction data will appear on this report if you are using Age Correction for this company 160 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 241 of 396 Report Templates Company Reports All Company List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report lists all the companies that are currently in the database together with the information that has been entered about them such as their address and phone number Company Baseline Revision List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Company Baseline Revision LIst report shows all subjects whose current audiogram shows a persistent STS or persistent improvement according to the criteria established by the National Hearing Conservation Association NHCA in 2000 If you wish to print this report Automatic Baseline Revision must be enabled for this company Company Exception List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report lists all subjects who may not appear correctly in other reports due to missing or invalid data Company Medical Referral List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report lists the subjects in a company who meet the criteria for medical
73. gt b gt aeaye ay uo apNjoU o JUEM Nod op jeu MRE ELS ESTI Page 388 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC me NI O9SSNY d iud eyeauue ma pieogdi 5 01 dog zH Aduanbal4 9 68 epo AE AL 00S 00 O02 00L 3L 0009 UO suoneoi dde Jeuo ul asn 0 pueoqdijo y o1 udeJ6 y doo ueA e ued noA 9jeoylJeo y 1uud noA 8Jojeq ejep uoneJqijeo ay u noJuy qe J Toep e 3coeposp no sje ulejs s SOV eu MB J ys e auueyg BP 8 8 aaqelay IOVEIGIA suog seuoudjyesuj SeuogdpeaH e yeonpsued son isis agem r e1499ds esoNuoseds asioN aly esoNpueqwoiewN yas pue H sansnoog wooy UIP asin G feeur anoaz uowosig a a ding ey eye q sag 4 Wd 8r8L0L F002 Sc yap aye uoneique sns y uonesIqyep Page 389 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC f R E DOOR L ig or CS i22 IP vr eS ct eee a Oii Tt TU OL OO E a U Pato he o eee ae te cel Ott qii 10 JES Qu QUI T X Y QT jJ i 2T y U M I osee 0 UE L 1 1 1 Jes a ee eo iez Pome ice zo oc Jee coco cu oo g0 o ponsi DIE pope e i t Neo Ts jos et jec oon 6 io uc 5cro 5t e bii 00 oo tj Jeaan Dii oor EE 68 iig O00 00 O09 TIS T LOU L O0r Ag cO QUE 0C i0 Gl Loo OIt ODOL eee oe eee eee OEC s OS NS we Puce sueis lcny een T LISLEOTO LCOTOCO NIE AEDE sonoqdare seuoudpee
74. import data into the database 1 Select the File menu from the Control Window and choose Import The Import dialog box appears 2 Enter the name of the file to be imported or find the file using the Browse push button 3 Choose the format from the Format combo box 4 If you wish to create a log file showing data validation errors select the Write data validation errors to log file check box 5 If desired change the name and location of the log file from the default entry in the Log File edit box If the file exists it will be overwritten without prompting Alternatively you may use the Browse push button to find the file 6 Choose the Import push button The import will proceed automatically 200 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 281 of 396 Import and Export Export Overview PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Export function is available only if the Database Interface in Setup is set for Storage You can export audiograms and subject data from this database for import into other databases You may export only from the current company The File edit box is for the location and name of the file that will contain the exported data You can create the file at the time of export or you can enter the location and name of an existing file If you are using an existing file any data that is currently in the file will be overwritten upon export The Browse button enables you to find the file The Format combo box is
75. in mind that the documentation may not use the term assign For information on printing a test refer to the database documentation 234 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 315 of 396 Data Transfer FOSHM If the database interface you are using is FOSHM you will need to set up the audiometer to emulate an RA 500 See the sections beginning with Data Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol in this documentation for audiometer settings and other information about real time and batch transfer For database settings refer to your database documentation Follow the procedure below to assign a subject Refer to the database documentation for details and further instructions To assign a subject 1 Choose Assign Subject from the Audiometer menu The Assign Subject dialog box appears 2 Enter the Patient ID number and the Examiner 3 Choose the Assign button Hear Trak DOS If the database interface you are using is HearTrak DOS follow the procedures below to assign a subject and save an audiogram Refer to the database documentation for details and further instructions For information on printing an audiogram refer to the database documentation To assign a subject 1 In HearTrak enter the subject s Social Security number 2 Send information about the subject to the audiometer To save an audiogram 1 When the test status indicates Finished in HearTrak get the data from the audiometer
76. is within the valid response windows and will adjust the dB level of the next stimulus accordingly If the subject has given no response the dB level is automatically set 5dB higher whereas if the subject has given a response the dB level is set 10dB lower The audiometer will determine the threshold for the given frequency according to a modified Hughson Westlake procedure See Threshold Determination The push buttons Set NR Set No Response and Set Threshold do not appear in the Manual dialog box when this box is checked since the audiometer determines whether the subject responds and what the threshold is Semi Automatic Manual Mode is set in the Test Configuration dialog box See General Tab Test Configuration Prohibit Audiogram without Sound Level Meter Calibration If the Prohibit Audiogram without Sound Level Meter Annual Calibration check box is selected in the Test Configuration the user will be unable to start a booth if the date of last annual calibration for the sound level meter is more than one year prior to today s date In addition a warning can be displayed at the start of the audiogram if the sound level meter will need calibration within a number of days from today s date To set this number see Audiometer Setup If you wish to test but are being prohibited from doing so and you have already unselected this check box you may want to check the selected Daily Calibration Configuration to see whether
77. level of access for each user This dialog box is available only to users with administrator access PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If you have the Plus Package you have the option of also using database security measures see Initial Administrator Log In and Setup To see the Passwords dialog box 1 Choose Passwords from the File menu User Access Levels There are two levels of user access Each user is assigned an access level when that person s username user password and other security information are entered by the administrator The access levels are Operator access to all areas of the audiometer except password setup user defined field Advanced settings and the Add and Modify functions of the Test Configuration List dialog box Plus Package Only The operator cannot modify the Notification Letter or use Report Options The operator also 39 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 120 of 396 User Passwords and Multi User Installation cannot add modify delete or duplicate Extract Configurations Merge Configurations Formats and Filters Administrator access to all areas of the audiometer sets Operator passwords and if desired database security information Adding Users Only users with administrator access can add users IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To add users 1 Choose Passwords from the Control Window File menu The Passwords dialog box appears 2 Choose the
78. o NL values are not limited to list means an Edit control is needed default value o L values are limited to list means a Combo Box can be used 14 Mandatory o NM noentries are required for the row default value o M an entry for the row is required 15 And o NA do not AND the row used if an AND with the first condition causes the SQL to fail o A AND the row default value 16 SQLLike use SQL LIKE command for comparisons see the description of the SQL LIKE at the end of this section o NSL do not use SQL LIKE operator default value except for Type MEMO not allowed for Type MEMO o SL use SQL LIKE operator default value for Type MEMO I Initial Values Section optional section parameters are positional 17 InitVall initial value for first control o Default is previous value used for this field o See Keyword list o Initial start value for RANGE 180 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 261 of 396 SQL Syntax Functions 18 InitVal2 initial value for second control o Default is previous value used for this field o See Keyword list o Initial end value for RANGE 19 InitVal3 initial value for third control o Default is previous value used for this field o See Keyword list D Display Values Section optional section Display and DB values grouped together any number of times 20 DispVall N combo box display value e g Yes or No 21 DatabaseVall N database va
79. of 396 Automatic Testing and mapped to the audiometer measures ambient noise and with the MPANLs Tab you can define maximum permissible noise levels The first group box shows the three possible choices for Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Levels There are two industry standards available OSHA 29 CFR 1910 1983 and ANSI S3 1 1999 Custom settings can also be entered The setting None means that there is no MPANL for that frequency Custom settings can also be entered by selecting the Custom radio button then choosing the custom settings for the Sound Level Meter below in the Custom Settings group box Accepted values are None or between 21 0 and 62 0 inclusive The settings chosen here will be used as the MPANLs for the Retest on Noise Above MPANLs check box in the Test Configuration if that check box is selected See Retest on Noise Above MPANL for more information on that feature For information on mapping a Sound Level Meter to the audiometer see Configuring the Sound Level Meter Choosing an Automatic Test Configuration To choose the test configuration to use for automatic testing 1 Select the Audiometer menu and choose Test Configuration The Test Configuration List dialog box appears If all audiometer booths are not in Idle status an error is displayed 2 Select the test configuration from the list box and choose Close The selected test configuration will be used for all subsequent automatic testing Ad
80. of the new configuration in the Name edit box For each record group unselect the Add check box if you do not wish to add tt For each record group unselect the Update check box if you do not wish to update it QN nr d UC Apply a filter to each record group as desired To apply a filter choose the Filter button by that record group the Modify Filter dialog box will appear Enter the SOL expression Choose the Check SQL button to check the expression and or see any ASK dialog boxes that will appear When finished with the Modify Filter dialog box choose OK 7 Choose the Check SQL push button as desired 8 When finished with the Add Merge Configuration dialog box choose OK The new configuration will appear in the list in the Merge Configurations dialog box 9 In the Merge Configurations dialog box choose Close 196 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 277 of 396 Extract and Merge Modifying a Merge Configuration PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To modify a Merge configuration 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Merge Configurations The Merge Configurations dialog box appears 2 Select the configuration in the list 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Merge Configuration dialog box appears 4 Make changes as desired 5 When finished with the Modify Merge Configuration dialog box choose OK 6 In the Merge Configurations dialog box choose Close Deleting a M
81. on any surface with the optional mounting bracket Up to ten audiometer stations can be operated with the power supply provided For powering more than ten stations contact your Benson Medical Instruments dealer The audiometer operates on 90 250V AC 47 63Hz power All control of the audiometers for up to sixteen stations is accomplished through a single RS 232C serial port Two Versions of the Audiometer There are two versions of the 200 series audiometer the CCA 200 and the CCA 200mini See the following sections for installation instructions for each audiometer Single Station Installation of the CCA 200 To install a single station of the CCA 200 audiometer refer to the diagram and key to diagram numbers below The diagram shows the CCA 200 audiometer installed with the BAS 200 Bio Acoustic Simulator For complete instructions on simulator installation see Installing the BAS 200 with the CCA 200 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 84 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup To install a single station of the CCA 200 audiometer 1 If you are making changes to an existing installation unplug the power supply cord from the wall outlet 2 Connect the computer interface cable to the connector marked SERIAL IN on the audiometer 3 Connect the other end of the computer interface cable to the serial port connector on the computer 4 Connect the power supply output connector to the mating jack on the computer inte
82. referral based on the results of their baseline or annual audiogram The criteria used in the report are those listed in Otologic Referral Criteria for Occupational Hearing Conservation Programs American Academy of Otolaryngology Head and Neck Surgery Foundation Inc approved 1996 Company Recordable Reportable Shift List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report shows all the subjects in the company whose current test results indicate an OSHA Recordable Shift or MSHA Reportable Shift Age Correction data will appear on this report if the Calculate STS using Age Correction check box in the Add Company or Modify Company dialog box has been selected 161 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 242 of 396 Report Templates Company Reports Company Recordable Shift Line Out List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report shows all subjects in the company whose current test results indicate that an OSHA Recordable Shift shown on an earlier audiogram was not persistent The Recordable Shift is therefore lined out Company Roster This report shows the raw data and percentages of STS Recordable Shifts and hearing impairment in the company Company Retest List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report lists all subjects in a company whose current test results indicate an STS as defined by OSHA and MSHA and who therefore are to be retested within the Retest Period Company STS Exception List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report lists all subjects in a comp
83. subject 4 Choose OK A dialog box appears asking whether you wish to merge the test records of the currently displayed subject with the existing subject 5 Choose Yes A dialog box appears asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing subject data with the currently displayed subject data 6 Choose No The audiograms and histories of the currently displayed subject will now be associated with the existing subject but the demographic data associated with the currently displayed subject have been discarded 7 In the Modify Subject dialog box choose OK 120 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 201 of 396 Audiograms and Histories Audiograms Some audiogram data selections are affected by company settings see Companies If you have selected Separate Left Right Baselines baseline check boxes will be visible in these dialog boxes for both ears The following sections discuss audiogram data fields database STS Calculation and procedures for adding modifying and deleting audiograms For information on the audiogram analysis columns in Audiogram View see Audiogram Analysis Columns To see the Add Audiogram dialog box 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Add then Audiogram PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If you have not selected Automatic Baseline Revision for a company the OSHA or MSHA STS Baseline and OSHA Recordable or MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline check boxes can be checked in the Add Audiogra
84. test must not affect the patient LD has inte grated this standard test in AUDit Simply calibrate the microphone then start the test Failed frequen cies are reported with a large red X Speaker tests visual inspection these are only two of the many tests that are available Tests can recall the audiometer configurations and test instrumentation from previous calibrations Perform all or select only desired tests the main mea surement screen displays a selection of tests as well as their current status Once a test is selected simple prompts indicate what stimulus is required Adjustments can be made immediately in some tests sn n iudi eon T Fn bilem m mon Generate results reports and certificates Results each test displays immediate results on screen with measured data and standard limits It is possible to retest each failed frequency level or function Custom reports and certificates any stored calibration may be printed in whole or part A certificate can also be printed with your own customized certification text Export from database should you desire even more flexi bility test results can be exported to your own template as csv files Page 374 of 396 AMC493 Artificial Mastoid Use this innovative transducer for no fuss bone vibrator testing The LD AMCA93 artificial mastoid is a precision mechanical coupler used to calibrate bone conduction hearing aids and audiometer bone vibrators
85. the Acoustic Cal levels for the selected frequency Audiometer Technical PRY ce Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual Selection of Calibration Control Options Control of Frequency and Output is completed by using drop down menus or typing the desired output AudiometerTechnical 7 Se Training Course I d a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual Selection of Calibration Control Options Control of Frequency and Output is completed by using the combo boxes to select the desired output Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 24 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration Visual Inspection Acoustical Levels Frequency Distortion Rise Fall Times On Off Crosstalk Linearity NM rnaousaWwnNs Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Visual Inspection 1 Inspect Case for any crack or breakage Inspect Headset for any damage or frayed cords loose set screws or damaged 4 phone plugs Check condition of MX51 Ear Cushions Check H
86. the ASKSYS function Refer to Database Field Definitions for table names and field names See the following sections for information on these two functions and procedures relating to custom select sorts Adding a Select Sort PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add a Select Sort 1 From the Report menu in the Control Window choose Options The Report Options dialog box appears 2 In the Select Sort group box choose Add The Add Select Sort dialog box appears 3 Enter the name of the new Select Sort in the Select Sort Name edit box 4 Make entries in the SQL Expression edit box as desired 5 When finished with the Add Select Sort dialog box choose OK 6 When finished with the Report Options dialog box choose Close Modifying a Select Sort PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To modify a Select Sort 1 From the Report menu in the Control Window choose Options The Report Options dialog box appears 2 In the Select Sort group box choose Modify The Modify Select Sort dialog box appears 3 Make the desired changes 4 When finished with the Modify Select Sort dialog box choose OK 5 When finished with the Report Options dialog box choose Close 174 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 255 of 396 Report Options Deleting a Select Sort PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Factory defined Select Sorts cannot be deleted To delete a custom Select Sort 1 From the Report menu in the Control Window choose Options The Report Options dialog box appe
87. the Log File edit box or browse for the file using the Browse button 5 Choose OK Restoring Records An Overview The Restore function is available only if the Database Interface in Setup is set for Storage IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE The Restore dialog box enables you to restore data from a file database The same security measures are in force as for the initial log in to the system 184 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 265 of 396 Backup and Restore The File mdb edit box is for the name of the file database to be restored Alternatively you can browse for the file using the Browse push button The default file database and location are d stx mdb If the Write log file check box is selected a log file will be created that you can check later for information The Log File edit box is for the location and name of the log file You can change the location and name from the default ones if you wish or browse for the file using the Browse button To see the Restore dialog box 1 Choose Restore from the File menu in the Control Window PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Restore dialog box enables you to restore data from either a file database or a SQL database The same security measures are in force as for the initial log in to the system The Database Type group box shows two choices File database and SQL database The File mdb edit box is used if you are restoring a file database Enter the n
88. the Reportable Baseline X indicates that this audiogram is the Reportable Baseline for the left ear X indicates that this audiogram is the Reportable Baseline for the right ear Scale of Hearing Impairment The Scale of Hearing Impairment used to categorize audiogram results is shown below dB Impairment Range 10 to 25 Normal 26to 40 Mild Loss 41to55 Moderate Loss 56to 70 Moderately Severe Loss 71to90 Severe Loss 9 Plus Profound Loss OSHA STS Baseline and MSHA STS Baseline The STS Baseline is the baseline that is used for calculating STS When calculating STS the audiometer uses the most recent audiogram that is marked as the STS Baseline IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE The OSHA STS Baseline check box appears in the Add Audiogram Modify Audiogram dialog box If any future audiogram for this subject is marked as the OSHA STS Baseline the database will no longer regard the present audiogram as the STS baseline that is there is no need to go back to this audiogram and unselect the check box Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC 132 Page 213 of 396 Analysis IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE The STS Baseline check box appears in the Add Audiogram Modify Audiogram dialog box if you have not chosen Automatic Baseline Revision for this company If on the other hand Automatic Baseline Revision is enabled the check box will be gray and you will not be able to make changes to it If yo
89. the date of this calibration check This edit box must be filled in with a valid date for the audiogram to be saved The Date and Time edit boxes are for the date and time respectively of the daily calibration check These edit boxes are automatically filled in with today s date and the present time Change these fields to the correct date and time if necessary The Reference check box allows you to mark this audiogram as a reference audiogram If you are marking an audiogram as the reference audiogram there is no need to go back to the previous reference and uncheck this box The Functional Check check box will already be checked if a a functional check was performed on the audiometer today Subsequent functional checks on that day will select the check box in all daily calibration checks performed on that day This feature allows you to perform the Functional Check either before or after the daily calibration The Simulator Serial No edit box is for the serial number of the simulator that was used in the calibration check The Examiner field is for the name of the examiner You can set up a look up box for this field with the Examiner push button For more information see Look up Boxes The Comment edit box is for any comments by the technician about the daily calibration You can set up a look up box for this field using the Comment push button The Results box shows whether the audiometer passed the daily calibration check Fo
90. the difference ASCII and Database Fields of Different Sizes PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If for a certain field the ASCII and Database fields are different in size you must use format strings to handle the difference For example if in the Sex field you wished to map M in the ASCII field to MAN in the Database field you would 213 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 294 of 396 Import and Export modify this field so that A would be the format string for the ASCII field and ABC would be the format string for the Database field Bitmapped Field PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The database can automatically determine which audiograms are to be used as baseline audiograms However if you wish to indicate baseline audiograms without the aid of the software you can use Field Mapping for this purpose With Field Mapping you can indicate whether an audiogram is to be used as an OSHA MSHA STS Baseline or OSHA Recordable Shift MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline audiogram You will need to use the bitmapped field Tests gt TestType The field Tests gt TestType has a Database combo box with the selections Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 and so on up to Bit 32 For import you must set the appropriate bit s to 1 for the audiogram to be used as either baseline using Field Mapping For the bitmapped field select the bit to set ifa given ASCII string in the imported data is an exact match for the entry in the ASCII column of the
91. the selected Test Configuration See General Tab Test Configuration Baseline Audiogram The baseline audiogram thresholds are displayed if a baseline audiogram is available If no baseline audiogram is available all fields will indicate not tested NT Status Help The Status Help box displays the current audiometer status 1 e idle testing error etc If an error occurs this box contains a description of the error e g No release of response switch the ear and frequency where the error occurred and instructions for training the subject The Status Help box displays Noise if the Sound Level Meter determines that the maximum permissible ambient noise levels MPANLs have been exceeded 60 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 141 of 396 Control Window Audiogram Graph Graphs displaying the audiogram thresholds for the left and right ears appear in the Audiometer Information Tab The user may choose to display or hide these graphs as described in Audiometer Setup Viewing Information Tabs To view the information tab of an individual audiometer e Click the mouse over the tab Or e Click the mouse on the Audiometer number or Status column of the audiometer s test display Ofr Use the accelerator keys i e typing alt 1 selects the audiometer information tab 61 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 142 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 143 of 396 Automatic Tes
92. this feature is enabled there See Daily Calibration Configuration 70 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 151 of 396 Automatic Testing Prohibit Audiogram without Annual Calibration If the Prohibit Audiogram without Audiometer Annual Calibration check box is selected in the Test Configuration the user will be unable to start a booth if the date of last annual calibration for that booth is more than one year prior to today s date In addition a warning can be displayed at the start of the audiogram if the booth will need calibration within a number of days from today s date To set this number see Audiometer Setup If you wish to test but are being prohibited from doing so and you have already unselected this check box you may want to check the selected Daily Calibration Configuration to see whether this feature is enabled there See Daily Calibration Configuration Prohibit Audiogram without Functional Check If the Prohibit Audiogram without Audiometer Functional Check check box is selected in the Test Configuration the user will be unable to start a booth until a functional check has been completed on that booth today If you wish to test but are being prohibited from doing so and you have already unselected this check box you may want to check the selected Daily Calibration Configuration to see whether this feature is enabled there See Daily Calibration Configuration Prohibit Audiogram without Daily
93. to test using either the left knob control or the left and right arrow keys on your computer keyboard 4 Choose the initial stimulus intensity using either the right knob control or the up and down arrow keys on your computer keyboard 5 Choose the Present Stimulus button to present the stimulus The Stimulus indicator flashes to show stimulus presentation The Response indicator flashes as the subject responds The audiometer will present a pulsed or continuous stimulus depending on the Test Configuration and Information Tab settings If the subject responds the stimulus level will be lowered by 10dB otherwise the stimulus level is raised 5dB TT Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 158 of 396 Manual Testing 6 Continue presenting the stimulus until a threshold is established The threshold is recorded in the appropriate position near the top of the dialog box It is highlighted inverted in color When the subject has provided sufficient responses to determine a threshold the threshold is recorded in the appropriate position near the top of the dialog box Threshold determination criteria are the same as in automatic mode and are described in the section Threshold Determination To determine another threshold manually go to step 2 above Choose Close to quit manual mode 78 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 159 of 396 Daily Calibration Check Daily Calibration The OSHA Hearing Conservation Amendme
94. with the CCA 200 audiometer 1 Unplug the audiometer power supply cord from the wall outlet 2 Connect the supplied serial cable between the COMPUTER port of the Simulator Sound Level Meter and the EXPANSION port of the audiometer 3 Connect the supplied interconnect cable between the RESPONSE jack of the audiometer and the AUDIOMETER jack of the simulator sound level meter For daily calibration checks the response switch should not be connected to the Simulator Sound Level Meter For subject testing the response switch is inserted into the RESPONSE jack of the Simulator Sound Level Meter Internal switching removes the Simulator Sound Level Meter from the circuit so that it may be left installed at all times with no effect on testing 4 Plug the microphone into the MIC jack on the Simulator Sound Level Meter 5 Suspend the microphone from the ceiling for best results 6 Plug the power supply cord into the wall outlet The red power LED on the Simulator Sound Level Meter should glow indicating that the instrument 1s powered 7 Repeat the preceding steps for any remaining audiometers or Simulator Sound Level Meters The power supply provided will power up to ten instruments If you are installing more than ten instruments in total contact your Benson Medical Instruments dealer for assistance 27 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 108 of 396 BAS 200slm and SLM 200 Installation a a SRO Install
95. you chose another user the Modify User dialog box will appear 3 Make changes as desired 4 When finished choose OK 5 In the Passwords dialog box choose Close Deleting Users Only users with administrator access can delete users To delete users 1 Choose Passwords from the Control Window File menu The Passwords dialog box appears 2 Select the user to delete 3 Choose the Delete push button 4 Confirm the deletion by choosing OK The Administrator may not be deleted 5 In the Passwords dialog box choose Close Multi User Installation PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This section is intended for those who plan to run a Benson Medical Instruments database on a computer that is on the same network as at least one other Benson Medical product Each Benson Medical Instruments product runs an MSDE server Contact Benson Medical Instruments Co for assistance if you need to find out the 41 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 122 of 396 User Passwords and Multi User Installation MSDE instance names of the MSDE servers on your Benson Medical products or if your network administrator wishes to set up a SQL server for the network You may need to find out the IP address NetBIOS name or work group of the computer that is running the Benson Medical database before following the procedure below Ifthe IP address is dynamic contact your network administrator for assistance 1 Install the program on Computer 1 2 Inst
96. 0 25 35 50 66 100 and 200 Total Customer Satisfaction Guaranteed Larson Davis Inc 3425 Walden Avenue Depew NY 14043 2495 USA Toll Free 888 258 3222 amp Larson Davis ISO 9001 2000 CERTIFIED Phone 716 926 8243 Email sales LarsonDavis com www LarsonDavis com Fax 716 926 8215 A PCB PIEZOTRONICS DIV ICP is a registered trademark of PCB Group Inc All other trademarks are property of their respective owners In the interest of constant product improvement specifications are subject to change without notice 2006 Larson Davis Inc All rights reserved Printed in U S A LD 824 0606 D0500 0003 Rev E Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Larson Davis provides a complete line of acoustic and vibration measurement tools including dosimeters sound level meters real time analyzers pre amplifiers calibrators and microphones Page 372 of 396 AUDit amp System 824 Audiometer Calibration and Electro acoustic Test System A comprehensive line of couplers systems and software Larson Davis audiometer calibration systems combine the speed and power of the System 824 ur Research amp Development real time analyzer with the sophisticated yet user Audiometer design and testing friendly AUDit software Standard audiometer Earphones and hearing aids specification tests can be performed manually or Electro acoustic testing under computer control with greater ease than with any
97. 008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 100 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 101 of 396 Bio Acoustic Simulator Installation Installing the Bio Acoustic Simulator The installation of the Bio Acoustic Simulator with either the CCA 200 audiometer or the CCA 200mini audiometer is described in the following sections Installing the BAS 200 with the CCA 200 The Bio Acoustic Simulator provides a convenient method for doing the required daily biologic check of the audiometer The simulator can be left installed at all times for additional convenience and time savings and may either sit on a table or shelf or be mounted on the wall with the included wall mounting bracket The simulator operates with power supplied from the audiometer so there is no need to check that the unit is switched off when not in use or change batteries The simulator is installed with the CCA 200 audiometer as shown in the diagram below See also the key to diagram numbers below The supplied interconnect cable is plugged into the RESPONSE jack of the audiometer and the AUDIOMETER jack of the simulator For daily calibrations the response switch is disconnected from the simulator For subject testing the response switch is inserted into the RESPONSE jack of the simulator Internal switching removes the simulator from the circuit so that it may be left installed at all times with no effect on testing 21 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 102 of 396 Bio Acou
98. 008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 117 of 396 Bracket Installation of Simulator or Simulator Sound Level Meter in Bracket Key to Numbers in Diagram 1 Bracket 2 CCA 200mini Audiometer 3 Simulator or Simulator Sound Level Meter Cabling of Equipment in Bracket The instructions diagram and key to diagram numbers below describe how to cable the BAS 200slm with the CCA 200mini audiometer in the bracket To cable the equipment in the bracket 1 Connect one end of the serial cable to the COMPUTER port on the BAS 200sIm 2 Connect the other end of the serial cable to the EXPANSION port on the audiometer 37 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 118 of 396 Bracket Cabling of Equipment in Bracket Key to Numbers in Diagram 1 Bracket 2 CCA 200mini Audiometer 3 Simulator Sound Level Meter s4 Serial Cable 38 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 119 of 396 User Passwords and Multi User Installation User Names and User Passwords Access to the audiometer is restricted by password The audiometer software allows you to set up individual users and associated passwords to control access to the program Only users with administrator access can add and delete users See the next section for information on what the different types of users are allowed to do A user name and user password must always be entered when the audiometer software is started The Passwords dialog box lists all the users and shows the
99. 008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 128 of 396 Control Window E Choose or create a Formats for Importing and Exporting Export Filters Apply a filter to Export Filters data for export Backup Backs up stored Backing up Records An Overview data NEM MAN backed up Restoring Records An Overview data Exit Ends your testing A session only Modify Letter Modifies the Modifying the Notification Letter Notification Letter Add Adds a subject or Subjects audiogram adds a Audiograms history Plus Subject History Package only Modify Modifies a subject Modifying a Subject or audiogram Modifying an Audiogram modifies a history Modifying a History m Package only Delete All i AudiogramDeleting an Audiogram ject Deleting a HistoryDeleting a History Only Deletes all histories for a subject View Refresh Shows the latest Viewing the Work of Other Users data entered by all users Plus Package Report Print Choose the report template and select sort options Edit Find Finds a subject Finding a Subject Delete Deletes a subject or Deleting a Subject audiogram deletes Deleting an Audiogram a history Plus Deleting a History Options Make changes to Report Options 48 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 129 of 396 Control Window report templates and select sort options AudiometerAssign Assigns a subject Assigning a Su
100. 010 into the Left or Right connector of the audiometer depending on which one you are testing Connect the remaining connector of the ADP010 to the headphone When the on screen instructions ask you to set up the Larson Davis 824 to obtain acoustic readings disconnect the ADPO10 adapter from the Larson Davis 824 and reconnect the microphone coupler and pre amp assembly to the top of the Larson Davis 824 using the cable provided for this purpose 13 When the tests are complete choose the Next push button The Audiometer Calibration Phone Serial Number dialog box will appear 14 Enter the serial numbers of the earphones in the edit boxes 15 Choose Next The Audiometer Calibration Complete dialog box appears 16 If the audiometer passed calibration choose the Set Annual Calibration Date push button If the audiometer did not pass you will not be able to set the calibration date or print the certificate 17 Choose whether to print the certificate to screen using the Print to Screen check box If you wish to save the certificate choose to Print to Screen and follow the instructions in Saving the Annual Calibration Report below 18 Choose the number of copies using the Copies control 19 Choose the Print push button to print the calibration certificate 20 Choose the Finish push button Saving the Annual Calibration Report These instructions assume that Automatic Annual Calibration has just been completed See the sections
101. 06 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 187 of 396 Companies If Automatic Baseline Revision is not enabled for a company Audiogram Analysis columns will not show indications having to do with retests persistence or improvement If Automatic Baseline Revision is checked for a company the user will not be able to make changes to the OSHA STS Baseline MSHA STS Baseline or the OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline check boxes in the Add Audiogram or Modify Audiogram dialog box The Company Baseline Revision List report will be available if Automatic Baseline Revision has been enabled for a company If Automatic Baseline Revision is not enabled this report cannot be printed Separate Left Right Baselines If the Separate Left Right Baselines check box is checked the database will establish separate baseline audiograms for the left and right ears for this company When the subject is retested in the future the software analyzes the data for the left and right ears separately and independently If one ear meets the criteria for revision of baseline then the database updates the baseline for that ear only With Separate Left Right Baselines if the ears show different hearing trends the test date of the left ear baseline may be different from the test date of the right ear baseline Changing this setting will cause the database to reanalyze audiograms Retest Period Using the Retest Period box y
102. 102 Audiograms Page trien eta geabwa eoru ER rRe ed bx ue Edna a 102 Audiogram Context Menu eeeeseseeeeeseeeeennernnne 102 Histones Mp o Pec m 103 History Context Menu sssssssesseeeeeennenmeeneenennne nnn 103 Viewing Audiograms and Histories with Plus Package 103 Companies 105 Go gei Tm 105 Viewing Companies rr mcg teisse e tet e ree D Eat ene 106 Company Sells cusa arden eg pepe re t eR ep pev o 106 Calculate STS Using Age Correction check box 106 Automatic Baseline Revision seseeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 106 Separate Left Right Baselines ssssseesssss 107 Retest Perlod u iis or ar bra on She nike e eani bs 107 NR Substitution dB ssssssseeeee 107 Regulation iioi ee desee eror ira e Akaka 108 Subiect ID FORMA ee eei tiit onsec a na auibus en 108 Changing the Subject ID Format eeseesesssesssss 109 Addi g a Gompaltyc oo terrore ro x ben nin teal etes 110 Modifying a Company sssssssssseseeee eee 111 Deleting a Company 5 oisi eee Ae eee en 111 Duplicating a Company sess 112 Subjects 113 iler 113 Add Subject Dialog BOX i et pho pese turece cts 113 Find Subject Dialog BOX 5 5 2 thee a E p LIRE een 114 vi Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 75 of 396 Table Of Contents Viewing Subjects
103. 5 pulses second 10 100 dBHL 3dB 5dB step Not greater than 50msec nor less than 20msec 30msec typ Less than 3 at full output Greater than 70dB 95dB typ Telephonics TDH39 10 ohm earphones with MX41 AAR cushions 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 Watts max 248 Page 329 of 396 Trademarks Trademark Information The name Solo is a trademark of Benson Medical Instruments Co The name Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies 249 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 330 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 331 of 396 Warranty Warranty Benson Medical Instruments Co warrants that all hardware products will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of purchase We will repair or replace at our option hardware that is returned freight prepaid to us during this period You must obtain return authorization by contacting Benson Medical Instruments Co before returning any products Benson Medical Instruments Co warrants that all software products will perform substantially in accordance with these electronic instruction files for a period of one year from date of purchase We will replace software that does not perform as described above as your sole remedy In no case will Benson Medical Instruments Co be responsible f
104. A 4c velvet r 103 225 Reportable Shift 127 Reportable Shift Baseline 127 setting MSHA as Regulation 103 STS Baseline au et tet 126 STS with age correction 225 STS without age correction 225 MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline ud pond 102 MSHA STS Baseline 126 Much Better uico eser 129 Much Worse sco oso Ee 129 Multiple Report Print 90 N National Hearing Conservation Association essessssse 102 NL Cohimirs Lim 133 NL abbreviation for Noise Level ntu E A AAE 133 No Charige esci eee 129 No Response NR 65 103 description of error ssse 65 substituting a numerical value for NR EE Eni iced cd ecu 103 test of voice instruction 64 noise levels d anhistetism Us 70 Noise message in test display 56 Notification Letter 149 150 NR Substitution check box 103 268 Page 349 of 396 NR abbreviation for No Response ASE usc ius desk Soo ee ae 65 103 description of error sss 65 substituting a numerical value for NR Saat ENORMI Rr TRA 103 text of voice instruction 64 O OHM roni iie 16 216 220 data transfer using third party databases 216 procedure dee diets 220 setting as Database Interface 16 OSHA nire erar eee 103 225 Recordable Shift 127 Recordable Shift Baseline
105. Add push button The Add User dialog box appears Enter the user name in the User name edit box Select the access level for this user in the Access combo box Enter the password in the Password and Confirm Password edit boxes When finished choose OK Inthe Passwords dialog box choose Close IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To add users Choose Passwords from the Control Window File menu The Passwords dialog box appears 2 Choose the Add push button The Add User dialog box appears Enter the user name in the User name edit box ies Select the access level for this user in the Access combo box gom Enter the password in the Password and Confirm Password edit boxes 40 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 121 of 396 User Passwords and Multi User Installation 6 Choose whether you are going to enter the database username and database password or use Windows Database Security If you choose to use Windows Database Security you will not be able to enter a database username and database password 7 When finished choose OK 8 In the Passwords dialog box choose Close Modifying Users Only users with administrator access can edit users To edit users 1 Choose Passwords from the Control Window File menu The Passwords dialog box appears 2 Select the user to modify and choose the Modify push button If you chose the Administrator the Modify Password dialog box will appear If
106. Audiogram Analysis Columns ssseee 131 Scale of Hearing Impairment suus 132 OSHA STS Baseline and MSHA STS Baseline 132 OSHA Recordable Shift amp MSHA Reportable Shift 133 OSHA Recordable MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline 133 Annual Not Used uter ies o De a or biet 134 Belle oni dorados eee aquel Efi odorata po ats pac 134 PARSE TBSU Gear enero e are eir EV e YER FO e RR p XN RS 134 Improvement mtm 134 Improvement Persistent Improvement 135 Improvement lt 6 MONth cccccccsssescceeseeeeeeceesseeeeeeseneeees 135 Missing or Invalid Data sese 135 MUCH Belter concio e rp atu nce aede HEURE Dietas tia 136 Much WOrse sepa dra cong Roni ER onbinoirda FasFoE Erie su Ur Fesp apii SEDI tad 136 NO Change fe UTE 136 Persistent IMProveMent cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 136 Persist nt s TS aceto saicois i enbo oder via bonn Le be S ev i 136 Recordable STS eeessseeseseeeee eene 137 Recordable STS Lined OUE uie reb nt entree tine 137 vii Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 76 of 396 Table Of Contents Rejected Test Data eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 137 Repealed Recordable STS cssscccccceceeneesesseeeeeeeeeenenees 137 Repealed Reportable cccccccsssssssssss
107. Audiometers 53 right click menu for Histories 98 right click menu for Subjects 98 merging records 180 configurations cseeseeese 182 Extract Merge record groups 179 267 Page 348 of 396 OVOEVIG WS in cient an 180 PLO CCUUTE sexsiicsotersotdsianieerencsbonntancs 181 microphone ssse 17 53 Missing or Invalid Data 129 modifying ova exti dns 112 audiograms sssseseee 119 audiometer configurations 17 audiometers for daily calibration SLOLA SE m 139 companies csseeseeee enn 106 Extract configurations 178 Tt efe cocer rue Erebi 206 histories iod re pere ERR 124 import export formats 203 language Sisaren an ann 84 Merge configurations 184 Notification Letter 150 report for Multiple Report Print 92 report templates ssss 162 Select SOFE SO ee taste er eessen 164 SubJeetsz see me SIE 112 user defined fields 209 USES cete esi a e etes 41 mounting bracket 13 IIO USC e rrr aite dra Yes 54 moving subjects to different COMIPANT SS herve hoch 113 MPANL Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Level67 70 132 MPANLs Columns MPANLs tab Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Index MR abbreviation for Multiple EROSDODS d eid es 65 MSH
108. Automatic Clear on Test Save 63 Men METRY coron ta oret AR ag 47 toolbar button ssssss 51 companies sss 101 102 adding Selected rettet 106 All Company List 153 Company Exception List 153 Company Recordable Reportable SB Liste ios eee oe eee 153 Company Recordable Shift Line Out Ito teres ut Ame a AS 153 Company Retest List 154 Company Roster report 153 Company STS Exception List 154 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Company STS List 154 Company Summary report 154 Company Test Schedule List 154 deleting eet 107 duplicating ssss 101 107 modifying ssssss 101 106 moving subjects to a different company eeeeeeseeeeeeeees 101 113 SEINES o s aee ree Es 101 VIEWINGS sie ife a 102 Company Baseline Revision 153 Company Exception List 153 Company Medical Referral List E EEE ET 153 Company Recordable Reportable SH Li Stin reee Fette 153 Company Recordable Shift Line Out Listenn 153 Company Retest List 154 Company Roster 153 Company STS Exception List 154 Company Summary 154 Company Test Schedule List 154 confirmation of response 64 Continuous Display Update check DOX eerta d Soweit Oe v PATI 221 continuous stimulus
109. CA 200 27 Installing the BAS 200slm with the CCA 200mini 29 Installing the SLM 200 with the CCA 200 sssss 32 Configuring the Sound Level Meter ueessesssss 34 Bracket 35 Bracket for BAS 200 or BAS 200slm with CCA 200mini 35 Installation of Bracket on Wall seseesseeeesessssss 35 Installation of Audiometer in Bracket 36 Installation of BAS 200 or BAS 200slm in Bracket 36 1996 2008 Benson Medical Instruments Co iii Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 72 of 396 Table Of Contents Cabling of Equipment in Bracket ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 User Passwords and Multi User Installation 39 User Names and User PaSSWOMdsS cccc cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 39 User Access Levels 52 eredi rnnr cot pe ta bn Dar de Ene pinu odd dn 39 Adding sets uiuo see repe o TET 40 Modifying DS6etS cei i e adden ens 41 Deleting USBIS uero e tosta De P tie Desbe o E Rete ood ea peas 41 Multi User Installation 41 Viewing the Work of Other Users seseeeee 42 Error Log 43 Error OG NUR i a E A TE E R 43 User s Manual PDF File 45 Printed Documentation cccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeauaaaeeeess 45 Control Window 47 Control NV INOW siens ops ads cwesenaseuttaasutedvchysagvaceaiehentiy Deiystuase 47 Menu
110. Calibration If the Prohibit Audiogram without Audiometer Daily Calibration check box is selected in the Test Configuration the user will be unable to start a booth until a daily calibration has been performed on that booth today Test Sequence Tab Test Configuration The Test Sequence Tab is in the Test Configuration dialog box This page shows the test sequence that will be presented to the subject for this test configuration To see the Test Configuration dialog box choose Test Configuration from the Audiometer menu and select a test configuration from the list The Ear column specifies which ear to test Left or Right The Freq column specifies the test frequency The frequencies range from 500 to 8kHz e The Start column is the level of the initial stimulus at that frequency in dB HTL or VSL Variable Starting Level A value in the HSL field overrides this setting if a subject has been assigned and a previous audiogram for this person is available to the audiometer software The Low column specifies the lowest level in dB HTL that you want the audiometer to present and hence the lowest threshold that can be determined 71 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 152 of 396 Automatic Testing HSL specifies the Historical Starting Level HSL This page can be used to program a retest of one or more frequencies See Programmed Retests Historical Starting Level HSL Similar to Variable Starting Le
111. DOEHRS HC Audiometer Refresh K BENSON MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS A Comprehensive Training Course amp Training Manual System Support and Service Benson Medical Instruments Co CCA 200mini BAS 200 Audiometric System 23 1 is ir ix b SPI a i PO Box 190 Mountain WI 54149 0190 USA www srmi com skipm srmi com 715 276 2947Office 715 850 1568 24 7 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 1 of 396 This document is provided under Copyright by SRMi Consulting LLC and Benson Medical Instrument Co and may be reproduced with written permission from the above copyright owners Permission is granted to the Department of Defense to reproduce in written form per the following contract Contract W 81 XWHO08CO0071 DOEHRS AUDIOMETERS PURCHASE IMPLEMENTATION AND TRAINING Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 2 of 396 Audiometer Technical Training Course Table of Contents Presentation Slides 5 CCA 200mini BAS 200 69 Operators Manual Sample Calibration Forms 357 Calibration Systems 367 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 3 of 396 This Page is blank Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 4 of 396 Audiometer Technical Training Course Consulting LLC Presentation Slides System Support and Service Benson Medical Instruments Co CCA 200mini BAS 200 Audiometric System DOEHRS HC Audiometer Refresh SRMi Consulting LLC Lindor Skip Maletzke 715 276
112. Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 In the Audiometers list box select the audiometer for which you wish to modify a daily calibration audiogram 3 Inthe Audiograms list box select the daily calibration audiogram for that audiometer that you wish to modify 4 Select the Modify push button at the right of the Audiograms list box The Modify Daily Calibration Audiogram dialog box appears 5 Make changes to the daily calibration audiogram as desired 6 When finished choose OK 7 Choose Close in the Daily Calibration dialog box 147 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 228 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage Deleting a Daily Calibration Audiogram PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To delete a daily calibration audiogram From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears In the Audiometers list box select the audiometer for which you wish to delete a daily calibration audiogram In the Audiograms list box select the daily calibration audiogram for that audiometer that you wish to delete Select the Delete push button at the right of the Audiograms list box The Delete Daily Calibration Audiogram dialog box appears 5 Choose Yes to delete the daily calibration audiogram Choose Close in the Daily Calibration dialog box To delete all daily calibration audiograms for an audiometer From the File menu in the Contr
113. ES 11 81 0 SOOO ea Nana eidcuee mie baecen fce biet epus os 945 79 5 4000 iussis mme deere Rm tne Wek oleae eee ioe 10 5 80 5 E d 13 5 83 5 E Next Standard 1910 95 App F E Regulations Standards 29 CFR Table of Contents Back to Top http www osha gov index html http www dol gov Contact Us Freedom of Information Act Customer Survey Privacy and Security Statement Disclaimers Occupational Safety amp Health Administration 200 Constitution Avenue NW Washington DC 20210 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 360 of 396 Navy and Marine Corps Public Health Center Calibration Laboratory Certificate of Audiometer Calibration SUBMITTING ACTIVITY TECHNICIAN MANUFACTURER SERIAL NUMBER CALIBRATED PER ANS 53 6 1989 FREQUENCY S P L LEFT TDH 39 49 50 Hz E R 70dB H req d final rev d r rev d error norm final error 71 5n19 0 Remarks Job Number Date Technician Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 361 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 362 of 396 CERTIFICATE OF AUDIOMETER CALIBRATION THIS IS TO CERTIFY THE i SERIAL NUMBER AS SHOWN ON THE REVERSE SIDE WAS CALIBRATED ON 20 THE ABOVE INSTRUMENT COMPLIES WITH THE AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD INSTITUTE SPECIFICATION FOR AUDIOMETERS ANSI S3 6 1996 OR EARLIER AS SHOWN ON THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS CERTIFICATE ANSI CERTIFICATION CALIBRATED BY mill Consulting LLC EXPIRES ON LINDOR R
114. HearTrak Windows If the database interface you are using is HearTrak Windows follow the procedures below to assign a subject and save an audiogram Refer to the database documentation for details For information on printing an audiogram refer to the database documentation To assign a subject 1 Choose Assign Subject from the Audiometer menu Refer to database documentation for further instructions 235 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 316 of 396 Data Transfer To save a test 1 When the test status indicates Finished choose Save Print Test from the Audiometer menu Refer to database documentation for further instructions Medgate If the database interface you are using is Medgate follow the procedures below to assign a subject and save an audiogram Refer to the database documentation for details For information on printing an audiogram refer to the database documentation To assign a subject 1 Choose Assign Subject from the Audiometer menu Refer to database documentation for further instructions To save an audiogram 1 When the test status indicates Finished choose Save Print Test from the Audiometer menu Refer to the database documentation for further instructions OHM If the database interface you are using is OHM follow the procedures below to assign a subject and save an audiogram Refer to the database documentation for details and further instructions For information on pri
115. Hz Standards Compliance 1EC61672 1 2002 Class 1 IEC60804 1985 Type 1 IEC60651 1993 1EC61260 1995 Class 1 ANSI 81 4 1983 ANSI S1 11 1985 Type 1D C Indicates compliance with EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive 824 Optional System Configurations octave 16 0 Hz to 16 Hz 824 SSA Upgrades 824 S or 824L to sound spectrum m 4 i analysis capability Atine FT oto 20k 824 LOG Upgrades 824S or 824A to logging capability RAF Adds 400 ine FFT analysis to any 824 SPL A C Flat for Slow Fast and Impulse 824 RTA Adds RTA module for spectra autostore RT60 s Lmin A C Flat for Slow Fast and Impulse NC and RC to any 824 Lmax A C Flat for Slow Fast and Impulse 824 AUD Firmware for audiometer calibration and total Lpeak A C Flat harmonic distortion measurement Leg A C Flat 824 WND Firmware to enable logging of wind speed and SEL A C Flat direction or tachometer reading TAKT3 amp TAKTS A C Flat for Slow Fas 824 RTA FFT Adds both RTA and FF nodules to any 824 824 ACC Adds standard accessories package to 8248 Additional metrics Real time 1 3 octave frequency analysis TWA SE Dose Projected Dose C minus A Six Ln values user selectable Leq max Lmin spectra with 1 3 or 1 1 display six spectral Ln s overall or interval Memory 2 Megabytes of memory sufficient to store any one of the following illi
116. KSYS COMPANY For an example of using only ASKSYS COMPANY review the Current Company factory defined Select Sort for any report template To join tables on Company ID in both the current and the non current tables use both ASKSYS CURCOMPANY and ASKSYS COMPANY For an example of using both ASKSYS functions review the Current Subject factory defined Select Sort in the Notification Letter report template The current tables are used only to store temporary information about the so called current subject and or current test for printing reports whose identities depend on what you are doing in the program at any given time These tables are written to and then erased for each print job The Current Subject factory defined Select Sorts only were designed for printing reports based on the current subject and or current test at any given time If you are writing your own SQL you don t need to refer to the current tables or to ASKSYS CURCOMPANY unless you want your report s data to include the current subject and or current test The ASKEX Function The ASKEX function is described in this section Its name comes from the fact that it is an extended ASK function ASKEX Group TableName FieldName Prompt VarName1 VarName2 VarName3 A Type Size F Range ListDatabase Blanks LockList 7I InitVal1 InitVal2 InitVal3 D DispVal1 DatabaseVal1 DispVaIN DatabaseValN Main Sect
117. LLC Page 202 of 396 Audiograms and Histories The message Rejected test data in the Audiogram Analysis columns indicates that the audiogram has been rejected by means of the Reject Audiogram check box Sound Level Meter group box In the Sound Level Meter group box in the Add Audiogram Modify Audiogram dialog box values may be entered for sound level meter readings in the Levels edit boxes if the readings are between the values of 21 0 and 62 0 inclusive If the readings you wish to enter are lower or higher than this range use lt 21 0 or 762 0 This manual entry of readings would be done if you have readings from a third party sound level meter that you wish to save with this audiogram If a Benson Medical Instruments Sound Level Meter was installed at the time this audiogram was performed the Levels edit boxes will show the set of last sound level readings taken The MPANL Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Level values of the test configuration for this audiogram appear below the Levels edit boxes if a Sound Level Meter was installed and the Retest on Noise Above MPANL check box was selected in the test configuration for this audiogram An indication of In Range will appear for this audiogram in this group box will appear if a Sound Level Meter was installed and the Retest on Noise Above MPANL check box was selected for the test configuration for this audiogram STS Calculation The audiometer software calc
118. N tA Save and or print the report if desired See the sections below To save the annual calibration report 1 In the Calibration Sound Level Meter dialog box choose the Options push button The Calibration Options dialog box appears 2 Check the Print to Screen check box and press OK 3 In the Calibration Sound Level Meter dialog box press the Print push button The Report window appears 240 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 321 of 396 Sound Level Meter 4 Press the export push button The Export dialog box appears 5 Choose the appropriate format and destination Depending on the format and destination you choose the dialog boxes and choices will vary To view the saved annual calibration report 1 Open the file you created in Step 5 above using the appropriate application for that file type To print the annual calibration report 1 In the Calibration Sound Level Meter dialog box choose the Print push button Sound Level Meter Calibration Warning To set or change the annual calibration warning for the Sound Level Meter 1 Install the hardware key see Installing the Annual Calibration Hardware Key 2 Under the Audiometer menu choose Sound Level Meter Annual Calibration 3 Press the Options push button The Calibration Options dialog box will appear 4 Type your desired message in the five Annual Calibration Warning Message edit boxes Each of the five boxes may contain up to 50 ch
119. O AN Dn FB WY NY Configuring the Sound Level Meter If you have a sound level meter that is already installed the sound level meter may be configured automatically by the software which tries to make intelligent determinations for common configurations However the user should verify that the mapping is what the user wants Use the Sound Level Meter Mapping tab in the Setup dialog box to indicate which audiometer s are connected to which sound level meter s The numbers of the sound level meter and audiometers are determined by the Serial Numbers tab Suppose your sound level meter is listed as 1 in the Serial Numbers tab and you wish this sound level meter to measure noise for your two audiometers You would then choose 1 in the first three combo boxes in the Sound Level Meter Mapping tab Only one sound level meter may be mapped to an audiometer To configure the Sound Level Meter 1 Under the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Setup The Setup dialog box appears 2 Choose the Sound Level Meter Mapping tab 3 Using the combo boxes indicate which sound level meter should measure the sound levels for which audiometer 4 When finished choose OK 34 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 115 of 396 Bracket Bracket for BAS 200 or BAS 200slm with CCA 200mini The installation of the bracket for the BAS 200 or BAS 200slm with the CCA 200mini is described in the following sections Instal
120. OS ds s cncte a tete det 118 E E N A ues us ut 172 adding 111 118 123 l Retest Not Used 131 backing up 172 b UM Retest on Noise Above MP SS CE dd check BOXasse esiste i 67 modifying 112 119 124 x Retest Period combo box 103 PONNE eaoraieh 89 146 f retests entire audiograms 102 131 restoring 0 eeceeeeessetececeeeeeeeenees 173 and Automatic Baseline Revision 102 transferring eeeeeceeeeseneeeeeeees 215 Refer Subject data field 117 Retest Not Used sse 131 f setting Retest Period 103 reference for daily calibration 140 Rd d 23 retests of individual thresholds 67 updating M DE 69 70 referral medical 147 automatic retests sssssss 70 re formatting a field 199 programmed retests ssss 69 270 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 351 of 396 Retest on Noise Above MPANL 67 right pane hates Andes RR oes 97 right click menus 53 98 RN abbreviation for Retest Not V AUC MN NE 65 roster report for companies 153 S S abbreviation for OSHA STS Baselitie ossi en oc ours 110 Save Print Daily Calibration dialog DON anaes rera EG d E 76 BAVA De ooo tiesde ta iati oda AE 88 annual calibration reports 238 Automatic Clear on Test Save 63 Automatic Save on Test Complete 63 da
121. OU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To move quickly within the subject list 1 Make sure the focus is on Subject View 2 Type the first letter of the last name of the subject whom you wish to find The list will automatically move to the first subject whose last name begins with that letter To see the audiograms or histories for a subject 1 In Subject View select the subject whose audiograms you wish to see The audiograms for that subject will appear on the Audiograms Page IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To see all the subjects and audiograms histories for a company 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company The Company dialog box appears 2 Select the company whose subjects and audiograms histories you wish to see 3 Choose Close The subjects and audiograms histories appear The Audiograms and Histories pages show audiograms and histories for the subject that is currently selected in Subject View To move quickly within the subject list 1 Make sure the focus is on Subject View 2 Type the first letter of the last name of the subject whom you wish to find The list will automatically move to the first subject whose last name begins with that letter To see the audiograms or histories for a subject 1 In Subject View select the subject whose audiograms or histories you wish to see 2 Choose the Audiogram or Histories tab The audiograms or histories will appear for that subject Adding a S
122. Press and release the hand switch button as soon as you hear a tone even if the tone is very soft Presentation Timeout PT Press and release the hand switch button as soon as you hear a tone even if the tone is very soft Error Descriptions An error is generated when one of the following conditions occurs Common name Error Description code No Response NR The subject did not respond to two stimulus presentations at the maximum intensity Multiple Response MR The subject responded more than once to a single stimulus presentation Subject Error SE A threshold was not determined within twenty stimulus presentations Continuous Response CR The response switch was not released since the start of the previous stimulus presentation Retest Not Valid RN The threshold of a programmed retest varies by more than 5 dB Presentation Timeout PT More than sixty seconds have elapsed from the start of a threshold determination without a threshold being established 68 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 149 of 396 Automatic Testing Playing Voice Instructions Automatic voice instructions are set to play at the appropriate times in the General page of the Test Configuration dialog box You may also play a voice instruction at any time by following the instructions below To play a voice instruction 1 Under the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Play Instructions The Play Instruction dialog box appears
123. Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Select Both Earphones aie haan Se 2 Place Left Phone on Coupler 3 Click OK Audiometer Technical A Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Pre Cal Measurement will start 2 Target is 70 0 dBHL AudiometerTechnical 7 ute Training Course I at a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Warning indicates measurement outside 3 0 dB 2 Place Right Phone and Click OK Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 32 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical A Hey Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 The Right Phone will process 2 On completion place Left Phone on coupler Audiometer Technical A Hey Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic
124. Program _ Subject Hire Date Subject gt HireDate Subject Address line I Subject gt Addr Subject Address line 2Subject gt Addr2 Subject gt City Subject Sia Subject Zip E Text Subject Email Suet gt Email ests gt TestDate Tests gt TestTime n Text HEMMSS Tests gt Examiner Test Type Tests gt TestType Number BITMAPPED Left 500 Hz Threshold Tests gt Text Text Left 2kHz Threshold Tests gt 3 Text LeftThres2000 203 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 284 of 396 Left 3kHz Threshold Tests gt Import and Export Text Text LeftThres6000 Left 8kHz Threshold Tests gt 3 Text LeftThres8000 Right 500 Hz Threshold Tests gt 3 Text 3 Text Right 2kHz Threshold Tests gt 3 Text RightThres2000 Right 3kHz Threshold Tests gt RightThres3000 3 3 Text Text Right 8kHz Threshold Tests RightThres8000 Audiometer ModelTests gt Model 3 10 Text Text Text Aud Calibration Date Tests CalDate 8 Tex CCYYMMDD Aud SerialNumberTests gt SerNum 5 Met Sound Level gt SlmFreq125 umber Meter Frequency Tests Sound Level Meter Frequency Tests gt SlmFreq250 5 4 4 umber IN IN Sound Level Meter Frequency Tests gt SlmFreq500 IN Sound Level Meter Frequency Tests gt umber 4 Number Sound Level Meter Frequency Tests gt 4 umber SlmFreq4000 Sound Level Meter Frequency T
125. RMi Consulting LLC Page 237 of 396 Report Templates Subject Reports Subject Averages and Impairments The Subject Averages and Impairments report analyzes the current audiogram given to the subject The report has a section at the bottom of the report that shows calculations by the audiometer of STS Standard Threshold Shift PBI Percent Binaural Impairment and averages Subject History Questionnaire Report PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report shows the Subject History Questionnaire that appears in the Add History Modify History dialog boxes Some of the questions are user definable To see the Subject History Questionnaire in the Add History dialog box choose Add from the Edit menu in the Control Window then History For more information on Subject Histories and the Subject History Questionnaire see Subject History and Subject History Questionnaire Subject Notification Letter PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report is the letter that is given to the subject notifying him or her of the results of his or her current hearing test If one or more baselines exist for this subject information on the baseline s is also included in the letter The letter informs the subject whether his or her current results show a standard threshold shift as defined by OSHA or MSHA a regulation setting available with the Plus Package Only the administrator can modify the notification letter You have the option of including or excluding test data and other i
126. Records An Overview Data Transfer Using a Third Party Database If you are transferring data between the audiometer and a third party database there are three possible methods depending on such factors as what your database supports and the availability of a compatible data format The methods are described below IMPORT EXPORT Plus Package only The Import and Export functions are recommended if you are testing at remote locations and then transferring your stored tests to a database This method is bidirectional because the Plus Package has the same formats for both import and export Therefore you could export data in a given format and later import updated data in the same format In order to use Import and Export you will have to make sure that the audiometer has an export format that is supported by your database See Export Overview and Import Overview BATCH TRANSFER USING RA 500 PROTOCOL Batch Transfer using RA 500 protocol is appropriate for moving data that has been stored in the audiometer over to a database For this method to work your database 232 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 313 of 396 Data Transfer would have to support RA 500 batch transfer FOSHM and Systoc support RA 500 batch transfer This transfer only goes in one direction from the audiometer to a database See Data Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol below REAL TIME AUDIOGRAM TRANSFER USING BENSON MEDICAL PROTOCOL Many third party da
127. SRMi Consulting LLC Page 191 of 396 Companies Modifying a Company If you do not have the Plus Package To modify a company 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company The Company dialog box appears 2 Choose the Modify push button The Company dialog box appears 3 Make changes as desired 4 When finished choose OK If you have the Plus Package To modify a company 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company The Company dialog box appears 2 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Company dialog box appears 3 Make changes as desired 4 When finished choose OK Deleting a Company PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To delete a company 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company 2 Choose the Delete push button at the right of the Company dialog box The Delete Company dialog box appears 3 Choose Yes to delete the company and all subjects and audiograms within it To delete all companies 1 Choose the Delete All push button at the right of the Company dialog box The Delete All Companies dialog box appears 2 Choose Yes to delete all companies and all subjects and audiograms 111 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 192 of 396 Companies Duplicating a Company PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To duplicate a company 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company The Company dialog box appears 2 Select the company you wish to duplicate 3 Choos
128. TE iwl Donne e uuojed oj ueyoBJo aney noA JI sea asioN STA L sp e1estoN pueqwoueN no peje usa IM ulejs s SOY SUL UOMOYs royeqios qj euog passed isa spae jyejoso euog ssa 10 eI1989 auog SpJepuels ISNV Uo peseq uoneJqi eo pojre A Jo DUELO inis ipse inn uioods passed seu Jejeujoipne y Ji no 32027 SION SIUM passegysay sene estoy pueqMoueR s e1 Ajjeowewoyne uiejs s SOY eu ueniostq Vasu Sseg 189 spesa vasu j 8 euoudie 3 yesu je a yoseds uoniojs auoydpeay UsSpe e asio pueqmoueE Ry 9UuPg 01J1u07 UOLjPIgGIe Page 387 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC me O95S Iv O ooj ueduJuoo umo JNO yesul USAS UBD noA Solya eu uo deb P aq 1 UOM 9eJeu os eyep y eHuewe Wa shs SOV eu Jeedde oj s Je norued e juew jou op noA J eyeounieo eu uo Jeedde oj jue nof yey s sa 2y esoou ejyeoynieo uoneJqijeo Jno eziuojsn ASU asio y ayj yesu asioN pueqmone p pasu gt 3437 e229 3 uoniojsi yesu gt gt p a yoaads auog asio yoaads euog sja a vasu gt ja4a7 yoaads aucydpesy I D Sa 0N asio ayya suog uoymspueH asio PUEGMONE pj euog 2497 SIS uaniojst euog aey spe sja a euog sonsnooy WoO jae Yoaads yasu YIPLN BSN Al asloy yoaads yasu gt asio yoaads auoydpeay asio y Syy A suoudpeaH asio pueqmoie N euoudpeaH gt gt gt gt gt gt gt uaniojsr auoydpeay gt
129. TSPLs and couplers for supra aural eg TDH 39 40 50 circumaural eg HDA200 HV 1 A soft ware compatibility with transducers such as in the ear or insert IEC 711 HA 1 or HA 2 couplers Automated tests with binaural or monaural 0 45 or 90 placement of speakers Audiometric test hearing aid fitting area allowed background noise test by 1 3 octaves System 824 Precision Analyzer General Frequency analysis 2575 microphone CAL250 calibrator Governing Standards AUDit software System824 SLM RTA AEC100 coupler AEC101 coupler AMC493 mastoid Physical SYS008 weight SYS009 weight Precision Type 1 SLM with A C Flat weight gt 80 105 dynamic range int ext power 2MB 824 AUD firmware low noise 1 2 preamp NiMH battery RS232 and printer cables 1 1 octave 16 16kHz 1 3 octave 12 5 20kHz narrowband FFT 400 lines 1 2 5 10 20 kHz Precision 1 pressure response condenser compatible with AEC100 coupler 114 0 dB re 20 micropascals 250 Hz 0 5 Hz one inch opening 1 2 adaptor ADP019 ANSI S3 6 1996 Specification for Audiometers ANSI S3 7 1995 Methods for Coupler Calibration of Earphones ANSI S3 1 1991 Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Levels for Audiometric Test Rooms ANSI 1 4 1983 Type 1 ANSI S1 11 1986 Type OC IEC 60651 and 60804 Type 1 IEC 61260 Class 1 PTB approved ANSI S3 7 1995 Methods For Coupler Calibration Of Earphones IEC 60318 3 ANSI S3 7 1995 Methods For Coupler Calib
130. Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Il Theory of Operation ET cx I C Audiometer Operation A The CCA 200mini provides the ultimate in easy testing push Start and the CCA 200mini takes control The CCA 200mini detects a wide variety of subject errors for test validity Easy to use Windows software gives you total control of up to sixteen audiometers from a single PC B Delivers automatic instructions for subject errors in sixteen languages through headset C On screen audiogram graphs update in real time and display subject s baseline Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 13 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration ll Theory of Operation EN am C Audiometer Operation continued D Automatic Retests enhance quality and reduce problem audiograms Mark For Retest reduces manual testing Enhanced test features for 2596 to 4096 faster testing Programmable test sequences start and end levels Full manual control Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration III Installation Procedures BN ace I The CCA 200mini is installed in the preferred method as an in booth mount as shown at the right Normal Installation location is 5 4 from the ceiling and 5
131. WP a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Direct Support in Benson CCA 200 Software 2 7 10 Minute Calibration 1 Report to printer 2 Produce pdf file Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 29 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical A Sey Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Menu Driven Audiometer Technical A Say Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Identify Audiometer Serial Number 2 Indicate LD824 Port 3 Enter Microphone Corrections 4 Next AudiometerTechnical gt Se Training Course as a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Identify Microphone SS 2 Identify Serial Number 3 Calibration Dates Copyright 2008 SRMi Consul
132. a The indication of Rejected test data means that the Reject Audiogram check box in the Add Audiogram Modify Audiogram dialog box was selected for this audiogram Repealed Recordable STS The indication of Repealed Recordable STS in an Analysis column means that this audiogram initially showed a Recordable STS in relation to the baseline audiogram but that subsequent testing performed within the Retest Period as part of a hearing conservation program did not show a Recordable STS 137 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 218 of 396 Analysis Repealed Reportable PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of Repealed Reportable in an Analysis column means that this audiogram initially showed a Reportable Hearing Loss in relation to the baseline audiogram but that subsequent testing performed within the Retest Period as part of a hearing conservation program did not show a Reportable Hearing Loss Repealed STS The indication of Repealed STS in an Analysis column means that this audiogram initially showed an STS in relation to the baseline audiogram but that subsequent testing performed within the Retest Period as part of a hearing conservation program did not show an STS Reportable Hearing Loss PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of Reportable Hearing Loss in an Analysis column means that that this audiogram shows a Reportable hearing loss in relation to the baseline audiogram according to the criteria established by MSHA Thi
133. a Report for Multiple Report Print PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To delete a report in Multiple Report Print 1 From the Audiometer menu choose Save Print Test The Save Print Test dialog box appears 2 Choose the Options push button The Multiple Report Print Options dialog box appears 3 Select the report youwish to delete in the list 4 Choose the Delete push button The Delete Multiple Report Print dialog box appears 5 Choose Yes to delete the report from Multiple Report Print 6 In the Multiple Report Print Options dialog box choose Close Revising a Baseline Manually If the database interface you are using is Storage follow the procedures below if you wish to update the baseline audiogram or mark a saved audiogram as the new baseline Note that manual revision of a baseline will be possible only if Automatic Baseline Revision is not enabled for the current company Plus Package only See Automatic Baseline Revision for more information If you have the Plus Package and have chosen MSHA as the Regulation for the current company the baseline check boxes will be called MSHA STS Baseline and MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline If you are using a database other than Storage Plus Package refer to your database documentation for information on how to revise a baseline 97 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 178 of 396 Testing Saving and Printing with STORAGE To update the baseline audiogram while saving a test 1 C
134. above To save the annual calibration report 1 In the Audiometer Calibration Complete dialog select the Print to Screen check box 2 Select the Print push button The Report window appears 3 Press the export push button The Export dialog box appears 256 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 337 of 396 Annual Calibration 4 Choose the appropriate format and destination Depending on the format and destination you choose the dialog boxes and choices will vary To view the saved annual calibration report 1 Open the file you created in Step 4 above using the appropriate application for that file type Manual Annual Calibration The Manual Calibration dialog box is accessed by choosing the Manual button in the Annual Calibration dialog box The manual calibration controls are described below Choose Close to end Manual Calibration selects the right ear shows the frequency selected brings up a menu of frequency values shows the output level brings up a menu of dBHL values from 10 to 100 P geletsahigherdBHL Down elecsalowerdBHL 1 2 EE 77 7 NR Tone Types Pulse selects a pulse tone Continuous makes the output continuous i U p raises the output level Down lowers the output level Calibration Options This dialog box is for entering the Annual Calibration Warning Message To see the Calibration Options dialog box choose Manual Annual Cali
135. acking Up Records susse Restoring Records An Overview Restoring Records Extract and Merge Extracting Records An Overview Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Table Of Contents Page 78 of 396 Extract Dialog BOX sseseeeseesssseeeeeees Extracting Records x ic vete ES aa Extract Configurations eeeseesesessss Pre Defined Extract Configurations Custom Extract Configurations Adding an Extract Configuration Modifying an Extract Configuration Deleting an Extract Configuration Duplicating an Extract Configuration Extract Merge Record Groups A Diagram Merging Records An Overview Merge Dialog Box eeeeeeeeseeesseee Merging Records Procedure Merge Configurations seeeseeeseessse Pre Defined Merge Configurations Custom Merge Configurations Adding a Merge Configuration Modifying a Merge Configuration Deleting a Merge Configuration Duplicating a Merge Configuration Import a
136. actory Defaults Use only at direction of Benson Technical Support Normal Anti Static procedures should be followed Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Ill Assembly Disassembly Procedures CCA 200mini Firmware Version 6 00 or higher Replace only at direction of Benson Technical Support and with power off Normal Anti Static procedures should be followed Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 21 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Assembly Disassembly Procedures PRY ze I Reassembly should be done carefully so alignment of end plates are checked to avoid damage or breakage to the case Normal Anti Static procedures should be followed Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Exhaustive 1 Manual 2 Automatic Annual Daily Calibration Check Functional Check Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure All functions for calibration and maintenance are accessed through Menu Items when the Calibration Key is available as the Benson System Software is started Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Co
137. aily Calibration dialog box appears 2 Choose the Print push button Updating the Daily Calibration Reference Test If you are updating the reference audiogram at the end of the daily calibration test use the first procedure below If you wish to enter threshold levels manually and mark the audiogram as a daily calibration reference use the second procedure To update the reference audiogram for daily calibration at the end of the test 1 From the Daily Calibration submenu in the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Save Print The Save Print Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 Select the Reference check box 3 Enter other information as desired Plus Package Only Choose the Save push button This action stores the audiogram as the reference audiogram in Daily Calibration Storage 82 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 163 of 396 Daily Calibration Check Do Not Have Plus Package Choose the Update Reference push button then choose Close The current data is now stored as the new baseline reference audiogram To manually enter threshold levels for a daily calibration and mark it as the reference 1 Start the audiometer then stop it 2 From the Daily Calibration submenu in the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Save Print 3 Enter the daily calibration date in the Cal Date edit box 4 In the Current tab enter the reference audiogram data in the threshold edit boxes 5
138. aisy Chaining CCA 200 Audiometers Key to Numbers in Diagram 1 Headset Cable 2 Response Switch 3 CCA 200 Audiometer 4 Computer Interface Cable Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 88 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup 5 Serial Cable 6 Power Supply 7 Power Cord Single Station Installation of the CCA 200mini To install a single station of the CCA 200mini refer to the instructions diagram and key to diagram numbers below The diagram shows the CCA 200mini installed with the BAS 200 Bio Acoustic Simulator For complete instructions on simulator installation see Installing the BAS 200 with the CCA 200mini To install a single station of the CCA 200mini 1 If you are making changes to an existing installation unplug the power supply cord from the wall outlet 2 Connect one end of the supplied serial cable to the connector marked COMPUTER on the audiometer 3 Connect the other end of the serial cable to the USB Computer Interface Cable 4 Connect the USB connector of the USB Computer Interface Cable to the USB connector on the computer 5 Connect the power supply output connector to the mating jack on the USB Computer Interface Cable 6 Connect the headset to the audiometer as shown in the diagram below 7 Connect the response switch as appropriate for either a daily calibration check or testing If a simulator is not installed connect the response switch to the RESPONSE jack on the audiomete
139. al Calibration Routines In order that operators not be able to affect the annual calibration inadvertently access to annual calibration routines is controlled by a hardware key The hardware key must be installed when the software or instrument is started in order to perform an annual calibration of the audiometer While the hardware key is installed maintenance personnel will be able to perform annual calibration and operate the instrument but will not be able to save data or access the database Installing the Annual Calibration Hardware Key The annual calibration hardware key must be installed in order to perform annual calibration of the audiometer Refer to the procedure below A USB calibration key can be used Attach it to a USB connection port Use the same hardware key for Sound Level Meter annual calibration To install the annual calibration hardware key on your computer 1 Locate the parallel port on the back of your computer This port is usually used by the parallel printer 2 Attach the hardware key to the parallel port and hand tighten the thumb screws The end of the key to be attached to the port is labeled COMPUTER If you are using a parallel printer the key is first installed on the port and the printer cable is plugged into the key The key is designed to have no effect on the operation 253 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 334 of 396 Annual Calibration of your printer or on the operation of oth
140. al port settings on the audiometer and the database must match This transfer method requires two additional serial ports one for the data from the audiometer and the other for the incoming data to the database Since PCs do not typically have these two additional serial ports it is more convenient to use a third party program that creates virtual serial port pairs in software After these virtual ports are created you may connect to them as required above and the data will be transferred correctly Contact your Benson Medical Instruments dealer for information on these third party programs In an example of a configuration using virtual serial port utility software a cable would connect the audiometer to COM 1 of the computer the Database Interface 233 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 314 of 396 Data Transfer Serial Port Settings in the audiometer software would be set to COM 2 and the serial port setting in the database would be set to COM 3 The virtual serial port utility software would be configured to create the connected pair of ports COM 2 and COM 3 Real time transfer is initiated from the database side Refer to the database documentation For real time transfer the Database Interface in the audiometer software must be set to FOSHM or Systoc Batch transfer is performed by means of the Export function with Tremetrics RAS00 Test as the export format For batch transfer the Database Interface m
141. all the program on Computer 2 3 Install the program on any additional computers that will be on the network 4 The user on Computer 2 launches the program and in the Welcome dialog box browses to the MSDE server on Computer 1 5 Repeat as necessary for any additional users Viewing the Work of Other Users PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If you have multiple users using the same database you may need to see the latest data entered by others The screen is automatically updated to include the work of other users when you add modify or delete a subject audiogram or company You may wish however to see the current state of the database even if you have not recently made any changes to it If you wish to refresh the screen manually follow the instructions below To see the changes made by other users 1 From the View menu in the Control Window choose Refresh The screen is updated to include the work of other users 42 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 123 of 396 Error Log Error Log The Error Log contains a revolving list of the errors that occur in the operation of the audiometer software Check this list when troubleshooting As new errors occur they are added and the oldest ones drop out The errors are listed together with the date and time they occurred To see the Error Log 1 From the Help menu in the Control Window choose Error Log The Error Log Viewer appears 43 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Pag
142. alog box select the company you wish to move the subject to 5 Choose OK A dialog box appears asking whether you wish to merge the test records of the currently displayed subject with the existing subject 6 Choose Yes A dialog box appears asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing subject data with the currently displayed subject data 7 Choose No The audiograms and histories of the currently displayed subject will now be associated with the existing subject but the demographic data associated with the currently displayed subject have been discarded 8 In the Modify Subject dialog box choose OK Combining Two Subjects in the Same Company To combine the records of two subjects in the same company you will modify the Subject ID of one of the subjects the currently displayed subject to match the Subject ID of the other one the existing subject You have two options concerning the demographic fields Either the demographic fields of the existing subject will be overwritten by the demographic fields of the currently displayed subject or the demographic fields of the existing subject will be kept The audiograms and histories with the Plus Package of the two subjects will be merged See the procedures below for the two different situations If two audiograms or histories with the same date and time exist the transferred audiogram or history will overwrite the corresponding audiogram or history associated with th
143. ame of the file database in this edit box or you can browse for the file using the Browse push button The default file database and location are d stx mdb The Server and Database edit boxes are used if you are restoring a SQL database If you need to change servers you may enter the server name in the Server edit box or browse for it using the Browse push button If you are already on the right server you may enter the database name or browse for it using the Browse push button If the Write log file check box is selected a log file will be created that you can check later for information The Log File edit box is for the location and name of the log file You can change the location and name from the default ones if you wish or browse for the file using the Browse button To see the Restore dialog box 1 Choose Restore from the File menu in the Control Window Restoring Records IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To restore data from the backed up file 1 In the Control Window choose Restore from the File menu The Restore dialog box appears 2 In the File mdb edit box enter the name of the file database from which you are restoring data or choose the Browse push button to find the file 185 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 266 of 396 Backup and Restore 3 Choose whether to create a log file using the Write log file check box If desired you can change the default location and name of t
144. any who may not appear correctly in other reports due to missing or invalid data Company STS List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report shows all the subjects in the company whose current test results indicate an STS as defined by OSHA and MSHA A summary of the subjects test results is provided along with their names Age Correction data will appear on this report if the Calculate STS using Age Correction check box in the Add Company or Modify Company dialog box has been selected Company Summary PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report shows the raw data and percentages of STS Recordable Shifts and hearing impairment of all subjects in the company Pie charts are shown for the various results 162 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 243 of 396 Report Templates Company Reports Company Test Schedule List PLUS PACKAGE ONLY This report produces a list of subjects to be tested 163 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 244 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 245 of 396 Report Select Sorts Select Sorts Select Sorts for reports enable to you to specify what data will be included ina report The Select Sort list box in the Print Report dialog box shows the select sort available for the report template that is currently selected in the Template list box If you choose Current Subject the report will print all audiograms for the subject that is currently selected If you choose a range of subjects the report wi
145. apabilities of the sound level meter it is also well suited for System 824 real time analyzer measuring noise dose exposure Narrow band FFT and real time 1 3 octave anal ysis speed up measurements such as THD or ambient noise measurements assisting in noise reduction engineering performing environmental noise studies Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 373 of 396 The perfect integration of analyzer software and couplers for fast exhaustive testing The 824 AUD Firmware provides internal audiometer testing functions Larson Davis audiometer calibration systems owe their power to the precision System 824 sound level meter its standard real time fractional octave filters are important for audiometer tests The 824 AUD firmware is also loaded with additional features such as FM and pulse 400 line FFT for narrow band analysis and total harmonic distortion etc Real time analysis for HL frequency amp THD Hearing level measurements are sim ple with the real time 1 3 octaves of the System 824 The full spectrum is displayed without having to change filters The 400 line FFT mode dis plays smaller frequency bands to locate and measure harmonics for THD measurements All pulse measurements on a single screen When pulsed stimulus capability must be tested simply pre sent the tone and read all values on a single screen of the System 824 Rise Fall ON and OFF times are measured with millisecond accurac
146. apping group box enables you to map fields For more information see Field Mapping and Bitmapped Field Field Mapping PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Using Field Mapping you can supply a list of character strings in the ASCII column with strings in the Database column In the case of import the same concepts apply to export if a field is not bitmapped the database searches for an exact match in the ASCII column and the first matching ASCII string that is found by the database is mapped to a database string Subsequent field mappings after a match is found are ignored For example if you are importing from a database in which Not Tested is indicated by you will need to use Field Mapping to replace the ASCH string with NT In the case of a bitmapped field when a match is found further field mappings are evaluated You can specify whether a given mapping is to be applied to import export or both You may use the wildcard character to denote any character Re formatting a Field PLUS PACKAGE ONLY When importing from or exporting to other database formats fields such as dates or Social Security number are often in different formats in the two databases This database provides a mechanism to re format fields Field re formatting is done by using the Format edit boxes in the Modify Field dialog box see Modifying a Field in an Import Export Format Perhaps the easiest way to explain this feature is by example The e
147. aracters Social Security number Any ASCII Character Alphabetic Character Only e Digit Only 108 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 189 of 396 Companies D Alphanumeric Only If the Social Security number radio button is selected the ID for a subject must consist of 9 digits The Prompt and Maximum Size Minimum Size edit boxes at left will be filled in automatically and cannot be changed For this format the Prompt is SSN the Maximum Size is 9 the Minimum Size is 9 and in the Legal Characters group box Digit Only is selected If this format is chosen auto formatting will insert hyphens between the third and fourth digits and between the fifth and sixth digits as follows XXX XX XXXX so that the ID will look like a traditional Social Security number If you have been using Social Security number as the Subject ID format and you change the Subject ID format hyphens will no longer appear in the Subject IDs If Any ASCII Character is chosen all Subject IDs will be able to contain any character in the ASCII character set which includes letters numbers and other characters such as and If Alphabetic Character Only is chosen all Subject IDs will have to contain letters only You will not be able to enter any numbers in the Subject ID or save any subject with an ID that contains numbers If Digit Only is chosen all Subject IDs will have to contai
148. aracters 5 When finished choose the OK button 241 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 322 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 323 of 396 STS Definitions Standard Threshold Shift STS A Standard Theshold Shift STS is defined by both OSHA and MSHA as an average change of greater than or equal to 10dB at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz in either ear Standard Threshold Shift with Age Correction A Standard Threshold Shift STS with Age Correction is defined by both OSHA and MSHA as an average change of greater than or equal to 10dB at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz in either ear after adjusting the baseline and current thresholds for presbucysis per 29 CFR 1910 95 DOD Significant Threshold Shift A DOD Significant Threshold Shift is defined as an average change of greater than or equal to 10dB at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz in either ear or a change of greater than or equal to 15dB at 1000 2000 3000 or 4000 Hz in either ear 243 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 324 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 325 of 396 Cleaning Cleaning Do not use harsh chemicals or solvents to clean the audiometer Clean connections with LPS1 Greaseless Lubricant or equivalent Do not use liquids or chemicals on headset transducers 245 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 326 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 327 of 396 Specifications Audiometer Specifications The CCA 200
149. ars 2 Choose the custom Select Sort you wish to delete in the Select Sort list 3 Choose the Delete push button The Delete Select Sort dialog box appears 4 Choose yes to delete the Select Sort 5 When finished with the Report Options dialog box choose Close 175 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 256 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 257 of 396 SQL Syntax Functions SQL Syntax Functions If you add a Select Sort you will need to know Structured Query Language SQL We have added three functions to SQL the ASK function the ASKEX function and the ASKSYS function which are described in the following sections The ASK Function PLUS PACKAGE ONLY ASK Prompt Size Type Default VariableName The ASK function directs SQL to query the user at the time the report is created for a value to return which is used to replace the ASK function in the expression The ASK function uses the commas as field delimiters therefore using commas in prompt or default parameters is illegal The first parameter Prompt is a character string that is displayed when the user is asked to enter a value at run time A example of a valid prompt is Enter the department name However do not enclose the prompt in quotes unless you want them to appear in the prompt to the user Size specifies the maximum number of characters for the input The user s input will be limited to the maximum size specified by this
150. assigned after the test starts Historical Starting Levels will be used for all threshold determinations that occur after the subject is assigned Programmed Retests The automatic test sequence can be programmed to automatically retest one or more frequencies To program a retest of a frequency 1 Choose Test Configuration from the Control Window Audiometer menu 2 Choose the Test Sequence tab 3 Modify the test sequence so that the same ear and frequency appear in two rows Be certain that the two lines have the same Low dB setting Otherwise the booth may always generate an error in certain circumstances When the original threshold and the retest results are different the audiometer software uses the rules below to determine which result is retained 72 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 153 of 396 Automatic Testing e If both results were thresholds the better of the two thresholds is retained e If one result is an error and one a threshold the threshold is retained If both results were errors the last error is retained A retest threshold that is not within 5 dB of the original threshold generates an error See Error Handling Automatic Retests At the completion of a test the audiometer will perform an automatic retest of all thresholds that could not be determined due to subject errors The audiometer can also be set to perform an automatic retest of all thresholds that meet the retest criteria To pr
151. audiometer meets or exceeds ANSI S3 6 1989 Dimensions Weight Case Storage Temp Range Operating Temp Range Operating Humidity Test Frequencies Stimulus Output Level Output Rise Fall Time Distortion Output On Off Ratio Transducer Power requirements 912 x 614 x 1A 3 lbs with accessories White ABS chassis 0 120 F 18 49 C 50 90 F 10 32 C 20 80 96 non condensing 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 6k 8kHz crystal controlled Continuous 1 second or Pulsed 200ms pulse 2 5 pulses second 10 100 dBHL 3dB 5dB step Not greater than 50msec nor less than 20msec 30msec typ Less than 3 at full output Greater than 70dB 95dB typ Telephonics TDH39 10 ohm earphones with MX41 AAR cushions 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 Watts max The CCA 200mini audiometer meets or exceeds ANSI S3 6 1989 Dimensions Weight Case Storage Temp Range Operating Temp Range Operating Humidity Test Frequencies Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC 3 x 52 x 12 3 Ibs with accessories White ABS chassis 0 120 F 18 49 C 50 90 F 10 32 C 20 80 96 non condensing 500 1k 2k 3k 4k 6k 8kHz crystal 247 Page 328 of 396 Stimulus Output Level Output Rise Fall Time Distortion Output On Off Ratio Transducer Power requirements Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Specifications controlled Continuous 1 second or Pulsed 200ms pulse 2
152. ay mte atte mene 221 OTADhi es eee Rer 221 information tab ssuus 221 installing sesssesseeeee 32 MAPPING rises eee e reds 15 Sound Level Meter group box 117 SPL abbreviation for Sound Pressure Level 221 Split SCTOEU o uii 97 271 Page 352 of 396 SQL Structured Query Language bte uie uetus 159 SR abbrev for STS Baseline amp Recordable Shift Baseline 110 SSN See Social Security number Vere Do pues cotidie pec Qo oe ei 103 Standard Threshold Shift 101 225 Start Test voice instructions 64 Status column auci n enne 56 abbreviations in test display 56 Status Help box ssssse 58 Status Help iran 58 SDITDIUTUS asie je o ena 64 Stop Test on Error 66 SOTA BO e aee 15 95 97 choosing as Database Interface 15 eatU GS sco ia o TR ias 95 viewing Onscreen sseeseeee 97 Storage Features 95 Structured Query Language 159 pcm ES 58 101 131 225 real time calculation 58 STS lt 6 Month 132 STS and Persistent Improvement PETETA d d ua faltas aae 131 STS and Persistent STS 132 STS Baseline oor 102 STS L indication in test display 58 STS R indication in test display58 Subject Averages and Impairments TOPOL ios Da drehte idis 149 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Subject Cont
153. ayed in the following screens If the audiometers are not attached and powered at the time of software installation the serial numbers will not be present Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 63 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review Ill Installation Procedures IX After audiometers are installed the serial number will be populated if any Audiometer serial number did not Plug and Play PNP then Tech Support needs to be notified and at their direction the Audiometer replaced Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review IIl Installation Procedures IX However BAS 200 Simulator Serial Numbers need to be added manually This is required so the Simulator Data can be transferred to the DOEHRS HC System and allow for proper Form 2217 capture Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review IIl Installation Procedures x The configurations shown at the right are the standard DOEHS HC Test Options If the screen at the right is shown then DOEHRS HC has installed properly and the rest of the screens should be correct ee EE shown for reference only Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 64 of 396 DOEHRS HC A
154. b in the Control Window where they are updated once a second The last readings taken by the sound level meter are saved with the test results You can choose to have a stimulus automatically presented again if the ambient noise level during the stimulus exceeded permissible levels by selecting the Retest on Noise Above MPANL check box in the Test Configuration If this check box is selected responses will not be recorded and the stimulus will automatically be presented again if the ambient sound level during the stimulus was too high See Retest on Noise Above MPANL for more information For information on installing the Sound Level Meter see Installing the BAS 200slm or SLM 200 You can see sound level readings updated once a second in the Control Window The readings are updated to the maximum value since the last update See the next section If a sound level meter is installed and mapped to a particular audiometer the set of last sound level readings taken during the test will be saved with the audiogram Mapping is done using the Sound Level Meter Mapping tab in the Setup dialog box See Configuring the Sound Level Meter For the determination of permissible levels you can use one of the two industry standards OSHA 29 CFR 1910 1983 and ANSI S3 1 1999 or you can choose the Custom option in which you choose the maximum permissible ambient noise levels You choose these options using the MPANLs tab in the Test Configuration dialo
155. baseline audiogram There is no need to go back to previous baseline audiograms and deselect the check boxes for STS Baseline or Recordable Reportable Shift Baseline 98 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 179 of 396 STORAGE PLUS PACKAGE Storage Plus Package This section is only relevant to you if you have chosen Storage as your database interface in the Setup Audiometer dialog box see Audiometer Setup Storage Plus Package Features If you do not have the Plus Package Storage provides you with six reports and room for unlimited subjects and audiograms in one company If you have the Plus Package you have nineteen reports available as well as room for unlimited subjects and audiograms in multiple companies The Plus Package is an integrated extension of the audiometer software that provides you with a powerful database system for managing your hearing conservation program If you are using the Plus Package Storage is the Database Interface that you will choose in the Setup dialog box see Audiometer Setup To determine whether you have the Plus Package 1 Choose About from the Help menu in the Control Window If the Plus Package is installed Plus Package Installed will appear in the About dialog box 99 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 180 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 181 of 396 Database View Split Screen If and only if the Database Interface in the Setup dialog box
156. bject ae D Save Print Saves and or prints Saving an Audiogram Test the test for selected audiometer s Start Test Starts an automatic Audiometer Control Functions test in selected audiometer s Stop Test Pauses test in Audiometer Control selected FunctionsAudiometer Control Functions audiometer s Clear Clears subject and Audiometer Control test data from FunctionsAudiometer Control Functions selected audiometer s Microphone Enables talk over Audiometer Control Functions On microphone in selected audiometer s Mark Marks an ear and Audiometer Control Functions frequency to automatically retest Manual Places an Manual Testing audiometer in manual testing Play Plays a selected Playing Voice Instructions Instructions voice instruction in on alarms and other features number of audiometers sound level meter Microphone Disables talk over Audiometer Control Functions Off microphone in selected audiometer s 49 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 130 of 396 Control Window mapping and computer port used Check or alter the Test Configuration Dialog Box feature selection and sound level Audiometer Audiometer Functional Check functional check See next section Sets up for annual Annual Calibration of the Audiometer Calibration TT calibration Search Searches online help by keyword Error Log Shows revolving error log for troubleshooting Abo
157. bject s demographic data will be used for automatic voice instructions Also if the Notification Letter is chosen and the subject is assigned before printing the letter will be in the same language Assigning a subject is required if you wish to use automatic retest relative to baseline see Automatic Retests and real time STS analysis features see Information Tab Fields The subject can be assigned after the test has started A subject must be assigned before an audiogram begins in order to use the HSL feature see Historical Starting Level HSL PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Add History button in the Assign dialog box adds a history for the subject 91 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 172 of 396 Testing Saving and Printing with STORAGE To assign a subject 1 Choose Assign Subject from the Audiometer menu or choose the Assign Subject toolbar button The Assign dialog box appears 2 You may enter the subject by Social Security number or if the subject is already stored you may look up his or her name to do so continue with step 6 To enter the subject by Subject ID 3 Enter the subject s Subject ID in the appropriate edit box 4 Ifno matching subject is stored enter any additional desired demographic information in the space provided 5 Continue with Step 8 To enter the subject by looking up his or her name 6 Choose the Last Name button The Select Name dialog box appears 7 Select the nam
158. bration Reports Plus Package Only If you have added custom reports of the Daily Calibration Type using Report Options they will appear in the Report Template combo box In the Report Select Sort list box the available Select Sorts appear for the Report Template that is currently selected Test Date Range will select all daily calibrations for audiometers that have a daily calibration in that range Test Date Range Exclusive will select only daily calibrations in that range Plus Package Only If the Print on Save check box is selected the daily calibration report will print when it is saved If the Print to Screen check box is selected the daily calibration report will be printed to the screen instead of to the printer The Copies control allows you to select the number of copies that will be printed of the daily calibration report To see the Daily Calibration Save Print Options dialog box 1 From the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration then Save Print from the submenu The Save Print Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 Choose the Options push button at the bottom of the dialog box The Daily Calibration Save Print Options dialog box appears 84 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 165 of 396 Functional Check Audiometer Functional Check The audiometer software provides a functional check so the operator may verify the correct functioning of the instrument T
159. bration from the Audiometer menu in the Control Window then choose the Options push button in the Audiometer Calibration dialog box 257 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 338 of 396 Annual Calibration The Annual Calibration Warning is enabled or disabled in the Setup dialog box You can set the warning to appear a certain number of days before annual calibration is due To see the Setup dialog box choose Setup from the Audiometer menu Annual Calibration Warning To set or change the annual calibration warning for the audiometer 1 Install the hardware key see Installing the Annual Calibration Hardware Key 2 Under the Audiometer menu choose Manual Annual Calibration The Audiometer Calibration dialog box appears 3 Press the Options push button The Calibration Options dialog box will appear 4 Type your desired message in the five Annual Calibration Warning Message edit boxes Each of the five boxes may contain up to 50 characters 5 When finished choose the OK button 258 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 339 of 396 Abbreviations Abbreviations The table below shows the abbreviations that are used in the audiometer software and in this instruction manual Descriptions are given in the right column AN CR dB SPL HC L ajo MPANL MR NL NR NT PnP PT R Rec Shift Rep Shift RN right ear or OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline or MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline Rec
160. c Baseline Revision has been enabled for this company STS 6 Month The indication of STS 6 Month in an Analysis column means that the subject s hearing has shown an STS in two sequential tests but that it has been less than six months 180 days since the last audiogram for this subject was performed 139 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 220 of 396 Analysis The Regulation setting for the company determines whether OSHA or MSHA regulations are used in calculating STS Worse The indication of Worse in an Analysis column means that the subject s thresholds at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz have worsened at least an average of 3dB but less than an average of 10dB relative to the last audiogram performed Sound Level Meter Columns If a sound level meter is being used the Sound Level Meter columns appear at the right ofthe Audiogram Analysis columns in Audiogram View in the Control Window Messages will be displayed there about the sound level meter readings for a given audiogram Information about the sound level meter itself is also given e g its serial number and calibration date The column headings and abbreviations used are explained in the table below See the following sections for more information Column Heading or Explanation Abbreviation AN Status Ambient Noise Status MPANL Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Level NL Noise Level SLM Sound Level Meter NL Columns The NL Noise Level columns indi
161. cate the set of last sound level readings taken by the Sound Level Meter during this audiogram If a Sound Level Meter was not installed in the system for this audiogram these columns will be blank AN Status Column The AN Ambient Noise column indicates In Range if a Sound Level Meter was installed in the system and the Retest on Noise Above MPANLs check box was selected in the test configuration for this audiogram If a Sound Level Meter was not installed in the system for this audiogram or ifa Sound Level Meter was installed but the Retest on Noise Above MPANLs check box was not selected in the test configuration these columns will be blank 140 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 221 of 396 Analysis MPANL Columns If the Retest on Noise Above MPANLs check box was selected in the test configuration for this audiogram the MPANL Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Level columns list the MPANL for each frequency The MPANLs listed are the ones that were selected in the test configuration for this audiogram If a Sound Level Meter was not installed in the system for this audiogram or if a Sound Level Meter was installed but the Retest on Noise Above MPANLs check box was not selected in the test configuration these columns will indicate None 141 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 222 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 223 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage Daily Calibration Storage
162. cedes the word to the report will include all subjects with birth dates on or after this date 165 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 246 of 396 Report Select Sorts or The word or to the left of an edit box indicates that the report will include records with values corresponding to the value in this edit box today today means the current date the system date The date does not actually appear Blank Values Specifying blank value for a field will return records that contain no data in that field For instance suppose that the person entering demographic data for a woman named Mary Malloy forgot to enter F in the Sex field That omission would result in Mary not being included in reports specifying female subjects Such omissions can be corrected by doing a report of records with blank values for a given field in this case Sex and then finding those records and supplying the missing data Nonblank Values Specifying nonblank value for a field will return records that contain data in that field View SQL The View SQL push button enables you to see the SQL for the currently selected settings Show Database Counts Ifthis check box is selected the number of records with a given value for a given field will be listed beside the value in the dropdown list for those fields that currently have a dropdown list For example if there are 45 subjects whose language is Spanish the number 45 will app
163. ch BAS 200 Bio Acoustic Simulator Multi Station Installation of the CCA 200mini To install multiple stations of the CCA 200mini audiometer refer to the instructions diagram and key to diagram numbers below The diagram shows an installation of two CCA 200mini audiometers Follow the instructions in the previous section to install the first station NO oo 1 OQ tan BW NY Up to sixteen audiometer stations may be controlled from a single computer To install multiple stations of the CCA 200mini 1 Unplug the audiometer power supply cord from the wall outlet 2 Connect the supplied serial cable between the COMPUTER port of the second audiometer and the EXPANSION port of the first audiometer 3 Connect the headset and response switch to the second audiometer connections not shown on diagram Ifthe audiometer is mounted outside the station use standard patch cords to make connections through the station walls 4 Plug the power supply cord into the wall outlet The red power LED on the front panel of the audiometer should glow indicating that the audiometer is powered 5 Repeat the steps above for any remaining audiometers 10 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 91 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup Daisy Chaining CCA 200mini Audiometers Key to Numbers in Diagram 1 Headset Cable 2 Response Switch 3 CCA 200mini Audiometer 4 Serial Cable 5 Serial Cable 6 USB Computer Interface Cab
164. change the prompt for most data field buttons To change the prompt 1 Choose the push button to the left of the data field s edit box The field s look up dialog box appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 In the Prompt edit box delete the old prompt and type the new one 4 Choose OK 224 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 305 of 396 User Defined Fields Field Default You may assign a default entry for most data fields This default will appear automatically in a data field for new records This feature is useful for fields that are often the same from record to record such as a technician ID field To set the field default 1 Choose the data field s push button The field s look up dialog box appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Choose the desired item in the list box at left If the item is not in the list add it by using the Add push button 4 Choose the Set Default push button 5 Choose OK Real Time Formatting Certain field types such as date fields or the Social Security number field must conform to certain formats The separator characters e g slashes and dashes can be automatically inserted for you as you type This is referred to as real time formatting The three formats that you may choose are date mm dd yyyy time hh mm ss and Social Security number xxx xx xxxx To choose real time formatting for a data fie
165. ck to List Validation to a Field To add Lock to List validation to a field 1 Choose the push button for the data field The field s look up dialog box appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Press the Validation push button The Data Validation dialog box appears 4 Un select the Disable Validation check box so that the X is removed from the box 5 In the Validation Type group box choose the Lock to List radio button 6 Choose OK 7 In the data field s dialog box choose OK Adding Legal Character Validation to a Field To add legal character validation to a field 1 Choose the push button for the data field The field s look up dialog box appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Press the Validation push button The Data Validation dialog box appears Un select the Disable Validation check box so that the X is removed from the box Inthe Validation Type group box select the radio button for Legal Characters In the Legal Characters group box enter the validation Size ND Wn A For each value of validation Offset choose the appropriate radio button in the Legal Characters group box If you select the radio button for User Defined use the User Defined Chars Characters edit box as needed 8 Choose OK 9 In the data field s dialog box choose OK 228 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 309 of 396 User Defined Fiel
166. cklit silicone rubber sealed keys with icons and silent operation DVX008A USB to DB9 Serial Adaptor LIEN CBL002 Serial printer cable with 25 pin male D connector Internal CBL003 Serial modem cable with 25 pin male D Battery power NiMH pack provided or 3 AA cells NiMH Photo Lithium or Alkaline connectar Operating Time up to 7 hours of operation battery type and mode dependent CELON b sena printer cable with pin mal i Beratung p p y typ p connector intemal smart charger MDM001 Battery powered telephone modem External MDM012 AC powered telephone modem Voltage range B to 15 Vdc MDM010 Radio frequency modem ypical current 150 mAQ12 Vdc Physical Characteristics Dimensions length x width x depth 99 x34 x1 6in 251 x 86 x 41 mm excluding preamplifier Weight excluding microphone and preamplifier 1 1 Ib 0 53 kg Environmental Operating Temperature Storage Temperature 14 to 122 F 10 to 50 C 14 to 140 F 10 to 60 C Acoustic calibrators CAL200 CAL250 Outdoor environmental cases EPS024 EPS026 and EPS028 Environmental protection for microphones and preamplifiers EPS2106 2107 and 2108 Outdoor preamplifier for long term noise PRM2100K monitoring with electrostatic actuator Tripod Microphone Boom TRP001 TRP002 Microphone extension cables EXAxxx where xxx is length in feet standard cable lengths in feet include 1 5 6 10 2
167. combination with EXCXXX cable NOTE Items in blue type are included accessories The 824 is available in the following configurations Model Description ISM LOG SSA ACC 824S Type 1 SLM with 1 2 Mic PRM902 WS001 v 824L Type 1 SLM with 1 2 Mic PRM902 WS001 includes accessories v v v 824A Type 1 SLM with 1 2 Mic PRM902 WS001 includes accessories v v v 824 Type 1 SLM with 1 2 Mic PRM902 WS001 includes accessories v v v v At any time your 824 can be upgraded with these options Options Description 824S 824L 824A 824 824 LOG Logging capability v v 824 SSA Sound spectrum analysis capability v v 824 ACC Accessories CCS001 CBL002 CBLO06 CBL042 BATO10 EXA010 PSA026 824 Util v 824 RTA Real time analysis capability option with fast autostore RT60 noise criteria v v v v 824 FFT Narrow band 400 line FFT option v v v v Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 371 of 396 SYSTEM 824 System 824 Features and Specifications Time weigh Slow Fast Impulse TWA peak in parallel with all requency weightings A C Flat in parallel with all time weightings gt 105 dBA ISM amp LOG gt 80 dB SSA ing Frequency weighting Linearity range RMS noise floor lt 16 dBA 2541 microphone typical RMS overload level 57 dBA 2540 microphone typical Peak range gt 65 dB Peak level 60 dB 2540 microphone Octave band frequencies 3 octave 12 5 Hz to 20 k
168. covered by the report The total number of audiometers included in the report is shown and the number of audiometers that have passed the daily calibration check is displayed The Key section shows that the thresholds are listed in dB HL and explains abbreviations that may appear in the report For information on the Sound Level Meter section see Reports Print Daily Calibration Report Dialog Box PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Print Daily Calibration Report dialog box shows the available report templates and select sorts There are three report templates available which are listed in the Report Template list box See the following sections for descriptions of the reports In the Report Select Sort list box the available Select Sorts appear for the Report Template that is currently selected Test Date Range will select all daily calibrations for audiometers that have a daily calibration in that range Test Date Range Exclusive will select only daily calibrations in that range If the Print to Screen check box is selected the report will be printed to the screen instead of to a printer The Copies control allows you to choose the number of copies that will be printed If you create a custom report you can specify Daily Calibration as a report type and your report will appear in the Report Template list in this dialog box See Custom Reports for information on creating custom reports To see the Print Daily Calibration Report dia
169. cribed below To see the Setup dialog box choose Setup from the Audiometer menu in the Control Window GENERAL PAGE On the General page the Port combo box shows computer serial ports This combo box will contain a choice BMIII which is the virtual port created by Windows Plug and Play Choose another port only in the rare event that Plug and Play does not operate The PnP Booth Serial No Assignment check box refers to the automatic assignment if Plug and Play is operating of serial numbers to audiometers If this check box is not selected automatic assignment will be disabled You may need to configure the audiometer s manually in the future if you add swap or remove audiometers or connect one to a different serial port See Manual Configuration non Plug and Play The Instrument Graphs are the Audiogram Graph and if you have a Sound Level Meter the Sound Level Graph If the Display Instrument Graphs check box is checked the graphs will be displayed in the information tabs For information on the information tabs see Audiometer Information Tabs and Sound Level Meter Information Tab If the Use Sound Card for Alarms check box is checked the Test Complete Alarm and the Error Alarm will be played through the PC sound card rather than the PC speaker Some PC computers especially laptops may not have PC speakers and will require this feature In this case you must use a wye Y adapter to connect both a set of powered spea
170. ct Configurations dialog box appears 2 In the list choose the configuration that you wish to duplicate 3 Choose the Duplicate push button The duplicate configuration will appear in the list The name will be Copy of name 4 Choose Close Extract Merge Record Groups A Diagram PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Below is a diagram of the Extract Merge record groups 191 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 272 of 396 Extract and Merge Extract Merge Record Groups STX 5 0 DB Diagram E MCon g UDFId Key Hi day UO Compe 3 Sok Compargki UDH Zord Sooner E m Ertract Merge Table Role Tbk with Factry Deilie de tks Record Group Prman Table Thk with SortOrder y amber Tape tehg Record maring oy vane em Tabie where detallchanges are detected Merging Records An Overview PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Merge function is available only if the Database Interface in Setup is set for Storage This function is intended for data transfer and synchronization between two Benson Medical Instruments products Merge imports records that have been extracted from another Benson Medical Instruments product and merges them with the existing records Before merging records into the database it is good practice to back up your data files If the file you are merging from is corrupted or an accidental interruption of the computer occurs the data files may be harmed 15 Fab05 The data to be merged may be in
171. d or has been modified since the last save Appears only with the Retest on Noise Above MPANL check box selected in the Test Configuration dialog box Audiometer Information Tabs The audiometer information tabs display additional information about a particular audiometer Each audiometer has its own tab at the bottom of the Control Window To learn more about the information tab fields see Information Tab Fields below Information Tab Fields Daily Calibration If this check box is checked the audiometer software uses the selected Daily Calibration Configuration for testing Selecting Set in the Daily Calibration submenu in the Audiometer menu in the Control Window checks the box or you may check the box in the Audiometer Information Tab For more information on daily calibration see Daily Calibration This check box will be cleared when the audiometer is cleared with the Clear command Other Ear First If this check box is selected the audiometer will perform the selected Test Configuration swapping the right and left ears Clear this check box to perform the test on the left and right ears in the standard order This check box will be cleared when the audiometer is cleared with the Clear command 59 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 140 of 396 Control Window Pulse Tone If this check box is selected the subject is tested using a pulsed stimulus Clear this check box to use a continuous stimulus for th
172. d with the Modify Format dialog box choose Close 218 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 299 of 396 Import and Export Deleting a Field PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To delete a field in an import export format 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Formats The Formats dialog box appears 2 Choose the format in which you wish to delete a field Choose the Modify push button The Modify Format dialog box appears U 4 In the Field Definitions group box select the field you wish to delete 5 Choose the Delete push button 6 When finished with the Modify Format dialog box choose Close 7 When finished with the Formats dialog box choose Close Export Filters PLUS PACKAGE ONLY You may apply a filter when exporting data The factory defined filters are Current Company History Date Range in the current company Test Date Range in the current company Factory defined filters may not be modified or deleted You also have the option of adding your own filter s Users must have administrator access to add modify or delete filters You will need to use SOL when entering the filter expression Any filter that you add will appear in the Filter combo box in the Export dialog box Refer to Database Field Definitions for table names and field names and to The ASK Function and The ASKSYS Function for information on these functions See the following sections for information on adding modifying
173. dation error will be triggered if fewer than eight characters are entered The maximum value of validation Size is 50 Offset refers to the number of characters to the right of the first field character for which the validation is being specified For example an offset of 0 refers to the first character If the User Defined radio button is selected enter the list of legal characters for this offset in the User Defined Characters edit box Legal Characters Definition Subset Any ASCII Character the 92 typeable ASCII characters from space ASCII 32 to the tilde ASCII 126 Only the space character igi the ten digits 0 to 9 a mechanism by which you can define your own subset of up to twenty characters Adding Format Validation to a Field 1 Choose the push button for the data field The field s look up dialog box appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Press the Validation push button The Data Validation dialog box appears 4 Un select the Disable Validation check box so that the X is removed from the box 5 In the Validation Type group box select the radio button of the desired format Because you are not using legal character validation the settings in the Legal Characters group box have no effect and may be ignored 6 Choose OK 227 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 308 of 396 User Defined Fields 7 In the data field s dialog box choose OK Adding Lo
174. ding an Automatic Test Configuration For information on the Test Configuration dialog box see Test Configuration Dialog Box To add an automatic test configuration 1 Select the Audiometer menu and choose Test Configuration The Test Configuration List dialog box is displayed 2 Choose the Add push button The Test Configuration dialog box is displayed 3 Enter your choices in the General and other pages as applicable 4 When finished choose OK 74 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 155 of 396 Automatic Testing Modifying an Automatic Test Configuration To modify a test configuration 1 Select the Audiometer menu and choose Test Configuration The Test Configuration List dialog box appears 2 Select the test configuration to modify in the list box and press the Modify push button The Test Configuration dialog box appears 3 Make changes as desired The significance of individual settings is described in the section beginning with Test Configuration Dialog Box 4 When all changes are made choose OK Deleting an Automatic Test Configuration To delete a test configuration 1 Under the Audiometer menu choose Test Configuration The Test Configuration List dialog box appears 2 Select the Test Configuration to delete and choose the Delete push button 3 Confirm the deletion by choosing the Yes push button Once a test configuration is deleted it can not be recovered and must be defined again
175. diometer Technical UM Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Annual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Annual Calibration Procedure 1 TABLE E 1 REFERENCE THRESHOLD LEVELS FOR TELEPHONICS TDH 39 EARPHONES Reference threshold Sound level for level Frequency Hz TDH 39 meter earphones reading Frequency dBSPL dBSPL 500 11 5 81 5 1000 LO 770 2000 0 79 0 3000 0 80 0 4000 5 79 5 6000 5 85 5 1 qu Audiometer Technical PRY ize Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Annual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Annual Calibration Procedure Generally an Annual Calibration is not recommended as the time differential between the Exhaustive and Annual is minimal 1 Plas Audiometer Technical E s Training Course ae a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Functional Check fo NE 1 Click Audiometer 2 Select Functional Check Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 43 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical c DA Training Course da CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check
176. diometer dialog box appears 4 Choose Yes to delete the audiometer and all the daily calibrations associated with it 5 When finished with the Daily Calibration dialog box choose Close To delete all audiometers for daily calibration storage From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 Select the Delete All push button at the right of the Audiometers list box The Delete All Audiometers dialog box appears pi 3 Choose Yes to delete all audiometers and all the daily calibrations associated with them 4 In the Delete All Final Confirmation dialog box enter the words DELETE ALL in the edit box 5 Choose OK All audiometers and daily calibrations will be deleted 6 When finished with the Daily Calibration dialog box choose Close 145 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 226 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage Daily Calibration Audiogram Dialog Box PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Add Daily Calibration Audiogram dialog box allows you to add a daily calibration audiogram The Modify Daily Calibration Audiogram dialog box allows you to modify a daily calibration audiogram In the Audiometer group box the Serial No and Model fields show the serial number and model of the audiometer that is currently selected in the Daily Calibration Storage dialog box These fields cannot be changed The Cal Date field is for the most recent annual calibration date as of
177. ds Disabling Data Validation for a Field To disable data validation for a field 1 Choose the push button for the data field The field s look up dialog box appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Choose the Validation push button The Data Validation dialog box appears 4 Select the Disable Validation check box 5 Choose OK 6 In the data field s dialog box choose OK 229 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 310 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 311 of 396 Data Transfer Data Transfer The data transfer method you use will depend on several factors including 1 whether your database is a Benson Medical Instruments product 2 whether you are doing a real time transfer or a group audiogram transfer and 3 which third party database you are using if applicable Use the Database Interface combo box in the Setup dialog box to choose your database To see the Setup dialog box choose Setup from the Audiometer menu Is Your Database a Benson Medical Instruments Product Your audiometer can efficiently transfer data to virtually all third party databases However transfer to a Benson Medical Instruments database such as the Plus Package or Solo is the most streamlined because for stored data it can be done using the Extract and Merge functions These functions enable you to move data from multiple companies in one operation for example For data transfer to a non
178. dwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 53 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Theory of Operation ll Serial Number Matched to CCA 200mini Audiometer in Benson Medical control software Audiometer matched to BAS 200 in System Setup for import to DOEHRS HC Reference Specific to Audiometer for better Daily Calibration Tracking Jm I Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Theory of Operation Ill Provide Integrated Mounting Bracket for BAS 200 and CCA 200mini System Creates a 6 x 6 x 6 Module for each Test Station Standard Cabling between BAS 200 and CCA 200mini 6 4 Phone Cable Simple Handswitch insertion to ready for testing function Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Il Installation Procedures I Mount BAS 200 Bracket Il Install CCA 200mini Bracket IIl Install CCA 200mini Audiometer See CCA 200mini Install Section Place BAS 200 Simulator on Bracket Install 6 4 Phone Cord from BAS 200 Simulator Audiometer ack to CCA 200 Response Jack Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 54 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Il Installation Procedures I Moun
179. e 124 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 125 of 396 User s Manual PDF File Printed Documentation Printed documentation can be generated using the manual pdf file on the CD containing the audiometer software This file can be viewed and printed with Adobe Acrobat Reader version 5 or later 45 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 126 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 127 of 396 Control Window Control Window All audiometer functions are controlled by the menus and the toolbar displayed at the top of the Control Window In this section each menu and button function is described and a section reference is given for a full description of operation Menu Functions The menu functions are described in the tables below The column at right lists sections for further reference enu File Company Company Companies information Daily Access to daily Daily Calibration Storage Calibration calibration storage Languages View or make Languages changes to languages for automatic voice instructions Passwords Controls access User Names and User Passwords using passwords Extract Makes a copy ofa Extracting Records An Overview subset of the database into the Configurations merged also allows for trial merge Import Imports data Import Overview Export Exports data Export Overview 47 mu Merges a copy of a Merging Records An Overview Copyright 2
180. e A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Left Phone On Off Ratio is completed Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Place Right Phone on Coupler 2 Click Ok to start Right Acoustic Measurements AudiometerTechnical 4 7 Se Training Course EP a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Distortion Test is started Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 36 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout x yet Audiometer Technical e tre Training Course adl a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Crosstalk Test will conclude the _ automated procedure m Audiometer Technical A Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 P
181. e Close 9 Repeat the previous step for all desired fields 10 When finished with the Add Format dialog box choose Close 11 In the Formats dialog box choose Close 216 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 297 of 396 Import and Export Modifying a Format PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To modify an import export format 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Formats The Formats dialog box appears 2 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Format dialog box appears Modify the name of the format in the Name edit box Modify the size of the record in the Record Size edit box In the Field Definitions group box choose the field you wish to modify Choose the Modify push button The Modify Field dialog box appears 7 Modify the field as desired 8 When finished with the Modify Field dialog box choose Close 9 When finished with the Modify Format dialog box choose Close ON Wn A Q 10 In the Formats dialog box choose Close Deleting a Format PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To delete an import export format 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Formats The Formats dialog box appears 2 Choose the format you wish to delete 3 Choose the Delete push button 4 Choose Close Duplicating a Format PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To duplicate a format 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Formats 2 In the Formats dialog box select the format you wish to copy in the list box 3 Ch
182. e Format combo box lists available formats The check box Write data validation errors to log file enables you to write these errors to a file instead of having the data importation interrupted If you check this option you may change the default path in the Log File edit box 199 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 280 of 396 Import and Export To see the Import dialog box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Import Validation of Imported Data PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Each standard format includes validation of dates times threshold values and Subject IDs Subject IDs in the data being imported must be in accordance with the current Subject ID format settings for the company If the database finds an illegal or missing Subject ID or an illegal date time or threshold there will be a data validation error You have two options for data validation errors on import they can appear on the screen as they occur or they can be logged to a file for viewing later If you choose to see errors on the screen as they occur data importation will be interrupted in each instance and an error message will appear Choosing OK in the error message allows importation to resume Thus someone must be present to monitor data import The other option involves errors being logged to a file and in this case no one would have to be present to handle data validation error messages during import Importing Data PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To
183. e Print Test dialog box appears 2 Choose the Options push button The Multiple Report Print Options dialog box appears 3 Choose the Add push button The Add Multiple Report Print dialog box appears 4 In the Report Template combo box choose the report 5 In the Report Select Sort combo box choose the Select Sort 6 Choose whether to enable this report using the Enabled check box For a discussion of this feature see Add Multiple Report Print dialog box above 7 Choose whether to Print on Save using the Print on Save check box 8 Choose whether to print to the screen using the Print to Screen check box 9 Choose the number of copies using the Copies control 10 When finished choose OK 11 In the Multiple Report Print Options dialog box choose Close Modifying a Report for Multiple Report Print PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To modify a report for Multiple Report Print 1 From the Audiometer menu choose Save Print Test The Save Print Test dialog box appears 96 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 177 of 396 Testing Saving and Printing with STORAGE 2 Choose the Options push button The Multiple Report Print Options dialog box appears 3 Select the report youwish to modify in the list 4 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Multiple Report Print dialog box appears 5 Make changes as desired 6 When finished choose OK 7 In the Multiple Report Print Options dialog box choose Close Deleting
184. e Reference push button then the Close push button The current data is now stored as the new baseline reference audiogram PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The instructions below describe how to mark a stored daily calibration audiogram as the reference audiogram If you are manually entering the daily calibration audiogram and wish to mark it as the reference audiogram follow the instructions in Adding a Daily Calibration Audiogram taking care to select the Reference check box To mark a stored daily calibration audiogram as the reference audiogram 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 Inthe Audiometers list box choose the audiometer on which the daily calibration check was performed 3 Inthe Audiograms list box choose the daily calibration audiogram that you wish to mark as a reference 4 Select the Modify push button at the right of the Audiograms list box The Modify Daily Calibration Audiogram dialog box appears 5 Select the Reference check box 6 Choose OK 7 In the Daily Calibration dialog box choose Close Daily Calibration Reports IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE One daily calibration report is available the Daily Calibration Certificate report PLUS PACKAGE ONLY There are three factory defined daily calibration reports available Daily Calibration Certificate Daily Calibration Summary and Daily Calibration LIst In addition any c
185. e Report Templates are discussed in the following sections 3 Choose the Select Sort method in the Select Sort list box If you choose a range of dates or subjects you will be asked to enter the start and end dates and or names 4 Choose whether to print to screen using the Print to Screen check box 5 Choose the number of copies 6 Choose the Print push button Medical Referral There will be an automatic medical referral on any report that indicates a medical referral if Yes is the response to the Refer Subject question of the current audiogram This question appears in the Add Audiogram or Modify Audiogram dialog box A positive response to this question on any audiogram that is not the latest one has no bearing on a possible medical referral The AAO American Academy of Otolaryngology criteria for Medical Referral are listed in the Hearing Conservation Manual published by CAOHC Council for Accreditation in Occupational Hearing Conservation An audiogram that has been rejected by means of the Reject Audiogram check box in the Add Audiogram Modify Audiogram dialog box has no bearing on a possible medical referral PLUS PACKAGE ONLY In a Subject History if any of the AAO Medical Referral Criteria questions results in an affirmative answer there will be an automatic medical referral on any report that indicates a medical referral 155 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 236 of 396 Copyright 2008 S
186. e USB CIC provides power supply functions to the serial daisy chain The USB CIC provides instruction and talkover functions to the audiometers Audiometer Technical Bee ce Training Course uad USB Computer Interface Cable i Theory of Operation l The USB CIC provides a standardized USB to Serial Access from the DOEHRS HC System PC L Meets USB 2 0 Full Speed Standards Il Programmable for future Upgrade Compatibility Audiometer Technical Training Course USB Computer Interface Cable Installation Procedures I Plug to Available Cable from Audiometer Daisy Chain Il Connect Green Audio Cable to Speaker Output Jack Plug Power Supply Cord to USB CIC Jack Plug USB Plug to available USB Jack on DOEHRS HC PC Dress Cables to protect installation Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Version2 0 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 51 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical m cum Training Course uad USB Computer Interface Cable u Assembly Disassembly Procedures l No User Serviceable Components are available in the USB CIC ll Contact Benson Medical Instruments Company for Technical Support at 612 827 2222 Choice 5 Audiometer Technical Training Course USB Computer Interface Cable iv Troubleshooting l Cable Connection Issues l All Connections Correct ll Non Functioning USB Port i Ch
187. e existing subject To merge the records of a subject with those of another subject in the same company and overwrite the demographic data of the destination subject 1 In Subject View in the Control Window select the subject whose Subject ID you will be modifying 119 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 200 of 396 Subjects 2 Choose Modify from the Subject menu The Modify Subject dialog box appears 3 In the Modify Subject dialog box change the Subject ID to match that of the other subject 4 Choose OK A dialog box appears asking whether you wish to merge the test records of the currently displayed subject with the existing subject 5 Choose Yes A dialog box appears asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing subject data with the currently displayed subject data 6 Choose Yes The demographic data audiograms and histories of the currently displayed subject will overwrite the demographic data audiograms and histories of the existing subject 7 In the Modify Subject dialog box choose OK To merge the records of a subject with those of another subject in the same company and keep the demographic data of the destination subject 1 In Subject View in the Control Window select the subject whose Subject ID you will be modifying 2 Choose Modify from the Subject menu The Modify Subject dialog box appears 3 In the Modify Subject dialog box change the Subject ID to match that of the other
188. e of the person you wish to enter and press OK 8 When finished with the Assign Subject dialog box choose the Assign button Verifying Correct Audiometer Setup To verify correct audiometer setup 1 From the Control Window choose Test Configuration from the Audiometer menu 2 In the Test Configuration List dialog box make sure the correct test is selected If not select the correct test 3 Choose the Modify push button 4 If the automatic test shown is not correct modify the test See the sections beginning with Test Configuration Dialog Box for information on features 5 When all information is correct choose OK Beginning Automatic Testing To begin automatic testing 1 Seat the subject comfortably and fit the headset for his or her head The ear cushion should be placed directly over the subject s ear canal The subject should not place or adjust the headset since this may result in incorrect placement of the headset 2 Start the automatic test by choosing the Start button from the Control Window If you have more than one booth select the correct booth 92 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 173 of 396 Testing Saving and Printing with STORAGE You may watch the bracketing on the booth information display to confirm that the subject understands the test instructions gt Ifthe database interface you are using is OHM Medgate HearTrak Windows or Storage you may select a subject while the te
189. e response in the edit box Default Responses to History Questions PLUS PACKAGE ONLY For user defined History questions Medical History Page and Medical History Page 2 you may set up a default response The AAO Medical Referral Criteria questions have no default option To enter a default response for a user defined History question 1 Choose the push button for the question The look up dialog box for this data field appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Enter the default response in the Default edit box 4 Choose OK 5 When finished with the Add History dialog box choose OK The next time you open the Add History dialog box the default response will appear 127 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 208 of 396 Audiograms and Histories Adding a History PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add a history follow the procedure below Alternatively you may choose the Add History push button in either the Assign dialog box or the Save Print Test dialog box To add a history In Subject View in the Control Window select the subject for whom you wish to add a history 2 From the Edit menu choose Add then History The Add History dialog box appears 3 Enter the date and time in the Survey Date and Time edit boxes 4 In the AAO Medical Referral Criteria tab enter the subject s responses to the first eight questions If the subject has answered No to all questions c
190. e the Duplicate push button A copy of this company will appear in the list 4 Choose OK 112 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 193 of 396 Subjects Subjects IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE The following sections describe how to view subjects and their audiograms how to find subjects and how to add modify and delete subjects You will also find instructions on how to combine records of two subjects in the same company For instructions on how to use the look up push buttons such as Job and Department see Look up Boxes To see the Add Subject dialog box 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Subject then Add IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE The following sections describe how to view subjects and their audiograms and histories and how to add modify and delete subjects For instructions on how to use the look up push buttons such as Job and Department see Look up Boxes You will also find instructions on how to move a subject to a different company how to combine records of two subjects in different companies and how to combine records of two subjects in the same company To see the Add Subject dialog box 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Subject then Add Add Subject Dialog Box The Add Subject dialog box enables you to add a subject and accompanying demographic data The Company box shows the company name If you have the Plus Package see the bottom of this page
191. eadband for wear or loose headphone yokes Audiometer Technical y uc Training Course WP CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manua 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 4 Visual Inspection a 1 Inspect Case for any crack or 3 breakage Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 25 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Er Training Course ad a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibratio Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Visual Inspection 2 Inspect Headset for any damage or frayed cords loose set screws or damaged 4 phone plugs 035 Allen Head Set Screw Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Visual Inspection 3 Check condition of MX51 Ear Cushions i White or Caulk Like Residue Replace ii Cracks or Tears Replace iii Flattened or deformed shape Replace EY A Audiometer Technical p Training Course I a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Visual Inspection 4 Check Headband for wear or loose headphone yokes i Loose Vertical Post Replace ii Loose Yoke Tighten or Replace iii Worn or Broken Pi
192. eal time formatting for any data field To modify a data field 1 Choose the push button for the data field The data field s look up dialog box appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Make changes as desired using the push buttons and edit boxes 4 When finished choose OK 223 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 304 of 396 User Defined Fields Look up Boxes Data fields have look up boxes that will hold a list of choices for the field You may use this feature to standardize the field contents or to save time in entering data To choose an entry from the look up box 1 Choose the data field s push button The field s look up dialog box appears 2 Select the entry from the list box and choose OK You may also double click the entry with the mouse To add modify or delete entries from the look up box 1 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands To modify or delete an entry select the entry from the list box and press the appropriate push button To add an entry press the Add push button type the new entry in the edit box and choose OK To change the order of entries in the look up box 1 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 2 Select an entry and press the Item Up and Item Down push buttons to move the entry in the list Field Prompt The field prompt is the label that appears on the data field push buttons You can
193. ear beside Spanish in the combo box list Show Database Values If this check box is selected the arrow for the combo box will appear for the following edit boxes SSN Location City State Zip and Email Asterisk An single asterisk by a field name indicates that in the dropdown list for that field a database value appears for each entry Date format Birth Date Hire Date The date format is MM DD YYYY 166 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 247 of 396 Report Select Sorts Set Defaults The Set Defaults push button returns all settings in this dialog box back to the default settings Count Records The Count Records push button instructs the database to count the total number of records in this company and to display the number below in the gray box labeled Total In the Print Report dialog box the contents of the Report Select Sort list box will vary according to the Report Template that is currently selected at left The Select Sorts that are available are the following 167 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 248 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 249 of 396 Report Options Report Options PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Report Options allows you to add modify and delete custom report templates and select sorts for reports You can also make changes to the order of factory defined report templates and select sorts in the list The factory defined templates and select sorts themselv
194. eck Device Manager on PC l Administrative Rights Need di Missing Software Drivers L Check Device Manager on PC l Administrative Rights Needed IV Uninstalled Software Drivers Audiometer Technical x O Training Course ae USB Computer Interface Cable v Question and Answer Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 52 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Theory of Operation ll Installation Procedures lll Assembly Disassembly Procedures IV Calibration Reference Setup V Troubleshooting VI Question and Answer Je I Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Theory of Operation Provide Referenced Ear for Daily Calibration Function Serial Number Matched to CCA 200mini Audiometer in Benson Medical control software Provide Integrated Mounting Bracket for BAS 200 and CCA 200mini System JC I Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Theory of Operation l Provide Referenced Ear for Daily Calibration Function System Electronics designed to provide a Reference Level between 60 and 75dBHL Test Protocol software controlled to provide a test time of about 70 seconds Color Coded Ear Cups to minimize placement errors Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Version2 0 All Rights Reserved Worl
195. eeeeeeesseasssseeeeeeseeeeees 138 Repealed S TS i doin n n a a i aa 138 Reportable Hearing LOSS cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeetees 138 Retest Not Used secc p b ker eea 138 ODIO Mo LA E DL t A t S 138 STS Persistent Improvement esseeesseeeeeee 139 STS Persistent STS eese eee ann relin nain 139 SSO MOND 5 1 e atte doo ptas 139 liio tesa 140 Sound Level Meter Columns eese 140 NE COUMANS doas meti enn Ne 140 AN Status Column esses 140 MPANE ColUMNS oun eade ito dot i ei puse heo tac Topo dot otetu ute edo sete 141 Daily Calibration Storage 143 Daily Calibration Storage eseeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 143 Daily Calibration Dialog Box mmm 143 Add Audiometer Dialog BOX ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeetees 144 Adding an Audiometer eeeeeseesessseeeeeeeeenennee 144 Modifying an Audiometer eeseeeseseesssesseeeeeeeee 144 Deleting an Audiometer eeeeseeeeeeeeeeese 145 Daily Calibration Audiogram Dialog Box 146 Adding a Daily Calibration Audiogram 147 Modifying a Daily Calibration Audiogram 147 Deleting a Daily Calibration Audiogram 148 Updating the Daily Calibration Refere
196. ees 219 Export Filters ree NR 219 Adding a Filter fess ete epi pte epe eect cea cade RE ca cab teat 220 sre i efe Ez Filter ienen nea aaa 220 Deleting a Filter eene 220 User Defined Fields 223 User Defined Data Fields eseeeeeeeeeeeee 223 Data Field Sellingjs dei ipta I oH ese ia n deu sedes 223 Modifying a Data Fields icin iii iei conan ia iuge ono uda 223 LOOK UP Boxes ice adi d bue E dade Misa Load axe ROS 224 Field Prompt iamini emt tee AA eiua ba Roe 224 Field Default 2 on ee et eto ge P re HR RAO HRS 225 Real Time Formalting oem iinet ieee 225 Data Validation for User Defined Fields 225 Format Validation 2 2 TESI aeo oes cuc Lnd dut dus nalts 226 Lock to List Validation cccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeees 226 Legal Character Validation sessssssssss 227 Adding Format Validation to a Field sssse 227 Adding Lock to List Validation to a Field 228 Adding Legal Character Validation to a Field 228 Disabling Data Validation for a Field 229 Data Transfer 231 IBI IIS a E T 231 Data Transfer between Benson Medical Products 232 Data Transfer Using a Third Party Database 232 Data Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol
197. ent with limited user serviceable parts and procedures in the instrument case Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Assembly Disassembly Procedures RY m The CCA 200mini case has access through the two 2 Philips Head screws on the bottom of the case Care must be taken when opening the case as not to break the case Normal Anti Static procedures should be followed Audiometer Technical Eu amus Training Course ub CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibratio Ill Assembly Disassembly Procedures The components are surface mount soldered soldering of any component other than Jack connections is not recommended Care must be taken when opening the case as not to break the case Normal Anti Static procedures should be followed Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 20 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Version2 0 Audiometer Technical Training Course CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Ill Assembly Disassembly Procedures EN am I The only user replaceable component is the 24 Pin MAXIM Chip in the socket Normal Anti Static procedures should be followed Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Assembly Disassembly Procedures EN ac I System Reset Jumper J13 Shorting and then powering with reset all functions to F
198. ently in the file or database will be overwritten upon Extract During an extract records are only copied not removed from the existing database all the original records are still there when the extract is finished You can choose the type of data you want to make a copy of Subject demographic audiogram and history data may be extracted for more than one company at a time Factory defined Extract Configurations are available or you can create your own configurations You will need to use SQL when entering the filter expression A log file may be created with details of the Extract operation Extract Dialog Box PLUS PACKAGE ONLY In the Extract dialog box the Database Type group box shows two choices File database and SQL database The File mdb edit box is used if you are extracting to a file database Enter the name of the file database in this edit box or you can browse for the file using the Browse push button The default backup file and location are d stxextract mdb The Server and Database edit boxes are used if you are extracting to a SQL database The default server and database respectively are BMIMSDEServer and STXEXTRACT If you need to change servers you may enter the server name in the Server edit box or browse for it using the Browse push button If you are already on the right server you may enter the database name or browse for it using the Browse push button The Configuration combo box allows you to choose
199. er keys installed on your port More than one key can be attached at one time Requirements for Annual Calibration Performance of the frequency acoustic and linearity measurement tests meets the annual calibration requirements of 29 CFR Part 1910 95 Requirements for Exhaustive 2 Year Calibration Performance of all seven tests of automatic annual calibration frequency acoustic linearity distortion rise fall on off and crosstalk measurement meets the exhaustive 2 year calibration requirements of 29 CFR Part 1910 95 Automatic Annual Calibration For automatic annual calibration a Larson Davis System 824 sound level meter and the annual calibration hardware key must be installed The Larson Davis 824 is connected to the computer by means of the Larson Davis part CBL006 or equivalent The audiometer should be connected as it is for normal testing Some of the information entered during the calibration setup such as the technician information will be remembered by the audiometer software and will be automatically filled in when the next calibration is performed Changes can be made to this information if necessary The main screen for automatic annual calibration is the Audiometer Calibration Test Options dialog box with push buttons for each test option Run All will run the complete battery of tests in order to verify compliance with ANSI standards The table below lists the test option push buttons 254 Cop
200. erge Merge Dialog Box PLUS PACKAGE ONLY In the Merge dialog box the Database Type group box specifies either a file database or a database on a server If File database is chosen the File edit box is available The File edit box is for the name of the file containing the records that will be merged into the database The default file and path are c sample mdb choose the Browse button to browse for a different file If SQL database is chosen the Server and Database edit boxes are available If your database is located in a place other than the default location enter the server and database names or use the Browse buttons to browse for the server and database The Configuration combo box allows you to choose the type of data that you will merge into the database The Trial Merge check box enables you to determine the effects of an actual merge by checking the log file If the Create log file check box is selected a log file will be created The Log File edit box is for the location and file name of the log file You may browse for the file using the Browse button To see the Merge dialog box 1 Choose Merge from the File menu Merging Records Procedure PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To merge records into the database 1 Choose Merge from the File menu in the Control Window The Merge dialog box appears 2 In the Database Type group box choose File database or SQL database 193 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consul
201. erge Configuration PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To delete a Merge configuration 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Merge Configurations The Merge Configurations dialog box appears 2 Select the configuration in the list 3 Choose the Delete push button The Delete Configuration dialog box appears 4 Choose Yes to delete the configuration 5 In the Merge Configurations dialog box choose Close Duplicating a Merge Configuration PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To duplicate a Merge configuration 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Merge Configurations The Merge Configurations dialog box appears 2 In the list choose the configuration that you wish to duplicate 3 Choose the Duplicate push button The duplicate configuration will appear in the list 4 Choose Close 197 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 278 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 279 of 396 Import and Export Import Overview PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Import function is available only if the Database Interface in Setup is set for Storage This database has several requirements for importing data Hereafter we will refer to records and fields exported from another database as ASCII records and ASCII fields The fields and records that these data are mapped to in this database will be referred to as database records and database fields In order to be imported into the database the ASCII records must meet these cond
202. erge configurations cannot be changed Merge Configurations Description All all database records Current Company all records from the current company Subjects Audiograms History in date range all subjects audiograms and medical histories within a certain date range can be from different companies Current Co Subjects Audiograms History in all subjects audiograms date range and medical histories in 194 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 275 of 396 Extract and Merge the current company within a certain date range Daily Calibration daily calibration data Daily Calibration in date range daily calibration data in a date range Utility Record Groups reports export filters import export formats and extract merge configurations Custom Merge Configurations PLUS PACKAGE ONLY You may also create custom Merge Configurations It may be easier to duplicate an existing configuration and modify that rather than adding one Databases comprise a set of tables each of which hold certain types of data For example the Subject table holds the subject demographic data The Add Merge Configuration dialog box allows you to choose which tables to include in the Merge Selecting the check box in the Extract column will include the contents of that table in the Extract Configuration Relational databases follow a hierarchy of tables For example in this database every audiogram must be associated with a particular subject The
203. erge operation that uses either the All configuration or the Utility Record Groups configuration To see the Print Report dialog box 1 From the Report menu in the Control Window choose Print PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Using Report Options you can add custom report templates or select sorts or change the order of the factory defined templates or select sorts see Report Options If you create custom Extract or Merge configurations you can choose to include or exclude the Report record group For Daily Calibration reports see Daily Calibration Reports National Hearing Conservation Association Baseline Codes in Reports Some reports show a Baseline column with information about whether an audiogram is a baseline and if so what type The Regulation setting for the company determines whether OSHA or MSHA regulations have been used in calculations Plus Package only Refer to the table below Baseline Baseline Type code S HA STS Baseline or MSHA STS Baseline OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline or MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline OSHA STS Baseline or MSHA STS Baseline and OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline or MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline blank 154 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 235 of 396 Reports Printing a Report To print a report 1 In the Control Window choose Print from the Report menu The Print Report dialog box appears 2 Select the Report Template in the Template list box Th
204. es up and down in the list The Id number combo box is used to assign an ID number to the language The number must be in the range from 32 to 63 inclusive and must be unique This number is sent to third party hearing conservation databases instead of the language name To see the Languages dialog box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Languages IF YOU ARE USING STORAGE AS YOUR DATABASE INTERFACE These twelve languages are also available as choices for the Notification Letter The Notification Letter for a given subject will print in the preferred language of the subject PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Any language that you add will appear as a choice in the Notification Letter dialog box You will then be able to enter texts in this language for the Notification Letter and have the letter printed in this language 87 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 168 of 396 Languages Adding a Language To add a language for automatic voice instructions 1 Using a PC record the instructions in a wave wav file format Windows includes the Sound Recorder applet See Sound Recorder in the Index of Windows Help 2 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Languages The Language dialog box appears 3 Choose the Add push button The Add Language dialog box appears 4 In the Name edit box enter the name of the language you are adding 5 In the Id combo box enter the language identification number T
205. es cannot be modified or deleted The Template list box shows the report templates available The Select Sort list box shows the select sorts available for the report template that is currently selected in the Template list box The Add Modify and Delete push buttons at the right of the Template and Select Sort list boxes enable you to add and make changes to custom report templates and select sort methods See the sections below for more information Use the Item Up and Item Down push buttons to move often selected items to the top of the list The Item Up push buttons will move the list item that is currently selected up in the list The Item Down push buttons will move the list item that is currently selected down in the list To see the Report Options dialog box 1 Choose Options from the Reports menu in the Control Window The Report Options dialog box appears Custom Reports PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If you have the necessary proficiency with the third party Crystal Reports software you can add an entirely new report template or copy and then modify an existing report template These operations are discussed in the sections below The procedure for deleting a custom template is also given Custom reports and select sorts are backed up and restored as part of normal backup and restore operations since they are part of the database These data can be moved between product installations using Extract and Merge functions See the Ext
206. esseeeee 73 tests SEE audiograms 118 threshold determination method OT ont p ete inp ep 62 OO TIDSO dete nett s 52 toolbafinesr 51 description eceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeesteeees 51 tool tps eate eere hs 52 trademark information 231 trailing spaces ssss 201 TSOR abbrev for Terminate Stimulus on Response 64 U uninstalling the software 2 unique Keys a5 ee idiots 196 Update Reference push button 76 have Plus Package 76 updating sod tb o 93 baseline audiogram 93 daily calibration reference 78 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Nui 42 USer NAMES do dee dee 39 user defined fields 209 default entry ssessssss 210 format validation 211 prompt sssssseeeeeeenennns 210 real time formatting 211 Dr er AE 39 access levels cedo ends 39 ACCOUNTS A et eed reed 39 AAG ING citt ee 40 deleting secte etti 41 modifying sse 41 network USCIS At arae anaes 41 VEL VIEW 0 asas pelef seed iub ure de 39 setting up adminstrator 13 viewing the work of other users 42 users manual oo ovde eats 45 V validation of data 188 211 for user defined fields 211 on IMPOTt eee eceeeseceeeeseteeeeseeeees 188 Variable Starting Level
207. ests gt 4 umber SImFreq8000 Sound Level Meter Tests gt Test StatusSImTe stStatus IN IN 1 N umber 1 In Range Sound Level Meter ModellTests gt SImModel Sound Level Meter Tests gt SlmCalDate 8 Tex CCYYMMDD Calibration Date Sound Level Meter Tests gt SlmSerNum 5 Text Serial Number Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC 10 Text 204 Page 285 of 396 Import and Export Sound Level Meter Tests gt Number MPANL 125 SlmMpan125 Sound Level Meter Test Number MPANL 250SImMpan250 MPANL 500SImMpan500 MPANL 1000 SImMpan1 000 d Level Meter Tests gt 4 Number 2000SImMpan2000 d Level MeterTests gt 4 Number 4000SImMpan4000 MPANL 8000 SIlmMpan8000 ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef40 40 Text ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef4l 40 Text 40 Text ser Defined PT 40 Text ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef44 ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef45 40 Text ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef45 40 Text ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef46 40 ext ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef47 40 Text ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef48 40 Text ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef49 40 Text ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef50 40 ext ser Defined Field Tests gt UsrDef51 40 Text Test Comment Tests gt Comment 4000 Text Reject Audiogram Tests gt Reject Number 0 Not rejected l Rejected Left Standard Threshold Shift Tests gt LfSTSShift 5 Nu
208. eter Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration III Installation Procedures e i EN ace I z The Completed Installation will have a CCA 200mini and BAS 200 Simulator paired for each test station Color Coding of the CCA 200mini Jacks will reduce errors in the field di N y H Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration IIl Installation Procedures Cabling should routed through p the Jack Panel Under the Jack Panel or though a Access Hole drilled for cable access A through Jack Panel is shown diis Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 17 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Audiometer Technical E uc Training Course UM a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures Cabling should be dressed for a professional installation and to reduce cable issues with the subjects being tested Always work from the Audiometer to booth access point to remove any slack in the cable Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration III Installation Procedures RY m Example of a Booth Access Option It provides a 1 2 Access through the booth wall and is packed with Acoustic Putty and covered with a 2 x 4 Stainless Steel Plate Audiometer Techn
209. evised baseline This indication appears only if at least six months 180 days have passed since the first audiogram that showed an Improvement The Regulation setting for the company determines whether OSHA or MSHA regulations are used in calculating STS If you are using Age Correction for a company Age Correction will be used when determining persistence This indication appears only if Automatic Baseline Revision has been enabled for this company STS Persistent STS PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of STS Persistent STS in an Analysis column means 1 that this subject s hearing shows an STS in relation to the baseline audiogram and 2 that this audiogram is the second audiogram in a row to show an STS for this subject This indication appears only if at least six months 180 days have passed since the first audiogram that showed an STS The Regulation setting for the company determines whether OSHA or MSHA regulations are used in calculating STS If you are using Age Correction for a company Age Correction will be used when determining persistence STS is not analyzed as persistent when Age Correction is used under some circumstances When the uncorrected shift of the subsequent test is the same as the shift of the original STS but Age Correction adjustments make the subsequent test not an STS the program does not analyze the STS as persistent and the baseline is not revised This indication appears only if Automati
210. ext Menu 98 Subject History Questionnaire 120 Subject History SEE histories 119 SUBICCE ID aet e bs 103 Subject Notification Letter 149 Subject Summary report 151 Subject Test report 151 Subject Test STS report 151 Subject VIE Wiis sleet p M ORE 9T SUD CCS is e etes 109 110 111 additig cte ect 111 aSSIBIung ce Greer d 87 Averages and Impairments report 149 deletme s sse oen braces 112 histories 119 120 149 151 History Questionnaire 120 149 Jp per E 103 list On SCTECH ied oer ebd 97 modifying eesssss 112 113 moving to a different company 113 Notification Letter 149 150 Ieferting ieu 117 Summary report 151 Test tepott 2 e Ies 151 Test STS report sssus 151 substituting a number for NR 103 D VSLOC d ee ii aeia 16 216 220 data transfer using third party databdses ike maitre ats 216 procedure ssssssseeeee 220 setting as Database Interface 16 272 Page 353 of 396 T talk over microphone 17 53 Terminate Stimulus on Response TSOR deseas 64 test configurations 61 71 available configurations 61 Test Sequence Tab Test Configuration uuse 68 TESINE cedi citi code etit deuda 88 automatic testing 61 beginning 4 Test asc cet ovesstoa edere 88 manual testing se
211. f you chose Screening as the Procedure The hearing threshold at a frequency is defined as the level at which a response occurs in the first ascending trial To determine a threshold the audiometer software presents a tone at the Start level specified in the Test Configuration dialog box for the ear and frequency If no 64 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 145 of 396 Automatic Testing response is recorded the stimulus level increases by 5dB until a response is obtained This frequency is recorded as the threshold Alternatively if the subject provides two consecutive responses at the lowest level this level is recorded as the threshold The audiometer software lowers the intensity by 5dB when the subject responds and increases the intensity by 10dB if the subject does not respond until a threshold is determined The lowest level of stimulus to present is selectable for each threshold See Test Sequence Tab Test Configuration for an explanation of the starting and lowest levels Real Time STS Calculation During the audiogram the audiometer software calculates STS according to the method specified for the current test configuration in the STS Method combo box A baseline audiogram must be available from the database for the subject in question If there is an STS it will be noted in the subject s data only if the audiogram is saved The available methods are OSHA MSHA STS w o age correction OSHA MSHA STS
212. for information on changing the company SSN stands for Social Security number The language selected in the Language combo box overrides the language of the Test Configuration when this subject is tested as long as he or she has been assigned Select the In Hearing Conservation Program check box if the subject is currently in a hearing conservation program The Address push button is for entering the subject s address The Comment push button is for entering any comments The unmarked push buttons are for user defined fields See User Defined Data Fields for more information 113 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 194 of 396 Subjects PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If the subject is not in the company that is currently selected choose the Company push button The Company dialog box will appear and the subject s correct company can be chosen The edit box under the Company name is for the Subject ID Settings for the Subject ID including legal characters and the prompt for this edit box can be changed in the Modify Subject ID Format dialog box For more information see the sections beginning with Subject ID Format To see the Add Subject dialog box 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Subject then Add Find Subject Dialog Box If you wish to search for a subject in the current company or all companies Plus Package only choose Find then Subject from the Edit menu The Find Subject dialog box will a
213. for the export format If the export format requires any audiogram data a subject who does not have an audiogram will not be exported But if you are exporting only subject data all subjects will be exported You may choose a predefined format or create your own For information on formats see Formats for Importing and Exporting The Filter combo box is for the export filter For information on export filters see Export Filters Exporting Data PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To export data from the database 1 Select the File menu from the Control Window and choose Export The Export dialog box appears 2 Enter the location and name of the file that will contain the exported data or find the file using the Browse button 3 Choose the format from the Format combo box 4 Choose the filter from the Filter combo box 5 Choose the Export push button The export will proceed automatically Functions Performed during Import Export PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Features such as field mapping re formatting export only fields and trimming leading or trailing spaces enable you to deal with special circumstances of import or export See the following sections for more information 201 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 282 of 396 Import and Export For import the database performs several functions as desired These are performed in the following order 1 trim leading and or trailing spaces 2 formatting for import 3 field mapping For
214. ft 4000 60 LeR 6000 60 LeR 800 60 Right 1000 60 85 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 166 of 396 Functional Check 1000 Right 1000 optional At the conclusion of this series steady 1000 Hz tones at 60 dB will be available in each phone to check for bad headset cables Functional Check Procedure To do a functional check of an audiometer booth 1 Choose Functional Check from the Control Window Audiometer menu The Functional Check dialog box appears 2 Using the Enable 8000 Hz check box choose whether 8000 Hz will be tested 3 Place the headset on your head and hold the response switch in your hand 4 Press the response switch button The functional test starts The current stimulus is shown in the Current Output group box Pressing the hand switch while the tone is presented will repeat the current tone Pressing the Stop or Close push buttons interrupts the functional check The functional check may also be started by pressing the Start push button in the Functional Check dialog box then choosing the booth in the Select Booth dialog box 5 Check the headset cable for opens or crackle At the end of the sequence of tones the left phone emits a steady 1000 Hz tone at 60dB Wiggle the headset cable both at the jack and headset and listen for breaks or crackle in the sound 6 Press the hand switch to switch the tone to the right phone 7 When fini
215. g LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 56 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Il Installation Procedures I Mount BAS 200 Bracket Il Install CCA 200mini Bracket Install CCA 200mini Audiometer See CCA 200mini Install Section Place BAS 200 Simulator on Bracket Install 6 4 Phone Cord from BAS 200 Simulator Audiometer dd k to CCA 200 Response Jack Jm I Audiometer Technical Training Course a BAS 200 Simulator IV Calibration Reference Setup l Setup for Daily Calibration l Audiometer Daily Calibration ll Set lll All Enabled Audiometers ll Start Test JC I Audiometer Technical Training Course a BAS 200 Simulator IV Calibration Reference Setup I Setup for Daily Calibration l Headset Placed and Response Switch Removed Power Light ON Set Benson System for Daily Calibration I Audiometer Daily Calibration ll Set Ill All Enabled Audiometers ll Start Test All Enabled Audiometers Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 57 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a BAS 200 Simulator I Il At Test Finish Follow Prompts Select Yes Audiometer Technical Jem
216. g box See MPANLs You can automatically prohibit testing if the Sound Level Meter is overdue for annual calibration See Prohibit Audiogram without Sound Level Meter Calibration Annual calibration of the sound level meter requires the same hardware key that is used for audiometer annual calibration You can set up the software to warn you as the day for Sound Level Meter annual calibration approaches See Audiometer Setup Sound Level Meter Information Tab The Sound Level Meter Information Tab appears at the bottom of Audiogram View in the Control Window It displays sound level readings in numerical and graph form that are updated once a second The sound level reading is updated to the maximum value since the last update On the Sound Level Graph db SPL stands for decibel Sound Pressure Level You can choose to have the sound level readings updated ten times a second by selecting the Continuous Update Display check box 239 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 320 of 396 Sound Level Meter The readings that appear are taken by the sound level meter that is mapped to this audiometer For information on sound level meter mapping see Configuring the Sound Level Meter If the permissible sound level Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Level or MPANL for a particular octave band is exceeded the bar on the graph turns red above the permissible level The standard used for determining the permissible level is set in the
217. he Multiple Report Print Options dialog box To see the Multiple Report Print Options dialog box choose Save Print Test from the Audiometer menu then choose the Options push button This dialog box shows the reports that will be printed at the end of a test if the Print push button in the Save Print Test dialog box is chosen Of automatic printing has been enabled that is if Automatic Save on Test Complete in Test Configuration and Print on Save in the Add Multiple Report Print dialog box are selected The options that have been selected for each report appear in columns The Enabled column shows an X if the report is enabled for printing See the next section for more information on enabling a report Use the Add Modify and Delete push buttons to add modify and delete reports for Multiple Report Print The maximum number of reports that can appear in the list is 20 The minimum number is 1 The reports in the list will be printed in the order that they appear in the list Use the Item Up and Item Down push buttons to make changes to the order of reports Add Multiple Report Print dialog box PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Add Multiple Report Print dialog box allows to you add a report to Multiple Report Print If you add a report the report will appear in the list in Multiple Report Print Options and can be enabled or disabled for printing as desired Ifthe Enabled check box is selected for a report this report will be
218. he Plus Package ways to specify detailed selection criteria for multiple fields See Select Sorts for more information This dialog box has no effect on the report that print at the end ofa test To select or change the report that prints at the end of a test see Save Print Options The Report Template list box shows the report templates available See The Report Select Sort list box shows the select sorts available for the report template that is currently selected in the Report Template list box When the Print push button is chosen the Report Record Selection dialog box will appear for the currently selected Select Sort enabling you to specify selection criteria for multiple fields at a time For example you can arrange to print audiograms only within a certain date range and only for male subjects who are in HC programs See Select Sorts for more information Some aspects of the reports depend on company settings for example if you wish the reports for a company to calculate STS using Age Correction be sure that the Calculate STS using Age Correction check box for the company is selected For more information see Company Settings If you run the Sound Level Meter during an audiogram and Retest on Noise Above MPANLs was selected in the Test Configuration the report for that audiogram will state that the MPANLs were not exceeded However if you enter Sound Level Meter results manually or use the Sound Level Meter with
219. he above requirements Audiometer Technical Training Course Computer System Review Il Installation Procedures I Contact Local Information Services for PC related issues Audiometer Technical Training Course Computer System Review lll Troubleshooting The only known issue is on Air Force OptiPlex 745 L If after reviewing the Volume Control Properties the record functions are grayed out a driver update is required Contact Benson Medical Technical Support for additional information or log on to Dell s Support with Service Tag Number to access the driver download site RT ce I Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 66 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course Computer System Review V Question and Answer Audiometer Technical Training Course Examination Audiometer Technical Training Course Support amp Contact Information OBenson Medical Instrument Co 2 310 Fourth Avenue South Suite 5000 O Minneapolis MN 55415 USA Q 612 827 2222 Choice 5 O dmayou bensonmedical com QOSRMi Consulting LLC PO Box 190 Q Mountain WI 54149 USA O 715 276 2947 Voice or TTY U 715 850 1568 Cell 24 7 O service srmi com lie I Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 67 of 396
220. he log file in the Log File edit box or browse for the file using the Browse button 4 Choose OK IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To restore data from the backed up file 1 In the Control Window choose Restore from the File menu The Restore dialog box appears 2 In the Database Type group box choose File database or SQL database 3 Depending on whether you chose a file or SQL database either enter the file database name in the File mdb edit box or enter the Server and Database names in the Server and Database edit boxes respectively Alternatively you may use the Browse push button s 4 Choose whether to create a log file using the Write log file check box If desired you can change the default location and name of the log file in the Log File edit box or browse for the file using the Browse button 5 Choose OK 186 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 267 of 396 Extract and Merge Extracting Records An Overview PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Extract function is available only if the Database Interface in Setup is set for Storage This function is intended for data transfer and synchronization between two Benson Medical Instruments products The extract function makes a copy of a subset of the database and saves it to a specified file or SQL database You can create the file or database at the time of the Extract or use an existing file If you are using an existing file or database any data that is curr
221. he number must be in the range from 32 to 63 inclusive and must be unique This number is sent to third party hearing conservation databases instead of the language name 6 In the edit boxes enter the paths of the wave files or Browse to find the paths The wave files will always be accessed in the location specified in the edit boxes The files are not copied elsewhere 7 When finished choose OK 8 In the Languages dialog box choose Close Modifying a Language To modify a language for automatic voice instructions 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Languages The Languages dialog box appears 2 Select the language you wish to modify 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Language dialog box appears 4 Make the desired changes 5 Choose OK 6 In the Languages dialog box choose Close 88 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 169 of 396 Languages Deleting a Language To delete a language for automatic voice instructions 1 From the Control Window File menu choose Languages The Languages dialog box appears 2 Select the language you wish to delete 3 Choose the Delete push button 4 Choose Yes to delete the language 5 In the Languages dialog box choose Close 89 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 170 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 171 of 396 Testing Saving and Printing with STORAGE Performing an Audiogram The typical method of pe
222. he operator listens to a sequence of tones that cover both ears all frequencies and most of the dynamic range of the audiometer Simultaneous functional checks may be done on more than one audiometer if additional listeners are available In the Functional Check dialog box the Enable 8000 Hz check box allows you to include 8000 Hz tones in the functional check The check will include 8000 Hz if this check box is selected Clearing this check box disables checking 8000 Hz You can set the audiometer software to prohibit testing if a functional check has not been performed on that day using the Test Configuration feature See Prohibit Audiogram without Functional Check To see the Functional Check dialog box 1 From the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Functional Check PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If a functional check was completed on the same date as a daily calibration check the Functional Check check box will be selected in the daily calibration audiogram dialog box for that audiogram even if the functional check was performed after the daily calibration check Functional Check Sequence The functional check presents tones in the selected audiometer booth Tones are presented with a one second interval between presentations The functional check has the following sequence of tone presentations Ear Frequency Intensity Hz dB LeR 500 60 Left 1000 60 Left 2000 60 Le
223. hone protective shrouds modems weatherproof cases with batteries and connections for computers solar power systems tripods of various sizes and tilt down poles for permanent noise monitoring Building Acoustics The SRC20 Noise Source is a battery powered Digital Signal Generator that is ideal for building acoustics and electroacoustics testing providing sine swept sine pink and white noise signals Data Navigation and Analysis Software DNA 824 software provides oM 9 communication with remote instruments extensive PO t analysis and top notch cmm presentation features Linked cursors live spectrograms and event capture are all Lt available Drag and drop 824 data onto report templates customized with your logo x and other information Perform instantaneous automatic capture of wav files an ideal way of annotating graphical data with an actual sound clip of the noise event Data can also be streamed to a PC s hard disk for long term unattended measurements DNA is loaded with analysis tools for building acoustics sound power environmental noise measurement noise mapping etc After using DNA you will agree that it is the single most powerful software available for any sound level meter 824 Utility Free powerful software for the 824 Exceedance History Create store and upload instrument setups Download D measurement files and view Minimum Duration
224. hoose Save Print Test from the Audiometer menu The Save Print Test dialog box appears 2 Enter the subject in the Save Print Test dialog box 3 In the Current tab select the OSHA STS Baseline and the OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline check box es as appropriate If you have enabled Automatic Baseline Revision for this company you will not be able to make changes to these check boxes they will be gray See Automatic Baseline Revision for more information Plus Package only 4 Choose the Save button 5 In the Save Print Test dialog box press the Save button This audiogram is now the new baseline audiogram There is no need to go back to previous baseline audiograms and deselect the check boxes for STS Baseline or Recordable Reportable Shift Baseline To mark a saved audiogram as the new baseline 1 In Storage View select the subject in the Subject List 2 Select the audiogram in the Audiogram List that you wish to mark as the new baseline 3 Double click the audiogram or from the Test menu choose Modify then Audiogram The Modify Audiogram dialog box appears 4 Select the OSHA STS Baseline and or OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline check box es as appropriate If you have enabled Automatic Baseline Revision for this company you will not be able to make changes to these check boxes they will be gray See Automatic Baseline Revision for more information Plus Package only 5 Choose OK This audiogram is now the new
225. hoose the Set Medical Referral Responses to No push button 5 Enter the examiner s response to the remaining two statements 6 In the Medical History Page 1 tab and Page 2 tab enter the subject s responses to the user defined questions 7 Atthe bottom of the Add History dialog box enter a comment in the Comment edit box if desired Enter the examiner in the Examiner edit box or look up the examiner by choosing the Examiner push button For information on how to use look up boxes see Look up Boxes 9 When finished choose OK oo Modifying a History PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To make changes to a history 1 In Subject View in the Control Window select the subject whose history you wish to modify 2 Select the Histories tab 3 In the Histories page select the history to be modified 4 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Modify then History The Modify History dialog box appears 5 Make changes as desired 128 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 209 of 396 Audiograms and Histories 6 When finished choose OK Deleting a History PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To delete a history 1 In the Control Window select the Histories tab 2 In the Histories tab select the history to be deleted 3 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Delete then History The Delete History dialog box appears 4 Choose Yes to delete the history To delete all histories for the current subject 1 F
226. iated user defined noise events As with all Larson Davis products this equipment is complemented with toll free oa applications assistance 24 hour customer service and is backed by a no risk policy Vase ave 2020 that guarantees satisfaction or your money refunded Larson Davis A PCB PIEZOTRONICS DIV Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 369 of 396 c High Speed Real time Frequency Analysis RTA Provides acquisition of 1 1 or 1 3 octave spectra at rates up RT69 9 to 400 sec Use advanced y 100 triggering to initiate 1 acquisition based on ud z exceedance of a threshold 8 0900 sound level or for room acoustics based on impulse excitation or decay of broadband sound in a room Automatically capture and average decay spectra for multiple measurement sequences Use with DNA software to calculate RT 60 using Schroeder backwards integration and to determine building acoustics parameters such as transmission loss and impact isolation according to ISO and ASTM standards Easily determine speech interference level SIL and RC NCB and HTL room criteria as defined by ANSI S12 2 1995 from single or averaged spectra Fast Fourier Analyzer FFT When greater frequency FF D T re determination is required this feature offers 400 line FFT analysis with upper frequency DEI uUg 1 eorr doen bands adjustable from 200 Hz 598 8 to 20 kHz With selectable i Hz
227. ical PRY amu Training Course uu a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibratio III Installation Procedures Example of an under Jack Panel Installation The Jack Panel Box was removed the cable routed next to it and then reinstalled Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Version2 0 All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 18 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Version2 0 Audiometer Technical Training Course CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures EN oc Install the Sola Power Conditioner and TripLite Surge Protector Power Strip and dress cords as needed Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration lll Installation Procedures BN ace I Install to the computer the USB Computer Interface Cable USB CIC and attach the USB CIC to serial cable from Test Booth Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Ill Installation Procedures This concludes the CCA 200mini Hardware Installation Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 19 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Ill Assembly Disassembly Procedures ENT see The CCA 200mini is a solid state instrum
228. ift or Reportable Shift If age correction has not been selected for the company no age correction will be used in the calculations The column headings and abbreviations used are explained in the table below For information on the Sound Level Meter Columns see Sound Level Meter Columns Column Heading or Explanation Abbreviation L STS Shift shift between this audiogram and the STS Baseline L STS Analysis explanation of the L STS Shift L Rec Shift shift between this audiogram and the Recordable Baseline L Rec Analysis explanation of the L Recordable Shift L Rep Shift shift between this audiogram and the Reportable Baseline L Rep Analysis explanation of the L Reportable Shift STS Baseline X indicates that this audiogram is the STS Baseline L STS Baseline X indicates that this audiogram is the STS Baseline for the left ear R STS Baseline X indicates that this audiogram is the STS Baseline for the right ear Recordable Baseline X indicates that this audiogram is the Recordable Baseline 131 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 212 of 396 L Recordable Baseline R Recordable Baseline Reportable Baseline L Reportable Baseline R Reportable Baseline Plus Package only Analysis X indicates that this audiogram is the Recordable Baseline for the left ear X indicates that this audiogram is the Recordable Baseline for the right ear X indicates that this audiogram is
229. ify Subject dialog box appears 3 In the Modify Subject dialog box choose the Company push button 4 Inthe Company dialog box select the company you wish to move the subject to 5 Choose OK 6 Inthe Modify Subject dialog box choose OK 117 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 198 of 396 Subjects Combining Two Subjects in Different Companies PLUS PACKAGE ONLY These instructions are for situations in which you wish to move a subject to a different company but a subject with the same Subject ID exists in the destination company If no one in the destination company has that Subject ID refer to the instructions in the section above You have two options concerning the demographic fields For the purposes of explanation the subject who is being moved is called the currently displayed subject and the subject in the destination company is called the existing subject Either the demographic data of the existing subject will be overwritten by the demographic data of the currently displayed subject or the demographic data of the existing subject will be kept Either way the currently displayed subject and associated data will no longer be in the original company The audiograms and histories of the two subjects will be merged See the procedures below for the two different situations If two audiograms or histories with the same date and time exist the transferred audiogram or history will overwrite the corresponding reco
230. ily calibrations 76 with DOHRS HC 218 with FOSHM a eoe epe rper eet 218 with HearTrak DOS 219 with Medgate ssssse 219 with OBI ne secedere ei ted 220 with Storage sesssseseese 88 witth SYStOC ccccceesseceesseeeeens 220 Scale of Hearing Impairment 126 screen updating sss 42 SE abbreviation for Subject Error NT MN MEME 65 Search All Companies check box Les apna eto ter vane sapete O 110 SEEN pause o HER ads 99 audiograms essere 99 companies cseeeseeeeeennn 102 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Iustobles 2 4ostesrebd da ws e 99 Information Tabs 60 Storage pane sss 97 work of other users 42 Select SOLIS aea diei eret 155 separate left right baselines 103 check BOX a oed spe cro ries 103 Server combo box 13 Mee eto d e de ON RN yl 47 SDOECUTS coord Pe 54 Significant Threshold Shift 225 simulator so oii ted 21 75 Social Security Number 103 112 and Subject ID ss 103 assigning a subject using 87 finding a subject using 112 Sound Level Graph 221 Sound Level Meter 221 annual calibration 222 223 COMMIS aree PER REPERTA 132 configuring ssssssseeeee 34 displ
231. information The Log File edit box is for the location and name of the log file You can change the location and name from the default ones if you wish or browse for the file using the Browse button Backing Up Records IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To back up data 1 In the Control Window choose Backup from the File menu The Backup dialog box appears 2 In the File mdb edit box enter the name of the file database to which you are backing up data or choose the Browse push button to find the file 3 Choose whether to create a log file using the Write log file check box If desired you can change the default location and name of the log file in the Log File edit box or browse for the file using the Browse button 4 Choose OK IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To back up data 1 Inthe Control Window choose Backup from the File menu The Backup dialog box appears 2 In the Database Type group box choose File database or SQL database If you plan to use the default option s skip to step 4 3 Depending on whether you chose a file or SQL database either enter the file database name in the File mdb edit box or enter the Server and Database names in the Server and Database edit boxes respectively Alternatively you may use the Browse push button s 4 Choose whether to create a log file using the Write log file check box If desired you can change the default location and name of the log file in
232. ing the Bio Acoustic Simulator Sound Level Meter with the CCA 200 28 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 109 of 396 BAS 200slm and SLM 200 Installation Key to Numbers in Diagram Headset Cable Simulator Interconnect Cable CCA 200 Audiometer Computer Interface Cable Power Supply Power Cord Serial Cable Response Switch NO O00 1 Dn FW NO Microphone 10 BAS 200slIm Bio Acoustic Simulator Sound Level Meter Installing the BAS 200slm with the CCA 200mini To install the BAS 200slm Bio Acoustic Simulator Sound Level Meter with the CCA 200mini refer to the diagram and key to diagram numbers below The installation shown does not use the wall mounting bracket For instructions on installation using the bracket see Bracket for BAS 200 or BAS 200slm with CCA 200mini below Up to sixteen instruments total may be controlled from a single computer To install the BAS 200slm with the CCA 200mini audiometer 1 Unplug the audiometer power supply cord from the wall outlet 2 Connect the supplied serial cable between the COMPUTER port of the Simulator Sound Level Meter and the EXPANSION port of the audiometer 3 Connect the supplied interconnect cable between the RESPONSE jack of the audiometer and the AUDIOMETER jack of the simulator sound level meter For daily calibration checks the response switch should not be connected to the Simulator Sound Level Meter For subject testing the response switch i
233. ing the Medical History Page 2 tab 8 When finished with the Add History dialog box choose Cancel Entering Responses to History Questions PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The responses to the AAO Medical Referral Criteria questions must be chosen either by pressing the question push button and selecting from the list in the look up dialog box or by selecting the Set AAO Medical Referral Responses to No push button Responses to these questions should be chosen from the list because these 126 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 207 of 396 Audiograms and Histories data fields have been designed as Lock to List data fields These data fields can be filled only if one selects from the choices in the field s look up dialog box For user defined questions you have the option of setting up the data fields as Lock to List fields using the Data Validation feature See Data Validation for User Defined Fields Or you can create default responses to these fields See the following section To enter a response to an AAO Medical Referral Criteria question 1 Choose the push button for the question The look up dialog box for this data field appears 2 Select the desired answer from the list box 3 Choose OK To enter a response to a user defined History question on Medical History Page 1 or Medical History Page 2 1 Follow the instructions for responses to AAO Medical Referral Criteria questions above or 1 Type th
234. ion 68 without daily calibration check 68 without functional check 68 without Sound Level Meter Calibration eee cece cess ee ees 67 PT abbreviation for Presentation EAC OWL GV ose o 65 pulse toties em rere 58 64 selecting at testing time 58 selecting in Test Configuration 64 269 Page 350 of 396 R Refresh menu item 47 R Rec Shift dcs ptud 125 Regulation combo box 103 R Recordable Analysis 125 Reject Audiogram check box 117 R Recordable Baseline 125 a EE tiet tete 125 cea cadet suka ahaa ee bna fuut 130 K Reportable Anahe 125 Rep SII n ais setteototetelgteatis 125 R Reportable Baseline 125 Benes ed Rec OPIRE my R STS Analysis 125 Raped et RED Ona Ie atthe Io R STS Baseline 125 Repealed STS aa ee R STS Shifters secco sR ae s R abbrev for OSHA Recordable Reportable Hearing Loss 131 Shift Baseline c cc0c 66 146 LEP OVS Lei ter de metae 145 real time formatting 211 audiogram reports 89 145 146 Rec Shift 125 daily calibration 78 Multiple Ri Prnt i uie Recordable Baseline 125 sgn d as HG oe dota 3 65 Recordable STS PENO S l and subject errors 65 Recordable STS Lined Out 130 installing 32 008 oe see ei Sees 3 LOC
235. ion PUSH BUTTONS Options The Options push button selects Daily Calibration Save Print Options See Daily Calibration Save Print Options Update Reference Do Not Have Plus Package The Update Reference push button stores this daily calibration check as the reference audiogram 81 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 162 of 396 Daily Calibration Check Save Plus Package Only The Save push button stores this daily calibration check in Daily Calibration Storage If Print on Save is selected in Daily Calibration Save Print Options the daily calibration report will be printed when the Save push button is selected Print The Print push button prints the daily calibration report that is currently selected in the Daily Calibration Save Print Options dialog box See Daily Calibration Save Print Options for more information To see the Save Print Daily Calibration dialog box 1 From the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration then Save Print from the submenu Printing a Daily Calibration Report The daily calibration report that prints is set in the Daily Calibration Options dialog box Other options include Print on Save and Print to Screen See Daily Calibration Save Print Options for more information To print a daily calibration audiogram 1 From the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration then Save Print from the submenu The Save Print D
236. ion mandatory section parameters are positional 1 Group OR Grouping o 1 AND row with previous row default value o 0 OR with previous row any number of rows can be grouped together 2 TableName SQL table name name is validated against database 178 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 259 of 396 SQL Syntax Functions o No Default 3 FieldName SQL field name name is validated against fields in database table o No Default 4 Prompt field prompt name to display in selection criteria dialog there are several special codes o Default is Field Name o USRDEFn uses prompt from UDFld Prompt based on the current company If there is no UDFld Prompt value the user define is not displayed Reads values from UD table to automatically populate combo box o SUBJECTID uses prompt from company table 5 VarNamel variable name assigned to first control names and values are written to ini in form o RPTVARNAMEnn VarNamel o RPTVARnn control 1 value o Default is 6 VarName 2 variable name assigned to second control o Default is 7 VarName3 variable name assigned to third control o Default is A Attributes Section optional section must precede section F parameters can be in any order 8 Type type of field o Defaults to field type from database o CHAR any alpha numeric character o DATE mnydd yyyy o NUMBER NUM or NBR any numeric character o LANG language
237. is audiometer Following a Clear command the contents of this check box are determined by the current Test Configuration STS The audiometer s information tab indicates whether the subject has experienced an STS for the current audiogram For the definition of STS see the sections beginning with Standard Threshold Shift STS The method used for determining STS is determined by what has been selected for the STS Method combo box in the Test Configuration dialog box STS is indicated by two check boxes and two edit boxes one each for left and right ears If the STS L check box is checked the subject has experienced an STS in the left ear relative to the baseline audiogram Similarly if the STS R check box is checked the subject has experienced an STS in the right ear The edit boxes to the right of the STS L and STS R labels contain the average difference between thresholds at 2k 3k and 4kHz for the current audiogram and baseline audiogram for the left and right ears respectively A positive value in this field indicates hearing loss at these frequencies A negative value in this field indicates that hearing has improved for these frequencies relative to the baseline audiogram The information tabs will indicate STS only if a valid baseline audiogram is available Instruction Language Allows a different instruction language for an individual booth Following a Clear command this control is reset to the language specified in
238. is set to Storage see Audiometer Setup the Control Window will normally appear as a split screen with two panes The left pane shows Database View while the right pane shows Audiometer View To adjust the width of the panes 1 Position the mouse on the boundary line between the two panes The mouse cursor will change to a resizing cursor 2 Drag the boundary line to the desired place The panes will be resized accordingly 3 Move the mouse away from the boundary line The mouse cursor will revert to the select cursor To move downward or upward in the left pane Drag the vertical scroll bar downward or upward To move right or left in the left pane Drag the horizontal scroll bar to the right or left j One of the panes may be at zero width and not be apparent The directions below are for restoring the left pane but the same concepts apply to restoring the right pane To make the left pane appear Position the mouse on the vertical line at the left of the Control Window The mouse cursor will change to a resizing cursor 2 Drag the line to the right The left pane will appear 3 Position the line for the desired pane width 4 Move the mouse away from the boundary line The mouse cursor will revert to the select cursor Database View Ifthe Database Interface in Audiometer Setup is set to Storage the Control Window is shown as a split screen with Database View in the left pane Databa
239. itions gt If your import format contains one or more delimited fields there must be a delimiting character or characters for each of these fields Each record must contain a Subject ID that conforms to the Subject ID format that is currently chosen for the company gt In a given company no two subjects should have the same Subject ID or each subsequent subject record with the same Subject ID will overwrite the previous one gt In a given company no two tests for the same subject may have the same date and time or the previous will be overwritten as above A test must have a time If it does not have a time it will not be imported The ASCII fields defined in the format will overwrite the corresponding database fields Therefore when preparing to import data include field definitions in your import format only for the fields that you want to overwrite You can import only into the current company While importation is in progress the database checks certain types of imported data for validity You have two options for handling data validation errors on import see Validation of Imported Data Before importing records into the database it is good practice to back up your data files If the file you are importing from is corrupted or an accidental interruption of the computer occurs the data files may be harmed IMPORT DIALOG BOX In the Import dialog box the File edit box is for the name ofthe file to be imported Th
240. iven ear freq immediately To manually re test D Click the Manual button If controlling multiple a subject audiometers click on the audiometer number Press F9 If controlling multiple audiometers type the number of the audiometer Position the mouse over the frequency to be retested and click The display will turn inverse white characters on black background Type alt A followed by K which chooses Mark from the Audiometer menu If controlling multiple audiometers click on the audiometer number or All Enabled Audiometers button to retest all audiometers Type L for left ear or R for right ear Type the first numeral of the frequency to retest e g 6 for 6kHz Position the mouse over the frequency to be retested and click The display will turn inverse Stop the test and re start using the procedures above Type alt A followed by K which chooses Mark from the Audiometer menu If controlling multiple audiometers click on the audiometer number or All Enabled Audiometers button to retest all audiometers Type L for left ear or R for right ear Type the first numeral of the frequency to retest e g 6 for 6kHz Stop the test and re start using the procedures above To use the talk over microphone Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Click the Microphone On button If controlling multiple audiometers click on the audiometer number or All Enabled Audiometers button to talk to all audiometers
241. kers and the computer interface cable to the output of the PC audio Both the alarms and the start and error instructions will be played over the powered speakers but the test subject will hear only the start and error instructions Ifthe Enable Annual Calibration Warning check box is checked a warning will be displayed if the annual calibration of any audiometer is due in a given number of days The number of days is shown in the Days Before Annual Calibration Warning edit box Clearing this check box disables the warning For information on setting the warning message see Annual Calibration Warning 14 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 95 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup If the Enable Sound Level Meter Annual Calibration Warning check box is checked a warning will be displayed if the annual calibration of any Sound Level Meter is due in a given number of days The number of days is shown in the Days Before Sound Level Meter Annual Calibration Warning edit box For information on setting the warning message see Sound Level Meter Calibration Warning The Test Complete Alarm combo box allows you to choose the desired volume of the alarm that sounds when the test is complete Valid selections are Short Medium Long Continuous and Off to disable the alarm The Error Alarm combo box allows you to choose the desired volume of the alarm that sounds when an error occurs during testing Valid selections are Short Medium Long
242. l Match case 7 Type a single space in the Find what edit box making sure to type nothing in the Replace with edit box 8 Click Replace All This action has the effect of removing all spaces from the exported file 9 When the operation is complete click Cancel to close the Replace dialog box 10 Choose Save from the File menu 11 Choose Exit from the File menu The resuting file may now be imported into Systoc NOTES The following notes have been taken from import documentation provided to Benson Medical Instruments by Occupational Health Research and are reprinted as a service to the user Contact Occupational Health Research with any questions regarding these notes 1 Audiometer equipment records must be complete in Systoc prior to the start of the import 2 All records being imported must have an exam date that is later than the date of any record for the same person that already exists or that has already been added within the same import file Failure to adhere to this rule will cause baseline issues in Systoc 3 You may not import two audio records for the same date or import an audio record for the same date as one that already exists This will cause baseline errors 4 You may not import records that are older than existing records for a given Employee ID This will cause multiple records to be marked as baselines Custom Formats PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If the standard formats do not meet your needs yo
243. l meter should indicate a corresponding 10 dB decrease D This measurement may be made electrically with a voltmeter connected to the earphone terminals 3 Tolerances When any of the measured sound levels deviate from the levels in Table E 1 or Table E 2 by or 3 dB at any test frequency between 500 and 3000 Hz 4 dB at 4000 Hz or 5 dB at 6000 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 359 of 396 Acoustic calibration of audiometers 1910 95 App E Page 2 of 2 Hz an exhaustive calibration 1s advised An exhaustive calibration is required if the deviations are greater than 15 dB or greater at any test frequency TABLE E 1 REFERENCE THRESHOLD LEVELS FOR TELEPHONICS TDH 39 EARPHONES Reference threshold Sound level for level Frequency Hz TDH 39 meter earphones reading dB dB BOG MCCC 11 5 81 5 LOGO 5 Lotte tet ore Nestor Poca sere ree uS 7 77 2000 oia weiss desea E Ses Si EEE See a EE 9 79 09 Mr Oc EE 10 80 AOOO iiis ole e eric nn teh meno e en y Nie dee 9 5 19 5 301010 MEN tei ayia CI Ip P 15 5 85 5 TABLE E 2 REFERENCE THRESHOLD LEVELS FOR TELEPHONICS TDH 49 EARPHONES Reference threshold Sound level for level Frequency Hz TDH 49 meter arphones reading dB dB BOO leessece c men ee Renee Ro ume vg ones 13 5 83 5 LOOO soot uet ek averte over yey SOR TR Ee UE 7 5 71 5 ZO OO code epereevewmeXueteyee gees Goce
244. lation of Bracket on Wall The instructions diagram and key to diagram numbers below describe how to install the bracket on the wall To install the wall mounting bracket on the wall 1 Position the bracket with the mounting plate inside it at the desired position on the wall 2 Using the supplied screws screw the bracket and mounting place into place Installation of Bracket Key to Numbers in Diagram 1 Bracket 2 Mounting Plate 35 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 116 of 396 Bracket 3 7 Screws Installation of Audiometer in Bracket The instructions diagram and key to diagram numbers below describe how to install the CCA 200mini audiometer into the bracket To install the audiometer into the bracket 1 Position the audiometer above the bracket as shown 2 Slide the audiometer into place in the mounting plate until the tab locks in place on coe e e X Installation of Audiometer in Bracket Key to Numbers in Diagram 1 Bracket 2 CCA 200mini Audiometer Installation of BAS 200 or BAS 200slm in Bracket The instructions diagram and key to diagram numbers below describe how to install the BAS 200 or BAS 200slm into the bracket To install the BAS 200 or BAS 200slm into the bracket 1 Insert the feet of the BAS 200 or BAS 200slm into the four large openings on the front of the bracket 2 Slide the instrument downward until it is firmly in place 36 Copyright 2
245. ld 1 Choose the push button for the data field The field s look up dialog box appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Press the Format push button The Real Time Format dialog box appears 4 Un select the Disable Real Time Format check box 5 Select the radio button for the correct format and choose OK 6 In the data field s dialog box choose OK Data Validation for User Defined Fields The data in most data fields can be validated each time the OK push button is chosen in the dialog box Ifa field contains invalid data a message box appears warning that the field is invalid You can 225 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 306 of 396 User Defined Fields choose to validate data by format by legal characters or by ensuring that an entry matches a list item give each data field custom validation To see the Data Validation dialog box 1 Choose the push button for the data field The field s look up dialog box appears 2 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 3 Press the Validation push button The Data Validation dialog box appears Format Validation With format validation the software validates data by verifying that a field conforms to a particular format such as date or Social Security number The available formats are described in the table below See also the following sections Lock to List Validation and Legal Character Validation
246. le 11 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 92 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup 7 Power Supply 8 Power Cord Wall Mounting The audiometer may be mounted to a wall or surface inside the test booth using the optional booth mounting plate To use the booth mounting plate 1 Attach the booth mounting plate to the sound booth with screws through the four screw holes 2 Slide the audiometer onto the mounting plate The bottom bracket of the audiometer slides onto the plate When the audiometer is slid on fully the locking tab will click Initial Administrator Log In and Setup The first time the audiometer software is run the only user and password set up are those of the Administrator i e system administrator The default password for the Administrator is null 1 e nothing should be entered After the initial log in by the Administrator users and passwords can be set up so that operation of the audiometer will be password protected For information on setting up other users see User Names and User Passwords IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE The first time you run the audiometer software The Welcome dialog box appears The user name is already entered as Administrator 1 Leaving the Password edit box blank choose OK or press the lt Enter gt key The audiometer display appears 2 Choose Passwords from the File menu The Passwords dialog box appears The Administrator is already selec
247. lidation sss 188 error log 43 subject errors 64 65 211 exhaustive 2 year calibration 235 exporting records 188 export only fields 202 formats TOL Waar sesers 194 functions performed 189 OVEIVIEW c cohors baden t 188 procedure sesssesessese 189 Extract Merge record groups 179 extracting records 175 configurations csssseeee 176 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Extract Merge record groups 179 OVERVIEW sts sntasicadurd wis be Mei vi sut 175 procedutex i s edt eds 175 F fields in import export formats 198 addingzucsseiciueeenmtie 204 bitmapped field 201 deleting eee eed 205 export only fields 202 mapping fields sss 199 modifying erh Tia 205 sizes of ASCII and database fields200 fields in the database 189 bitmapped field 201 Oe Ft DODSusse sinodo la poteet 189 mapping fields sss 199 size in relation to size of ASCII fields dp T Maas at eo iau 200 user defined fields oett 209 fields user defined 209 default entry for ssee 210 format validation for 211 look up boxes for 209 prompt for seeeeeeenee 210 real time formatting
248. ll be truncated unless appropriate format strings have been supplied to handle the difference Export Unless appropriate format strings have been supplied to handle the difference if the database field is larger than the ASCII field all extra characters of the database field will be truncated if the database field is smaller the rest of the ASCII field will be space filled The Format edit boxes in the ASCII Field group box and the Database Field group box are for use when the characters of a field need to be rearranged The maximum length of either string is 20 characters For more information see Re formatting a Field The Database Field group box contains the Import Default check box If this box is checked the field will only be used when importing Use this check box to add a static value to the selected database field 211 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 292 of 396 Import and Export The Field combo box shows the table and field names as well as the choice of None You would choose None if you were importing only terminating characters for example The Database Field group box contains options for handling leading and trailing spaces see Leading and Trailing Spaces for more information The Fill check box sets either leading or trailing spaces to be filled with the specified character Choose either the Leading or the Trailing radio button and enter the character in the edit box The Field M
249. ll print for any subjects who have a name in the given range If you choose All Subjects all subjects with all their audiograms will appear on the report If you choose Test Date Range the report will print all audiograms for all subjects with an audiogram in that date range HC Program stands for Hearing Conservation Program PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If you choose History Date Range the report will print all histories for all subjects with a history in that date range Report Selection Criteria The Report Selection Criteria feature enables you to specify a large number of variables in your search for the data that you need on the currently selected report The Report Record Selection dialog box is described in this section current subject current subject means the subject that is currently selected The name of the subject does not actually appear to The word to to the left of an edit box indicates that records with a value up to and including the value entered in that edit box will be included in the report For example if 12 13 1978 is entered in the edit box preceded by to in the Birth Date row the report will include all subjects with birth dates before or on this date The word to at the right of an edit box indicates that records with a value equal to and greater than the value entered in that edit box will be included in the report For example if 11 20 1950 is entered in the edit box that pre
250. log box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 151 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 232 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage 2 Choose the Print push button The Print Daily Calibration Report dialog box appears Printing a Daily Calibration Report PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To print a daily calibration audiogram 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 In the Audiometers list box choose the audiometer for which you are printing a daily calibration report 3 In the Audiograms list box choose the audiogram that you wish to print A Choose the Print push button The Print Daily Calibration Report dialog box appears Choose the desired report in the Report Template list box Choose the Select Sort in the Report Select Sort list box Select the Print to Screen check box if you wish to print to screen Select the number of copies using the Copies control NO ANH tA Choose the Print push button 152 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 233 of 396 Reports Reports The following sections describe the report templates and features that are available The reports are listed in alphabetical order You can sort the data for reports in various ways using the Select Sort feature with options such as Test Date Range and Subject Range and with t
251. log box appears 8 Choose OK The Report Options dialog box appears The new report will appear in the Template list box You may have to scroll down to see it in the list 9 When finished with the Report Options dialog box choose Close Modifying a Report Template PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To modify a report template 1 Choose Options from the Reports menu in the Control Window The Report Options dialog box appears 2 Select the report you wish to modify in the Templates list box 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Template dialog box appears 4 Choose the Export Report File push button The Select Report File dialog box appears 172 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 253 of 396 Report Options 5 Browse to a file and select the file The file name and extension will appear in the File name edit box 6 Choose Open The file that you browsed to will be overwritten by the report that you chose in the Report Options dialog box You now have a copy of the report that you chose 7 Make changes to the report file using Crystal Reports 8 In the Modify Template dialog box choose the Import Report File push button If the report that you originally chose to make a copy of was a factory defined one this push button will not appear in this dialog box Follow the instructions for Adding a Report Template instead The Select Report File dialog box appears 9 Browse to the report file and select it 10 Cho
252. log box shows available databases At publication time interfaces for HearTrak Windows HearTrak DOS Hawkwa Group OHM Unique Software Solutions Medgate FOSHM Systoc and DOHRS HC U S Department of Defense were included Contact your dealer for the latest information concerning interfaces to other third party software 15 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 96 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup For information on communication between your audiometer and a database see the sections beginning with Data Transfer If you have the Plus Package and are not planning to use a third party database choose Storage as your Database Interface The Plus Package is an optional integrated extension of the audiometer software see Storage Plus Package Features for more information Storage is included with the audiometer software For an overview of sections on Storage see the STORAGE PLUS PACKAGE section in the Table of Contents the first section there is Storage Plus Package For typical testing and saving procedures with Storage see the sections beginning with Performing an Audiogram To see the Setup dialog box 1 From the Audiometer menu choose Setup Setting Up the Audiometer The first time you run the audiometer software the serial numbers and serial port connection of the audiometer s and sound level meter s if applicable are automatically detected To see the serial numbers and serial port c
253. lue that represents display value e g Yes may represent a 1 on the database defaults to DispVall N Keywords for Values 1 TODAY today s date today current date does not actually show the date current subject current subject does not actually show the subject id 2 3 4 current company current company does not actually show the company id 5 blank values match records with blank values for FieldName 6 nonblank values match records with nonblank values for FieldName Notes 1 Only the Main Section is required 2 Parameter delimiters space comma horizontal tab LF or CR 3 Maximum of 20 selection criteria rows 4 One conditional clause is allowed Clause starting delimiter CS clause ending delimiter CE A clause is automatically removed if there are no values for any of the ASKEXs within the clause 5 ASK is fully functional Queries can span entire database Blank lines are automatically deleted from generated SQL to make it more readable 8 Upper and lower case does not matter except for special Prompt values 181 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 262 of 396 SQL Syntax Functions 9 Count Records button only works if SQL starts with select 10 Combo boxes are limited to 500 entries SQL LIKE The LIKE command is used to specify a search for a pattern Use a 96 sign to define wildcards both before and after the pattern For instance if you are queryi
254. ly Calibration from the Audiometer menu then Configuration from the submenu The Daily Calibration Configuration List dialog box appears 2 Select the desired test and choose the Modify push button The Daily Calibration Configuration dialog box appears 3 Choose the desired settings and choose OK 79 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 160 of 396 Daily Calibration Check Daily Calibration Check using the Bio Acoustic Simulator Using the Bio Acoustic Simulator with the audiometer software will help satisfy the requirement for daily biologic calibration checks in compliance with OSHA or MSHA guidelines Perform this procedure at the start of each day s test session To perform daily calibration using the Bio Acoustic Simulator 1 Set up the simulator s Configure the system as described in the sections beginning with Daily Calibration Check using the Bio Acoustic Simulator Remove the response cord from the simulator jack and place the headphones on the simulator Extend the headband as necessary so that the ear cushions are centered 2 In the Control Window choose Set from the Daily Calibration submenu in the Audiometer menu Choosing Set sets the Daily Calibration indicator in the information tab and causes the Daily Calibration Configuration to be used for testing The audiometer s is are now ready for daily calibration 3 Begin the automatic testing by pressing the Start button As above if y
255. m Modify Audiogram dialog box On the other hand if you have selected Automatic Baseline Revision for a company you cannot change these baseline check boxes Refer Subject data field Refer Subject is a data field in the Add Audiogram and Modify Audiogram dialog boxes If the Refer Subject edit box contains the response Yes and if this is the most recent audiogram there will automatically be a medical referral on reports that indicate medical referral If this audiogram is not the most recent audiogram a response of Yes for this question will have no bearing on a possible medical referral For more information see Medical Referral Reject Audiogram check box If the Reject Audiogram check box in the Add Audiogram Modify Audiogram dialog box is checked this audiogram will not be taken into account by the database in STS calculation or other calculations If the database is calculating baseline revision which is available with the Plus Package only an audiogram will not be used if this check box is selected This check box gives the user the discretion to override the criteria used by the database in STS and other calculations For such calculations the database uses criteria determined by the National Hearing Conservation Association in 2000 The National Hearing Conservation Association advises that only a professional reviewer audiologist or physician may override the NHCA criteria 121 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting
256. mber from baseline at 2k 3k 4 Left STS AnalysisTests gt 5 Number LfSTSAnalCode Left Recordable Shift Tests gt LfRecShift Left Recordable Analysis Tests gt Number C j c i C aja i ajaja Z Cc Left Original Baseline Average Tests gt Number for 500 1k 2k 3k LfOrgBaseAvg5123 Left Original Baseline Average Tests gt 5 Number for 500 1k 2k LfOrgBaseAvg512 205 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 286 of 396 Import and Export Left Original Baseline Average Tests gt Number for 3k 4k 6k LfOrgBaseAvg346 Left Ear is Better or Worse than Tests gt 5 Number the baseline at 2k 3k 4k LfBetterWorseCode from baseline at 2k 3k 4 RtSTSAnalCode 3 i 5 5 Right Recordable Shift Tests gt RtRecShift N N N Right Recordable Analysis Tests gt Number RtRecAnalCode Right Original Baseline Average Tests gt 5 Number for 500 1k 2k 3K RtOrgBaseAvg5123 N N N Right Original Baseline Average Tests gt for 500 1k 2KIRtOrgBaseAvg512 Right Original Baseline Average Tests gt 5 umber for 3k 4k 6kIRtOrgBaseAvg346 Right Ear is Better or Worse than Tests gt 5 umber the baseline at 2k 3k 4kiIRtBetterWorseCode Was a retest done Tests gt RetestDone 1 Number 0 No 1 Yes Is this test a retest Tests gt IsRetest Number 0 No this test is not a retest 1 Yes this test is a retest The numters
257. meter in the Serial Number edit box 4 Enter the audiometer model in the Model edit box 5 If you wish to enter a comment select the Comment push button 6 When finished choose OK 7 When finished with the Daily Calibration dialog box choose Close Modifying an Audiometer PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To modify an audiometer for daily calibration storage 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 In the Audiometers list box select the audiometer that you wish to modify 144 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 225 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage 3 Select the Modify push button at the right of the Audiometers list box The Modify Audiometer dialog box appears 4 Make the desired changes 5 When finished choose OK 6 When finished with the Daily Calibration dialog box choose Close Deleting an Audiometer PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If an audiometer in Daily Calibration Storage is deleted all the daily calibrations associated with that audiometer will also be deleted You will not be able to undo a delete operation To delete an audiometer for daily calibration storage 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 In the Audiometers list box select the audiometer that you wish to delete 3 Select the Delete push button at the right of the Audiometers list box The Delete Au
258. ms from the Control Panel 2 Click the Install push button Windows will find the install program and display the command line 3 Follow the instructions on your screen to complete the installation The installation will ask which database interface to select If unsure choose the default you can choose a Database Interface later during initial program setup Uninstalling the Software If you wish to uninstall the Benson Medical Instruments software and other possibly related components you must uninstall all of the following items using the Add or Remove Programs applet the Benson Medical Instruments software you currently use such as CCA 200 or Solo the Microsoft SQL Server 2005 instance with the following name BMIMSDESERVER see further instructions below e Sentinel Protection Installer In order to find the Microsoft SOL Server 2005 instance called BMIMSDESERVER go to the Add or Remove Programs applet and select Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Click Remove and a wizard will appear enabling you to select the instance called BMIMSDESERVER and remove it Starting the Software Start the audiometer software under Programs in the Windows Start menu or double click the icon on the desktop By default there is no password for the administrator therefore leave the password edit box blank and choose OK to enter the program Plug and Play Installation For the CCA 200mini To install the audiometer automatically 1 Wi
259. n Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Daily Calibration 1 Click Audiometer 2 Select Daily Calibration 3 Configuration Bio Acoustic Simulator Test Sequence Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 46 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout x yet Audiometer Technical PR Ta Training Course adf a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 2 Daily Calibration 3 Click Audiometer 4 Select Daily Calibration 5 Configuration s 1 Bio Acoustic Simulator Automatic Retest Audiometer Technical ee ay Training Course a a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Daily Calibration 1 Click Audiometer 2 Select Daily Calibration 3 Configuration ssn me ea 1 Bio Acoustic Simulator 1 Wait Intervals Audiometer Technical Pout Training Course ae a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Daily Calibration Check 1 Procedural Order Daily Calibration Check 1 Daily Calibration 1 Set All Audiometers to Daily Calibration 2 Click Start Icori Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting
260. n numbers only You will not be able to enter any letters in the Subject ID or save any subject with an ID that contains letters If Alphanumeric Only is chosen all Subject IDs may contain letters or numbers or a combination thereof but not any other ASCII characters such as a tilde Please note that if you change the Subject ID format so that some or all of the characters of the current Subject ID s are illegal data may be lost If you try to save a subject by choosing OK in the Add Subject or Modify Subject dialog box with a Subject ID that does not fulfill the requirements of your selected format you will see an error message saying that the subject identification number or Social Security number is illegal You will have to enter a correct Subject ID according to your format in order to save your subject Changing the Subject ID Format PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To change the Subject ID format for a company 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company The Company dialog box appears 2 Select the company for which you wish to change the Subject ID format 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Company dialog box appears 109 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 190 of 396 Companies 4 In the Legal Characters group box select the radio button of the desired legal characters If you choose Social Security Number you will not be able to change the Prompt Maximum Size or Minimum Size
261. nce Test 148 Daily Calibration Reports se 149 Daily Calibration Certificate report sssss 150 Daily Calibration Summary report sssseeses 150 Daily Calibration List report ssseee 151 Print Daily Calibration Report Dialog Box 151 Printing a Daily Calibration Report sssssss 152 Reports 153 REPONS TEENS 153 Baseline Codes in Reports ccccccccccsstssneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 154 Printing a REDON ssccent becortesoustoueasy denscnggcntoustoneseyceetenedencatenes 155 Medical Referral eee e ette icd re etna 155 Report Templates Subject Reports 157 Subject Averages and Impairments sssuussss 157 Subject History Questionnaire Report s 157 Subject Notification Letter sseessessssesseeeeesess 157 Notification Letter Dialog Box 158 Modifying the Notification Letter seeeeeeeseesss 159 Subject History Report e eei ete fosa 159 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC viii Page 77 of 396 Subject Summary seeeeeee S bject Testenia diated te aus Subject Test STS cccccesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeneseees Report Templates Company Reports All Company List esesessssss Company Baseline Revision List
262. nd Database edit boxes 8 Use the check boxes to indicate whether you wish this mapping to be applied to import export or both 9 Choose OK 10 When finished with the Modify Field dialog box choose Close 11 When finished with the Modify Format dialog box choose Close 12 In the Formats dialog box choose Close Adding a Format PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add an import export format From the File menu in the Control Window choose Formats The Formats dialog box appears 2 Choose the Add push button The Add Format dialog box appears 3 Enter the name of the new format in the Name edit box 4 Choose whether the format will be fixed length or variable length A fixed length format can only contain fixed length fields A variable length format may contain both fixed length and delimited fields 5 If you chose to create a fixed length format enter the size of the record in the Record Size edit box This size should include any leading or terminating characters for each record e g a terminating carriage return or line feed 6 If you chose to create a variable length format enter the Record Delimiter and Field Delimiter The Record Delimiter is optional and may be one or two characters The Field Delimiter is required and may be only one character 7 In the Field Definitions group box choose the Add push button The Add Field dialog box appears 8 Enter the desired characteristics of the new field and choos
263. nd Export Import OVerVvIeW a scit aep e Debet but p Validation of Imported Data Importing Data nete tenete Pene gien Export Overview ccccccccssssssesssseeeeeesaeaeaessesees Exporting Data tite ce an t Pes Functions Performed during Import Export Database Field Definitions Formats for Importing and Exporting SYVSlOG EXPTE a aviae preti pipe quat aigna best add Custom Formats ssHH Add Format Dialog Box eeeeeseesss Fields in Import Export Formats Field Map DING cecinit aoro pute e hate ie utn te Bib ri ode Re formatting a Field sseeeseeess ASCII and Database Fields of Different Sizes Bitmapped Field ccccsssssssssseseeeeeseaaaeessseeees Leading and Trailing Spaces Export Only Fields oui ee meets Using Field Mapping eeeeeeeeeeeeese Adding a Format eeeeeesssseeseeeee Modifying a Format eere Deleting a Format re perdete Duplicating a Format eeeseeeeeeeeee Adding a Field aturesit uae Modifying a Field in an Import Export Format Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Table Of Contents Page 79 of 396 Table Of Contents Deleting a Field ccccceeeeeee cece ee eee ee ee eeee nett eenneeeeeeeeeennee
264. nd the current time by default These entries can be changed If the Reference check box is selected this audiogram will be marked as a reference audiogram for calibration checks If a future calibration check is marked as a reference there is no need to open this audiogram and uncheck this box the audiometer software automatically uses the latest reference audiogram The Functional Check check box will already be checked ifa a functional check was performed on the audiometer today Subsequent functional checks on that day will select the check box in all daily calibration checks performed on that day This feature allows you to perform the Functional Check either before or after the daily calibration The Simulator Serial Number edit box is for the serial number of the simulator The Examiner edit box is for the name of the examiner doing the daily calibration check The Comment edit box is for any comments the technician wishes to make Reference Page The Reference page shows the daily calibration reference audiogram Deviation Page The Deviation page shows the absolute value of the reference audiogram minus the current audiogram If no thresholds have shifted by more than 5 dB the audiometer has passed the calibration check The Results box shows whether the audiometer has passed the daily calibration check Sound Level Meter Group Box For information on this group box see Sound Level Meter group box in the Audiograms sect
265. nd their demographic information would be added during the Merge along with their tests 195 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 276 of 396 Extract and Merge It is often useful to choose to merge only a subset of data from a given table The Filter buttons allow you to add a SQL expression that choose the records from each table that will be included in the merge The Filter buttons at right when clicked show a Modify Filter dialog that contains the entire SQL expression for each filter The Check SQL button in the Merge Configurations dialog box will cause the audiometer software to examine the SQL expressions for errors If the SQL expressions contain one or more errors an error message will be displayed that shows the error s found The Check SQL button will also show the dialog boxes that will ask for ranges if the configuration involves ranges Refer to Database Field Definitions for table names and field names and to SOL Syntax Functions for information on the SQL syntax functions that have been included A relational diagram of the Extract Merge record groups can be found in Extract Merge Record Groups A Diagram Adding a Merge Configuration PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add a Merge configuration 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Merge Configurations The Merge Configurations dialog box appears 2 Choose the Add push button The Add Merge Configuration dialog box appears Enter the name
266. need to go back to this audiogram and unselect the check box Annual Not Used PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of Annual Not Used in an Analysis column means that the retest done after the annual audiogram is being used in place of the annual audiogram for STS calculation baseline revision and other evaluations The annual audiogram is kept in the database but is marked in such a way that it is not taken into account in such calculations Better The indication of Better in an Analysis column means that the subject s thresholds at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz have improved at least an average of 3dB but less than an average of 5dB relative to the last audiogram performed First Test The indication of First Test in an Analysis column means that this audiogram currently has the earliest time and date of all audiograms for this subject This indication can change depending on the circumstances for instance if any earlier audiogram for this subject is subsequently imported into the database the designation of First Test will be transferred to that audiogram Improvement PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of Improvement in an Analysis column means that the subject s hearing has shown significant improvement according to the criteria established by the National Hearing Conservation Association in 2000 OSHA does not define 134 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 215 of 396 Analysis significant improvement but provides an exam
267. ner in the Examiner edit box or look up the examiner by choosing the Examiner push button For information on how to use look up boxes see Look up Boxes 6 Enter other information as applicable 7 When finished choose OK Modifying an Audiogram To make changes to an audiogram 1 In the Control Window in Subject View select the subject whose audiogram is to be modified 2 Select the Audiogram tab 3 In the Audiogram page select the audiogram to be modified 4 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Modify then Audiogram The Modify Test dialog box appears 5 Make changes as desired 6 When finished choose OK Deleting an Audiogram To delete an audiogram 1 In the Control Window in Subject View select the subject whose audiogram is to be deleted 2 Select the Audiogram tab 3 In the Audiogram page select the audiogram to be deleted 4 From the Edit menu choose Delete then Audiogram 5 Choose Yes to delete the audiogram To delete all audiograms for the current subject 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Delete All then Audiograms The Delete All Audiograms dialog box appears 123 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 204 of 396 Audiograms and Histories 2 Choose Yes The Delete All dialog box appears 3 Type DELETE ALL in the edit box 4 Choose OK to delete all audiograms for the current subject Subject History PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Subject Histor
268. nformation See the table below Optional in the Notification Letter Social Security number test data signature line Medical Referral If a medical referral is indicated for this subject the Medical Referral section should be included The AAO American Academy of Otolaryngology criteria for medical 157 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 238 of 396 Report Templates Subject Reports referral are listed in the Hearing Conservation Manual published by CAOHC Council for Accreditation in Occupational Hearing Conservation For information on how the database handles medical referral see Medical Referral The letter will print in the language specified in the Language combo box in the subject s demographic data in the Add Subject or Modify Subject dialog box In order to add a language for the Notification Letter follow the instructions for adding a language in Languages and Adding a Language Then choose Modify Letter from the Report menu in the Control Window choose the language that you just added in the Language combo box and enter the words and paragraphs of the Notification Letter for that language English words and paragraphs appear by default replace them with the new texts When you are ready to print the letter simply set the new language as the preferred language of a given subject and the letter for that subject will be printed in the new language To see the Notification Letter dialog box 1
269. ng the database for subjects with last names beginning with P you would include LIKE P in the SQL statement In another example you would search for the element head in a subject s last name by including LIKE head in the SQL statement 182 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 263 of 396 Backup and Restore Backing Up Records An Overview The Backup function is available only if the Database Interface in Setup is set for Storage To see the Backup dialog box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Backup IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE The backup function backs up data on the company all subjects and all audiograms The File mdb edit box is for the location and name of the file that will contain the backup Enter the location and name of the file database in this edit box or you can browse for the file using the Browse push button You can create the file at the time of backup or use an existing file If you are using an existing file any data that is currently in the file will be overwritten upon backup The default backup file and location are d stx mdb If the Write log file check box is selected a log file will be created that you can check later for information The Log File edit box is for the location and name of the log file You can change the location and name from the default ones if you wish or browse for the file using the Browse button IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS
270. ng to use a program but find that the flow of the program is much quicker when using the keyboard because of the time involved in pointing the mouse to various points on the screen In the tables below the symbol represents instructions for performing the task with the mouse and the amp amp symbol represents keyboard instructions To re start an Click the Start button If controlling multiple automatic test audiometers click on the audiometer number or All Enabled Audiometers button to start all audiometers Press F4 If controlling multiple audiometers type the number of the audiometer e g 2 for audiometer number two or A to start all audiometers To stop or pause the Click the Stop button If controlling multiple test audiometers click on the audiometer number or All Enabled Audiometers button to stop all audiometers Press F5 If controlling multiple audiometers type the number of the audiometer or A to stop all audiometers To clear a booth Click the Clear button If controlling multiple 55 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 136 of 396 Control Window audiometers click on the audiometer number or All Enabled Audiometers button to clear all audiometers Press F6 If controlling multiple audiometers type the number of the audiometer or A to clear all audiometers To automatically retest a given ear freq at the end of an auto test To automatically retest a g
271. ns Replace Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 26 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical A Training Course 4 a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 2 Acoustical Levels i Left Ear Pre Calibration Level 7 ii Left Ear Post Calibration Level iii Right Ear Pre Calibration Level E iv Left Ear Post Calibration Level e e LEET Audiometer Technical A Hay Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 3 Frequency i Measure Left Ear ii 3 Maximum 1 Hz Typical Audiometer Technical s ute Training Course as a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 4 Distortion i All Frequencies z ii Left Ear 30db Maximum 42dB Typical ps iii Right Ear 30db Maximum 42dB Typical Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 27 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical A Say Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual 1 Procedural Order
272. ns see Playing Voice Instructions For information on setting the volume for voice instructions see Volume for Instructions and Microphone Threshold Determination The Procedure combo box in the General page of the Test Configuration dialog box sets the procedure for determining hearing thresholds The options available are Modified Hughson Westlake or Screening If you chose Modified Hughson Westlake as the Procedure The hearing threshold at a frequency is defined as the lowest level at which a response occurs in at least half of the ascending trials with a minimum of two out of three or two consecutive responses at a single level To determine a threshold the audiometer software presents a tone at the Start level specified in the Test Configuration dialog box for the ear and frequency If no response is recorded the stimulus level increases by 20dB until a response is obtained unless a Historical Starting Level HSL has been enabled for this ear and frequency If Initial Response Confirmation is selected the stimulus is again presented at that level to confirm the response After the response is confirmed the audiometer software follows the modified Hughson Westlake procedure 10dB down 5dB up until a threshold is determined as defined above If a subject is assigned after the test starts Historical Starting Levels will be used for all threshold determinations that occur after the subject is assigned I
273. nsulting LLC Page 22 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical xu Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual Manual Exhaustive Calibration can be accessed from the Audiometer Menu Any Sound Level Meter Audiometer Analyzer may be used The Procedure vary depending on the System used Audiometer Technical PRY ce Training Course A CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual Selection of Manual Audiometer Calibration will yield the Annual Calibration Menu The Serial Number Calibration Date Last Calibration Date and Firmware Version will be displayed Audiometer Technical Training Course CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual Selection of Calibration Options The Annual Calibration Warning can be entered to direct your sites to contact you for Annual Calibration The period prior to warning is set in System Setup General Tab Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 23 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Manual Selection of Calibration Options The Manual Calibration Booth n provides manual control to the Audiometer and Adjustment of
274. nt and the MSHA Noise Regulation require that each audiometer be given a daily calibration check The audiometer software has a number of features that make this daily check as efficient and convenient as possible Daily Calibration Configuration The Daily Calibration Configuration dialog box is the same as the Test Configuration dialog box except that the Prohibit Audiogram without Daily Calibration check box does not appear in the General tab and the MPANLs tab does not appear You may use the recommended test configurations for daily calibration or you may choose your own settings For information on automatic test features see the sections beginning with General Tab Test Configuration The factory defined test configurations that appear in the Daily Calibration Configuration dialog box are as follows e Bio Acoustic Simulator Bio Acoustic Simulator with SkHz e Human Ear Human Ear with 8kHz The audiometer detects whether the operator has set daily calibration and if so automatically uses the Daily Calibration Configuration for testing To choose a configuration for the daily calibration test 1 In the Control Window choose Daily Calibration from the Audiometer menu then Configuration from the submenu The Daily Calibration Configuration List dialog box appears 2 Select the desired configuration and choose Close To change a configuration for the daily calibration test 1 In the Control Window choose Dai
275. nterface see the sections beginning with Third Party Databases for procedures and information on assigning a subject saving an audiogram and printing an audiogram Data Transfer between Benson Medical Products If you are transferring data between Benson Medical Instruments products Solo and the Plus Package are Benson Medical Instruments databases there are two possible methods described below Which alternative you choose will depend on such factors as physical location network availability and whether the method is bidirectional or unidirectional NETWORK Plus Package only If you are on a network the data can be located in a shared database In this situation you have real time access to all the data from any audiometer or computer on the network This setup would be useful if you had locations that were physically separated but that needed access to the same data See Multi User Installation EXTRACT MERGE Plus Package only Perhaps you intend to move your audiometer from place to place for testing all the while storing tests and later transfer the tests to a fixed database With Extract and Merge the data you transfer will not have to be limited to the current company and to two categories such as subjects and audiograms You can choose a configuration such as all subjects audiograms medical histories in a date range or even choose to transfer all data at once See Extracting Records An Overview and Merging
276. nting an audiogram refer to the database documentation To assign a subject 1 In OHM assign a subject The subject will automatically be assigned in the audiometer software To save an audiogram 1 When the test status indicates Finished choose Save Print Test from the Audiometer menu Refer to the database documentation for further instructions Systoc If the database interface you are using is Systoc you will need to set up the audiometer to emulate an RA 500 See the sections beginning with Data Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol in this documentation for audiometer settings and other information about real time and batch transfer For database settings refer to your database documentation 236 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 317 of 396 Data Transfer Follow the procedure below to assign a subject Refer to the database documentation for details and further instructions To assign a subject 1 Choose Assign Subject from the Audiometer menu The Assign Subject dialog box appears 2 Enter the Patient ID number and the Examiner 3 Choose the Assign button 237 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 318 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 319 of 396 Sound Level Meter Sound Level Meter The Sound Level Meter that is mapped to the audiometer determines whether the ambient sound level during an audiogram is within permissible levels The recorded noise levels appear in an information ta
277. nu 98 I TEHID EEPHGENE Gs oec ud eer cerei tn 126 importing 187 188 194 formats fOEu oss odere pde 194 functions performed 189 OVELVIE Wu despele tec adesi asper veta 187 procedure sse 188 IMNPFOVEMENU usc cievaevnencnenn teres 128 and persistent improvement 128 In Based ven RO 133 Initial Response Confirmation 64 installing annual calibration hardware key 233 installing audiometers 1 checklist ui eter Re a DO 1 multi station aere evte sno peti rr ih nde 6 OVELVICW n enred tape ieee lon ede 3 single station 3 software installation 1 installing Plus Package 19 installing Sound Level Meters 32 Instruction Language combo box instructions automatic 61 64 66 for start of test a eta anno 64 for subject errors ssusss 64 languages changing at testing time58 languages overview esss 61 266 Page 347 of 396 playmg ee eeii 66 volume of uc cdatcdeticcdaorcaderixeetetsnanteng 17 K Keep Busy s urere eet eere 64 keyboard shortcuts 54 L E Ree Shifter 125 L Recordable Analysis 125 L Recordable Baseline 125 L Rep Shift acere 125 L Reportable Analysis 125 L Reportable Baseline 125 L STS Analysis 125 L STS Baseline enmt 125
278. nual Calibration Procedure 1 Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically at least annually according to the procedures described in this appendix The equipment necessary to perform these measurements is a sound level meter octave band filter set and a National Bureau of Standards 9A coupler In making these measurements the accuracy of the calibrating equipment shall be sufficient to determine that the audiometer is within the tolerances permitted by American Standard Specification for Audiometers S3 6 1969 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 41 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical A Training Course ap a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Annual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Annual Calibration Procedure 1 Sound Pressure Output Check 1 Placethe earphone coupler over the microphone of the sound level meter and place the earphone on the coupler 2 Setthe audiometer s hearing threshold level HTL dial to 70 dB Measure the sound pressure level of the tones at each test frequency from 500 Hz through 6000 Hz for each earphone At each frequency the readout on the sound level meter should correspond to the levels in Table E 1 or Table E 2 as appropriate for the type of earphone in the column entitled sound level meter reading
279. o MEMO variable length character field can only use LIKE command 9 Size length of field default is 10 for DATE and 20 for CHAR o Defaults to length from database o MAX o use maximum field size o 1 to MAX length of field up to a MAX of 40 F Flags Section optional section must precede section D flags can be in any order only 1 flag per flag group 10 Range range indicator range is depicted with TO on selection criteria dialog o NR notarange default value 179 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 260 of 396 SQL Syntax Functions o R display two controls one for start and one for end automatically make Edit or Combo o RC use Combo Box or Edit control default value for Types except DATE o RE use only Edit control allows to always freeform value default value for Type DATE 11 ListDatabase show database values in combo box dropdown lists o ND do not read database when first displaying dialog default value for all Types except Lang and companyid fields o D Read database to get actual values database reads can take a few seconds default value for Type Lang and all companyid fields 12 Blanks o NB do not allow to select blank values typically used if blank values are not allowed e g Status default value for Type Number and Lang and companyid fields o B allow to select blank values default value except for Type Number and Lang and companyid fields 13 LockList
280. ogram automatic retests use the Automatic Retest page in the Test Configuration dialog box From the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Test Configuration The audiometer can be programmed to retest a frequency if the threshold could not be determined due to subject errors see Error Descriptions for information on error codes is 90dB or greater is greater than 30dB at 500 Hz differs from the adjacent threshold by 50dB or more The higher of the two thresholds is retested differs by 40dB or more from the corresponding threshold in the other ear has changed more than 1 5dB up or down relative to the respective baseline threshold You can also program the audiometer to retest a frequency by using the Test Sequence tab See Programmed Retests Wait Intervals The Wait Intervals page in the Test Configuration dialog box shows the amount of time in milliseconds between a response and the presentation of the next stimulus added to a minimum of 1 second wait For example if the wait interval is 1000 then the time between the reponse and the presentation of the next stimulus is two seconds 1 second plus 1000 milliseconds The values in the edit boxes can be changed by the user MPANLs The MPANLs Tab is in the Test Configuration dialog box MPANLs stands for Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Levels A Sound Level Meter that is installed 73 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 154
281. ol Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears In the Audiometers list box select the audiometer for which you wish to delete all daily calibration audiograms Select the Delete All push button at the right of the Audiograms list box The Delete All Daily Calibration Audiograms dialog box appears Choose Yes to delete all the daily calibration audiograms for this audiometer The Delete All Final Confirmation dialog box appears 5 Type DELETE ALL in the edit box 6 Choose OK Updating the Daily Calibration Reference Test l If you are updating the reference audiogram at the end of the daily calibration test use the first procedure below If you have the Plus Package and wish to add a daily calibration reference or mark a stored daily calibration as the reference see the second part of this section To update the reference audiogram for daily calibration at the end of the test From the Daily Calibration submenu in the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Save Print The Save Print Daily Calibration dialog box appears 148 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 229 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage 2 Select the Reference check box 3 Enter other information as desired Plus Package Only Choose the Save push button This action stores the audiogram as the reference audiogram in Daily Calibration Storage Do Not Have Plus Package Choose the Updat
282. on for a company Age Correction will be used when determining persistence STS is not analyzed as persistent when Age Correction is used under some circumstances When the uncorrected shift of the subsequent test is the same as the shift of the original STS but Age Correction adjustments make the subsequent test not an STS the program does not analyze the STS as persistent and the baseline is not revised This indication appears only if Automatic Baseline Revision has been enabled for this company Recordable STS The indication of Recordable STS in an Analysis column means that this audiogram shows a Recordable STS in relation to the baseline audiogram according to the criteria established by OSHA This indication appears where appropriate if you are using OSHA regulations for this company Recordable STS Lined Out The indication of Recordable STS Lined Out in an Analysis column means that this audiogram initially showed a Recordable STS in relation to the baseline audiogram but that subsequent testing performed after the Retest Period as part of a hearing conservation program showed that the Recordable STS was not persistent according to the criteria established by the NHCA National Hearing Conservation Association In such cases OSHA allows employers to erase or line out the initial finding of a Recordable Shift This indication appears where appropriate if you are using OSHA regulations for this company Rejected Test Dat
283. on point time history 1 0 dB resolution illion point time history 0 1 dB resolution 00 RTA 1 1 octave spectra 00 LOG intervals without Ln s 5 000 LOG intervals with Ln s 0 0 0 0 point 1 3 octave SSA Leq time history 0 RTA 1 3 octave spectra 20 000 intervals with 1 3 octave Leq spectrum 12 300 SSA intervals with Leq and Max 1 3 octave spectra 2 400 FFT 400 line snapshots Communications Interface USB with DVX008A USB to DB9M Seria Adaptor RS 422 RS 232 serial interface modem mode 824 Accessories included with 824L 824A and 824 Documentation CCS001 CBLOO6 CBLO42 BATO10 EXAO10 PSA026 824 UTIL Users and Training Manual Choice of 1 2 microphone 2540 377B41 377A60 377A01 PRM902 Microphone preamplifier CBLO6 Serial computer interface cable WS001 3 1 2 windscreen PSA027 Universal AC power adaptor 12 volt output BATO10 NiMH rechargeable battery pack CCS001 Hard shell carrying case EXA010 Ten foot microphone extension cable 824 UTIL Windows based software for instrument setup data download and data export Not included with 824S 824 Accessories optional SRC20 Stand alone hand held signal and noise generator Large backlit true bit mapped graphic display 64 x 128 pixels Software DNA Data Navigation and Analysis software 14 ba
284. onal look Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Audiometer Calibration System Type and Type ll systems Clinical Industrial Military and School models Designed to perform an exhaustive calibration on all types of audi ometers Select the audiometer from the list and the ACS 100 sets the headphone type the impedance and steps you through the cor rect calibration routine designed for that audiometer Plug in the ACS 100 serial cable and be amazed as the ACS 100 controls the audiometer and automatically makes adjustments with Print out a customized calibration report on the built in printer com plete with color graphs and your company logo All packaged in an easy to carry sim ple to setup professional looking leather case Calibrated Audiological Service and Supply Company Page 377 of 396 Software Fe aU TUU Apetometer Calfscatieg System CLS 100 7 fa umcs X mds e Select a customer and the audiometer 7 T LEN to be calibrated The ACS 100 will set D eae the impedance and calibration routine Pene i AH specifically designed for that audiome rares d nn ter or make a user defined audiometer sses sre fei calibration routine Nee e Runan exhaustive calibration in Man mm ual User controlled or Full serial in dil Geb des x terface calibration mode aum ate e Get measurements and make adjust ments in real time Results in red fall outside the ANSI S3 6
285. onnection 1 The Setup dialog box should appear automatically If not choose Setup under the Audiometer menu 2 Choose the Serial Numbers tab Serial numbers are assigned to audiometers and sound level meters in the order of connection To change the order see Changing Configurations 3 Choose the General tab 4 Choose settings as desired The Port combo box will contain the choice BMI1 which is the virtual port created by Windows Plug and Play Choose another port only in the rare event that Plug and Play does not operate 5 If you are using a Sound Level Meter select the Sound Level Meter Mapping tab to check the configuration See Configuring the Sound Level Meter 6 When finished with the Setup dialog box choose OK 16 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 97 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup Volume for Instructions and Microphone To set the volume for the voice instructions and talk over microphone 1 Open the sound card volume control application The default location for this application is Start Menu Programs Accessories Entertainment Volume Control 2 Adjust the volume with the slide controls The Wave slide control adjusts the level of the voice instructions The Volume Control adjusts the overall volume for the sound card and therefore also adjusts the level of the talk over microphone Changing Configurations If you add swap or remove audiometer stations or sound level meters o
286. oose the Add History button in the dialog box Plus Package only If you wish to make this test the new baseline audiogram replacing the old baseline see Revising a Baseline Manually below Automatic Baseline Revision must be disabled for the current company 3 Choose the Save button to save the test If you are controlling multiple stations the Save Print Test dialog box is displayed for another station Repeat the steps above until all stations are saved 4 From the Audiometer menu choose Clear to clear the audiometer for testing another subject 93 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 174 of 396 Testing Saving and Printing with STORAGE Printing an Audiogram If the database interface you are using is Storage follow the procedure below to print an audiogram If you are using a database other than Storage Plus Package refer to the sections beginning with Data Transfer for information on printing an audiogram To print a test 1 From the Audiometer menu choose Save Print Test The Save Print Test dialog box appears 2 Choose the Print button in the Save Print Test dialog box The report template and select sort used for printing are set in the Save Print Options dialog box which is described in the section above This dialog box also contains the Print on Save and Print to Screen options Save Print Options The report template and select sort are set in the Save Print Options dialog box To
287. oose the Duplicate push button A copy of the format will appear in the list box 217 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 298 of 396 Import and Export 4 When finished with the Formats dialog box choose Close Adding a Field PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add a field in an import export format 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Formats The Formats dialog box appears 2 Choose the format in which you wish to add a field 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Format dialog box appears 4 In the Field Definitions group box choose the Add push button The Add Field dialog box appears 5 Enter the field information as desired For more information see Fields in Import Export Formats 6 When finished with the Add Field dialog box choose Close 7 When finished with the Modify Format dialog box choose Close Modifying a Field in an Import Export Format PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To modify a field in an import export format 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Formats The Formats dialog box appears 2 Choose the format in which you wish to modify a field 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Format dialog box appears 4 In the Field Definitions group box select the field you wish to modify and choose the Modify push button The Modify Field dialog box appears 5 Make changes as desired 6 When finished with the Modify Field dialog box choose Close 7 When finishe
288. or damages beyond the replacement of software or beyond the purchase price of the software Benson Medical Instruments Co does not warrant these products fitness for use for any particular application It is your responsiblity to determine fitness for use for your particular application 251 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 332 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 333 of 396 Annual Calibration Annual Calibration of the Audiometer OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910 95 Paragraph h Sections 1i and iii state that audiometers used for occupational testing need annual and 2 year exhaustive calibrations This section of the manual will outline procedures to meet or exceed the requirements of this regulation This audiometer unlike other audiometers is controlled completely by a computer The hardware itself has no buttons displays or keypads and all testing functions are initiated by computer command Similarly calibration is handled by commands supplied by the computer Hence there is no need to open the audiometer case for calibration or even to remove the audiometer from the sound booth This feature saves considerable time in yearly calibration as compared to units requiring considerable disassembly to access the calibration adjustments The audiometer software features an Automatic Annual Calibration Wizard for automatic calibration or you can choose to do the annual calibration manually Access to Annu
289. or the current company 116 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 197 of 396 Subjects Finding a Subject To find a subject 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Find then Subject The Find Subject dialog box appears 2 Enter the subject s Social Security number or last name If searching by name you may also enter the person s first name and middle initial 3 Choose whether to include all companies in the search using the Search All Companies check box Plus Package only 4 Choose OK The Find Subject Results dialog box appears e Ifthere is only one match choose OK OR Ifthere is more than one match select the correct subject in the list and choose OK The subject s name will be selected in Subject View If all companies were included in the search and this subject is in a different company Storage View will switch to the company of the matching subject Plus Package only Moving a Subject to a Different Company PLUS PACKAGE ONLY These instructions are for situations in which you wish to move a subject to a different company and no existing subjects in that company have the same Subject ID See the next section for situations in which someone in the destination company has the same Subject ID as the person you are trying to move To move a subject to a different company 1 In Subject View in the Control Window select the subject 2 Choose Modify from the Subject menu The Mod
290. ordable Shift Reportable Shift X left ear Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Leve S SE SQL SR SSN STS Retest Not Valid OSHA STS Baseline or MSHA STS Baseline ubject Error Structured Query Language OSHA STS Baseline or MSHA STS Baseline and N OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline or MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline Social Security number Standard Threshold Shift or Significant Threshold Shift 259 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 340 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 341 of 396 Index 2 2 year calibration 235 8 S000 HZ rannen 61 A abbreviations 241 access levels for users 39 aditig s dca tea ere es 111 audiograms sesesss 117 118 audiometer stations ssss 17 audiometers for daily calibration Storage cceececcccceeseeetetteeeeeeeees 136 companies 106 daily calibrations 138 Extract configurations 177 fields e e ei ca 204 TUES Listes iot eres edle 206 formats for import export 197 203 IuSiotie s sen eee ist hr erdt 123 languages for testing 83 Merge configurations 184 report for Multiple Report Print 91 report templates 159 161 Select Sorts sssss 159 164 SUD CCI ice beetle tas 111 USOTS E S 40 administrators ai ees e
291. ose Open The Modify Template dialog box appears 11 Choose OK Your report file in the database will be overwritten with the file that you browsed to 12 When finished with the Report Options dialog box choose Close To change the name of a custom report template 1 Choose Options from the Reports menu in the Control Window The Report Options dialog box appears 2 Select the custom template whose name you wish to change in the Template list 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Template dialog box appears 4 Change the name in the Name edit box 5 Choose OK The Report Options dialog box appears The report now has its new name 6 When finished with the Report Options dialog box choose Close Deleting a Report Template PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Factory defined reports cannot be deleted To delete a custom report template 1 Choose Options from the Reports menu in the Control Window The Report Options dialog box appears 2 Select the custom template you wish to delete in the Template list 173 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 254 of 396 Report Options 3 Choose the Delete push button The Delete Template dialog box appears 4 Choose Yes to delete the template 5 When finished with the Report Options dialog box choose Close Custom Select Sorts PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Adding a select sort is done using Structured Query Language SQL to which two functions have been added the ASK function and
292. oth s test display Next the type of error the description and instructions for counseling the subject are placed in the booth s information tab see Audiometer Information Tabs Optionally automatic voice instructions are played over the subject s headset See the next section for information on what causes specific errors to be generated You can choose to have the test stop immediately after any kind of error by choosing Stop Test on Error in the Test Configuration dialog box See General Tab Test Configuration INSTRUCTION TEXTS Below is the text of the error voice instructions in English If another language has been chosen a translation of these instructions into that language is used No response NR You are not pushing the hand switch when you hear the tone I will restart the test remember to push and release the hand switch as soon as you hear the tone 67 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 148 of 396 Automatic Testing Multiple Response MR You are pushing the hand switch when no tone is present Be sure you hear the tone and press and release your hand switch quickly Subject Error SE Press and release the hand switch button as soon as you hear a tone even if the tone is very soft Continuous Response CR You are not releasing the hand switch quickly enough Remember to press and release the hand switch quickly as soon as you hear the tone Retest Not Valid RN
293. other system On Industrial Hygiene To interface with the large variety of audiometer We Audiometer certification transducers the Larson Davis family of couplers i Clinics and hospitals includes NBS 9 A and IEC 318 couplers as well Hearing protection programs as an extremely practical artificial mastoid Finally there is a rugged portable solution for in house or in field audiometer calibration which sacrifices none of the accuracy and stability of laboratory instrumentation 1 Verify audiometers quickly and accurately under computer control with exhaustive tests based on the ANSI S3 6 1996 Specification for Audiometers limits Test nearly every type of transducer such as supra aural extended range circumaural bone vibrator hearing aid insert earphone and speaker Automatically correct RETSPLs microphone coupler and all other response adjustments using AUDit software Perform level and frequency adjustments during audiometer tests Qualify audiometric booth ambient noise with real time 1 3 octave analysis and fast pass fail results for ANSI S3 1 1991 Store and recall tests in databases query databases by audiometer technician date etc T Print custom reports and certificates for your customers or for your own archives System 824 Electro acoustic analyzer and precision SLM Level frequency FM and pulse measurements Since the 824 is a complete hand held precision are only a small portion of the c
294. ou have frequent ear infections 125 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 206 of 396 Audiograms and Histories 15 Do you shoot guns or hunt 16 Do you wear a hearing aid 17 Do you participate in loud activities music motorcycle 18 Do you currently use prescription or over the counter drugs 19 Are you currently suffering from allergies 20 Does any of your immediate family have hearing problems 21 Do you have any other comments on the health of your hearing User Defined Questions for Subject History PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If you wish you may include your own questions for Subject History because some of the data fields are user defined The user defined questions are those on Medical History Page 1 and Medical History Page 2 For general information on user defined data fields see User Defined Data Fields To enter or modify user defined questions for Subject History 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Add then History The Add History dialog box appears 2 Choose the Medical History Page 1 tab 3 Choose the push button of the question you wish to change This data field s look up dialog box appears 4 Choose the Advanced push button The dialog box expands 5 In the Prompt edit box change the question as desired 6 Choose OK 7 Continue until you have entered all your questions If you have more than 10 of your own questions you will need to enter the remaining questions us
295. ou have more than one booth choose the booth number or All Enabled Booths as appropriate The audiometer s will begin testing 4 When the booth status field indicates Finished print the test s see Save Print Daily Calibration dialog box below 5 To end daily calibration and to reset the booth s for testing subjects choose Clear from the Daily Calibration menu You may alternately clear the Daily Calibration check box on each booth s Information Tab 6 To prepare for subject testing plug the response cord into the Response jack of the simulator If you are using a BAS 200 the power indicator will go out signaling that the simulator is out of the circuit and will not affect subject testing If you are using a BAS 200slm the power indicator will stay on indicating that the sound level meter is still operational The simulator will not affect subject testing Unplugging the response cord again will prepare the system for biologic check You can prohibit the start of an audiogram without daily calibration See Prohibit Audiogram without Daily Calibration Save Print Daily Calibration dialog box At the top of the Save Print Daily Calibration dialog box are edit boxes for entering the audiometer serial number model information and annual calibration date 80 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 161 of 396 Daily Calibration Check Current Page On the Current page the Date and Time edit boxes show today s date a
296. ou may choose how long the retest period for subjects in a company should be You may set the period for anywhere from 0 to 180 days OSHA and MSHA specify a retest period of 30 days Changing this setting will cause the database to reanalyze audiograms NR Substitution dB PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The NR Substitution dB check box allows you to substitute a numerical value for any NR No Response indication in an audiogram Substituting a number for NR may enable the software to analyze audiograms without an indication of Missing or Invalid Data You may choose any number in the combo box You may also choose not to substitute any number for an NR indication in this case choose None in the combo box Changing this setting will cause the database to reanalyze audiograms 107 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 188 of 396 Companies Regulation PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Regulation combo box has two choices OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration and MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration The OSHA regulation used is 29 CFR 1910 95 the MSHA regulation used is 30 CFR Part 62 Calculations of STS Recordable Shift and other findings will be performed according to OSHA regulations if you have chosen OSHA for a company Calculations of STS Reportable Shift and other findings will be performed according to MSHA regulations if you have chosen MSHA for a company Changing this setting will cause the database
297. ould be best to set leading spaces to be filled with the character zero rather than trim them If you opt to fill spaces select the Fill check box and choose either the Leading or Trailing radio button You can then enter the character in the edit box at right The character must be a printable ASCII character This database expects that unused characters will contain nulls rather than spaces so in general fields should be trimmed Export Only Fields PLUS PACKAGE ONLY You may wish to add a field in your format that is used only for export For example you might want to add terminating characters at the end of a record in the ASCII file To add such a field check the Export Default check box in the Add Field dialog box and enter the characters to appear in the export in the Format edit box Using Field Mapping PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To use field mapping 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Formats The Formats dialog box appears 2 Select the desired format 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Format dialog box appears 4 In the Field Definitions group box select the field for which you need to use Field Mapping 5 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Field dialog box appears 215 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 296 of 396 Import and Export 6 In the Field Mapping group box choose the Add push button 7 In the Add Mapping dialog box supply character strings in the ASCII a
298. ous 65 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 146 of 396 Automatic Testing threshold set by the VSL setting in the Test Configuration dialog box For more information on how Variable Starting Level is handled in testing see Test Sequence Tab Test Configuration Except in cases of abnormal hearing loss this feature reduces the overall duration of the test considerably Values for VSL may be from 20 to 20dB inclusive in steps of 5 It is generally advisable to choose a positive value for VSL stimulus starts higher than previous threshold so that the subject will be less likely to miss the initial stimulus and lengthen the test time Presenting the initial stimulus at the level of the previous threshold VSL 0 will likely result in the subject not responding about half the time If VSL is selected for the first threshold determination or for a threshold determination after an error the starting intensity will be 40dB HTL Terminate Stimulus on Response TSOR This feature will cause the audiometer to stop presenting the stimulus immediately when the subject presses the response switch and begin the waiting period between presentations Selecting this feature has the potential to reduce the testing time a fraction of a second for each tone presentation At an expected 3 to 10 presentations per threshold the potential time savings are significant Initial Response Confirmation The stimulus to which the subject first respond
299. out the Retest on Noise Above MPANLs feature selected the report will make no statement about noise levels even if the MPANLs were not exceeded In the descriptions below of the reports the phrase current audiogram is used to mean the most recent analyzed audiogram The current audiogram is not necessarily the most recent audiogram Because of retests and NHCA baseline revision the current test is not always the most recent one The current audiogram is the audiogram that is used for analysis and calculations However if Automatic Baseline Revision is not enabled for a company the current audiogram is indeed the most recent test unless the most recent test has been rejected In reports a distinction is made between the most recent test and the current test A current test is defined here as the most recent analyzed test Because of retests and NHCA baseline revision the test that is used for analysis and calculations is not always the most recent one A test that turns out not to be used such as an Annual Not Used or a rejected test is not an analyzed test So for instance there 153 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 234 of 396 Reports could be a current test that was performed two weeks and a most recent test that was performed today Reports will be backed up and restored as part of normal backup and restore operations since they are part of the database Reports will be included in an Extract or M
300. pany Settings The following sections describe settings in the Company dialog box if you have the Plus Package the settings are in the Add Company and Modify Company dialog boxes Changing any of these settings for a company will cause the database to reanalyze audiograms Calculate STS Using Age Correction check box If this check box is checked the database will calculate STS using Age Correction for a company If you have checked this box for a company Age Correction will be used when determining persistence Changing this setting will cause the database to reanalyze audiograms Automatic Baseline Revision PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If this check box is checked the database will analyze audiograms and automatically revise baseline audiograms for this company using the criteria established by the National Hearing Conservation Association NHCA in 2000 OSHA and MSHA allow the baseline audiogram to be revised in cases of persistent STS or significant improvement With Automatic Baseline Revision there is no need to review the current audiogram in order to determine whether it may constitute a new baseline the database automatically updates the baseline if the subject s data are found to meet the NHCA criteria for baseline revision This feature does not eliminate the need for professional management of your hearing conservation program as required by OSHA or MSHA Changing this setting will cause the database to reanalyze audiograms 1
301. parameter The available Types are CHAR character NUMBER and DATE If no Type specified CHAR will be used Default is a constant of type Type that provides the default value for substitution This value must be legal for substituting in the expression If the Type is a NUMBER no quotes are required If the Type is a CHAR or DATE the Default must be specified with quotes For instance for the Type DATE one would place quotes around TODAY TODAY As an example a default constant for a type DATE might be 20050105 representing January 5th 2005 A special example for type DATE is TODAY which returns the system date VariableName is used to identify the response to the ASK in the ini file The ASKSYS Function PLUS PACKAGE ONLY ASKSYS Fieldname The ASKSYS function returns information about the currently selected subject record The parameter Fieldname may be COMPANY COMPANYNM 177 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 258 of 396 SQL Syntax Functions CURCOMPANY LASTNAME FIRSTNAME SUBJECTID TESTDATE and TESTTIME There are two company related ASKSYS functions ASKSYS COMPANY and ASKSYS CURCOMPANY To join tables on Company ID in the current tables only use ASKSYS CURCOMPANY For an example of using only ASKSYS CURCOMPANY review the Current Subject factory defined Select Sort in the Subject Test report template To join tables on Company ID in the non current tables only use AS
302. ple in the Hearing Conservation Amendment of an improvement of 5dB in the average of hearing thresholds at 2 3 and 4 kHz NHCA guidelines advise against the use of Age Correction This indication appears only if Automatic Baseline Revision has been enabled for this company Improvement Persistent Improvement PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of Improvement and Persistent improvement in an Analysis column means 1 that this subject s hearing shows both Improvement and Persistent Improvement in relation to the baseline audiogram and 2 that this audiogram is the second audiogram in a row to show an Improvement for this subject This indication appears only if at least six months 180 days have passed since the first audiogram that showed an Improvement If you are using Age Correction for a company Age Correction will be used when determining persistence This indication appears only if Automatic Baseline Revision has been enabled for this company Improvement lt 6 Month PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of Improvement lt 6 Month in an Analysis column means that the subject s hearing has shown significant improvement according to the criteria established by the National Hearing Conservation Association in 2000 in two sequential tests but that it has been less than six months 180 days since the last audiogram for this subject was performed This indication appears only if Automatic Baseline Revision has been enabled for
303. pler is a precision in modern audiometers offering stimuli acoustic coupler designed primarily for at frequencies higher than 8000 Hz the calibration and test of supra aural The LD AEC101 IEC 318 coupler bet earphones used in audiometry ter represents high frequency ear It allows accurate and repeatable mea phone to ear coupling and is therefore surements within its frequency indicated in ANSI and other standards response up to 8 kHz It may also be for testing circumaural earphones used for production testing where cor relation between the coupler and real The AEC101 is supplied with acces ear response is not a requisite sories to test extended frequencies on earphones such as the Koss HV1 A and Sennheiser HDA200 as well stan dard frequencies on TDH series ear phones Weights and plates for all sup ported earphone types are neatly packaged in a light weather tight case COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION Microphone 2575 1 pressure mic not included Preamplifier PRM902 1 2 dia low noise preamp not incl COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION MAE100 1 NBS 9 A coupler Microphone 2559 1 2 random inci SP MAE100 40 Coupler base dence not included MAE100 3 Protective cap Preamplifier PRM902 1 2 dia low MAE100 6 Earphone retaining ring noise preamp not incl Static Force 4 5 N mass and handle AEC101 F IEC 60318 1 coupler ACCO001 Vibration isolation pillow MAEC101 06 Type 1 adaptor plate SPECIFICATIONS MAEC101 07 Type 2 adapto
304. pp E e Title Acoustic calibration of audiometers This Appendix 1s Mandatory Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically at least annually according to the procedures described in this appendix The equipment necessary to perform these measurements is a sound level meter octave band filter set and a National Bureau of Standards 9A coupler In making these measurements the accuracy of the calibrating equipment shall be sufficient to determine that the audiometer 1s within the tolerances permitted by American Standard Specification for Audiometers S3 6 1969 1 Sound Pressure Output Check A Place the earphone coupler over the microphone of the sound level meter and place the earphone on the coupler B Set the audiometer s hearing threshold level HTL dial to 70 dB C Measure the sound pressure level of the tones at each test frequency from 500 Hz through 6000 Hz for each earphone D At each frequency the readout on the sound level meter should correspond to the levels in Table E 1 or Table E 2 as appropriate for the type of earphone in the column entitled sound level meter reading 2 Linearity Check A With the earphone in place set the frequency to 1000 Hz and the HTL dial on the audiometer to 70 dB B Measure the sound levels in the coupler at each 10 dB decrement from 70 dB to 10 dB noting the sound level meter reading at each setting C For each 10 dB decrement on the audiometer the sound leve
305. ppear You can search either by Subject ID or last name Enter the subject s Social Security number in the Soc Sec No edit box Plus Package only enter the Subject ID in the Subject ID edit box and or Enter the last name or the first few letters of the last name in the Last Name edit box you can also enter the first name and middle initial in the corresponding edit boxes If the Select All Companies check box is selected all companies will be included in the search instead of just the current company Plus Package only If you enter only a few letters of the person s last name the search results will show all subjects whose last names begin with those letters If there were multiple matches found you can then select the desired subject in the Find Subject Results dialog box PLUS PACKAGE ONLY If the Format Subject ID as SSN check box is selected automatic formatting will insert two hyphens into the Subject ID when the ID is entered in the Subject ID edit box so that the ID looks like a traditional Social Security number You may want to use this feature if you are searching by SSN so that it is easier to check that you have entered the correct number If all companies were included in the search and the matching subject is ina different company Storage View will switch to the company of the matching subject 114 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 195 of 396 Subjects Viewing Subjects IF Y
306. printed at the end of a test if the Print push button in the Save Print Test dialog box is chosen Of automatic printing has been enabled that is if Automatic Save on Test Complete in Test Configuration and Print on Save in the Add Multiple Report Print dialog box are selected If the Enabled check box is not selected this report will not be printed at the end of a test but it will remain in the list For example some companies may not need this particular report but other companies do wish to have it Therefore the report can be kept in Multiple Report Print but disabled or enabled depending on which company you are testing 95 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 176 of 396 Testing Saving and Printing with STORAGE You have the option of choosing to Print on Save using the Print on Save button You can choose to print to the screen by selecting the Print to Screen check box The Copies control sets the number of copies of the report that will be printed To see the Add Multiple Report Print dialog box 1 From the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Save Print Test The Save Print Test dialog box appears 2 Choose the Options push button The Multiple Report Print Options dialog box appears 3 Choose the Add push button Adding a Report for Multiple Report Print PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add a report to Multiple Report Print 1 From the Audiometer menu choose Save Print Test The Sav
307. provides the USB to Serial Interface to DoD Supplied P It also provides power and talkover voice instruction capabilities to the System and Expansion Audiometers Audiometer Technical MIX Training Course adf a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer l CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 Serial Extension Cable 12 ft The Serial Extension Cable shipped standard with the System Audiometer is 12 This cable will provide signal control power and talkover functions to the Audiometers The site dictated length will be supplied by Benson Authorized Installation Professionals during the on site installation Lengths of 6 12 25 and 50 are available as needed Training Course a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer Il CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 Booth Mounting Plate Audiometer Technical aC DAS The CCA 200mini Booth Mounting provides a convenient stable means to place the Audiometer in the Audiometric Test Booth This mounts within the BAS 200 Simulator Bracket The bracket allows the CCA 200min to be installed with the Data Cables entering and exiting at the top and the Headphone Jacks at the bottom for clean professional and secure installation Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 10 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Audiometer Technical INE T
308. r If a simulator is installed For daily calibration checks the response switch should not be connected to the Bio Acoustic Simulator For subject testing the response switch is inserted into the RESPONSE jack of the Bio Acoustic Simulator Ifthe audiometer is mounted outside the station use standard patch cords to make connections through the station walls There should be no need to modify the station 8 Connect the green connector of the USB Computer Interface Cable to the SPEAKER OUT jack on the PC sound card Carefully check the connector labels on the sound card as many connections use the same type of connector Do not confuse Line In with Line Out Unless otherwise documented assume that a jack marked Line refers to Line In 9 Connect the microphone to the PC sound card MIC IN connector Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 89 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup 10 Connect the power cord to the power supply 11 Plug the power supply cord into a wall outlet The red power LED on the audiometer front panel should glow indicating that the audiometer is powered Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 90 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup Connecting a Single CCA 200mini Audiometer shown with simulator Key to Numbers in Diagram Headset Cable Simulator Interconnect Cable CCA 200mini Audiometer Serial Cable USB Computer Interface Cable Power Supply Power Cord Response Swit
309. r change the serial port that the audiometer or sound level meter is connected to follow the instructions in this section If you are running a Plug and Play operating system such as Windows 2000 follow the instructions in Plug and Play Configuration below Otherwise follow the Manual Configuration instructions Plug and Play Configuration You may at some future time add or remove stations or connect your audiometer or sound level meter to a different serial port To change the audiometer or sound level meter configuration 1 Restart your computer with the new configuration connected Plug and Play will detect a change of serial port connection 2 Start the application The application will detect any changes If changes are detected a dialog box may appear asking you to confirm the changes Plug and Play detects the audiometer stations and sound level meters in the order of connection If the station order varies from the connection order follow the instructions in Manual Configuration below Manual Configuration non Plug and Play Non Plug and Play operating systems can t detect the addition or removal of devices or changes in serial port connection If you change the stations associated with the audiometer station you need to change the configuration In addition advanced users may find it more convenient to manually configure the installation 17 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 98 of 396 Audiometer In
310. r information on the Sound Level Meter group box see Sound Level Meter group box in the Audiogram section To see the Add Modify Daily Calibration Audiogram dialog box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 Select an audiometer in the Audiometers list box 146 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 227 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage 3 Choose the Add push button at the right of the Audiograms list box or select a daily calibration audiogram and choose the Modify push button at the right of the Audiograms list box Adding a Daily Calibration Audiogram PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add a daily calibration audiogram 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 In the Audiometers list box select the audiometer for which you are adding a daily calibration audiogram 3 Select the Add push button at the right of the Audiograms list box The Add Daily Calibration Audiogram dialog box appears 4 Enter the daily calibration audiogram information See Daily Calibration Audiogram Dialog Box for information on the different parts of this dialog box 5 When finished choose OK 6 Choose Close in the Daily Calibration dialog box Modifying a Daily Calibration Audiogram PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To modify a daily calibration audiogram 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose
311. r plate 3 MAE100 6 Earphone retaining ring Materials Stainless steel base cou Static Force 4 5 N standard 9 5 N bag pier amp mess allun aing for circumaural earphones Diameter 3 2 82 mm max ACC001 Vibration isolation pillow Height 2 5 64mm CCS002 Fiberglass reinforced 4 4 110 mm with ring weather tight case Weight 5 5 Ibs 2 5 kg SPECIFICATIONS Materials Stainless steel base and coupler cavity Delrin conical ring aluminum plates and retainer ring Pressure leak Custom precision orifice Dimensions 2 2 H x 3 2 dia 66mm H x 81mm dia Coupler weight 3 2 Ibs 1 4 kg Listen MW with Larson Davis Page 375 of 396 Ready to use systems or custom configurations Larson Davis has a solution for your audiometer or electro acoustic test The following systems are configured for exhaustive audiometer testing The SYSOO8 consists of software a System 824 precision analyzer and AEC100 coupler for you calibrate audiometers with bone vibrators the SYSO09 also includes the AMC493 artificial mastoid Call Larson Davis to configure your own system substitutions allowed certification of audiometers with supra aural earphones If SYS008 Audiometer Calibration System SYS009 Audiometer Calibration System with AMC493 824 Precision SLM real time analyzer 824 Precision SLM real time analyzer AUDit Powerful test and reporting software AUDit Powerful test and reporting software AEC100 NBS 9
312. r the rest of the testing session Audiometer Context Menu An alternate method of controlling the audiometer functions is with the Audiometer Context Menu This menu appears when the mouse pointer is over an audiometer s Test Display area exclusive of the Name ID SSN edit box and the mouse s right button is clicked The menu items will vary depending on which database interface you are using If you are using Storage OHM FOSHM Systoc HearTrak Windows or MedGate Assign Subject and Save Print Test will appear whereas if you are using another database these two items will not appear You may choose any of the menu item functions See Menu Functions The function is applied to the audiometer over which the mouse was positioned when the click occurred Audiometer Control Functions This section describes in detail the functions of the Control Window buttons and menu items in the Audiometer menu that control the audiometer A table of common testing tasks with instructions for performing them is included in the next section 53 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 134 of 396 Control Window Start This button and menu item commences automatic testing in the selected audiometer s If the thresholds are all NT Not Tested the automatic test is specified in the Test Configuration List dialog box see Choosing an Automatic Test Configuration If one or more frequencies are marked for automatic retest indicated b
313. ract sections beginning with Extracting Records An Overview and the Merge sections beginning with Merging Records An Overview 169 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 250 of 396 Report Options Adding a Report An Overview PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Adding a new report template is done in the following way First create a report template file using Crystal Reports Then in the Report Options dialog box choose the Add button You will see the Add Template dialog box In the Name edit box you can enter the name that you wish the report to have in the database Choose the report type for your new report using the Report Type combo box The report type that is chosen determines the dialog box es that the report you are adding will appear in The report type choices are listed below Report Types Company Subject Audiogram Daily Calibration Annual Calibration SLM Annual Calibration Then you can choose the Import Report File push button The Select Report File dialog box appears Browse to your file and select it Choose Open Then you are ready to choose OK in the Add Template dialog box In the Report Options dialog box you can verify that your new report appears in the Template list box you may have to move the scroll bar to see the bottom of the list In the Add Template dialog box the Name edit box is for the name that the new report will have in the database The Report Type combo box lists the available report types
314. raining Course ad d a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 Power Supply amp Power Cord 110V The Power Supply provides all System power for Single and Multiple Audiometer Installations This 24VDC Switching Supply will allow input voltages from 100 240 VAC 47 63 Hz and a nominal 24VDC SOW Max output The Switched DC provides easy access for the Technician while limiting Client Access Audiometer Technical 2 Pout Training Course ad x a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer l CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 Calibration Certificate The Calibration Certificate documents a full ANSI Exhaustive Calibration The Calibration is completed by Benson Medical Instruments Co Trained Staff using a custom designed software controlled calibration system and a currently certified Larson Davis 824 Audiometer Calibration Kit The calibration process uses both acoustic and electrical measurements to insure the CCA 200mini exceedsall applicable ANSI 3 6 1989 Standards Audiometer Technical e c Training Course EP a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Il Theory of Operation The CCA 200mini is a software based computer controlled audiometer accessed by a unit ID Serial Number for all testing maintenance and calibration functions Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Version2 0 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting
315. ration Of Earphones IEC 60318 1 IEC 60318 2 ANSI S3 13 1993 IEC 60373 1990 01 Mechanical Coupler for Measurement of Bone Vibrators patent ed low thermal mass design varies from design features in standard 21 5 Ibs 9 80 kg Case dimensions 20 1 2 x 16 3 4 x 8 1 2 52 cm x 42 5 cm x 21 6 cm 21 7 Ibs 9 85 kg Fiberglass reinforced airtight thermoplastic case with pressure relief AUDit software s features and functions apply only to supported Larson Davis products All specifications are subject to change without notice Larson Davis A PCB GROUP CO Listen Ww with Larson Davis 1681 West 820 North Provo UT 84601 U S A 801 375 0177 Fax 801 375 0182 mktg larsondavis com www larsondavis com D0500 0017 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 376 of 396 ACS 100 no interaction from you Ready ACS 100 Key Features Benefits e Automatic calibration via serial interface e Exhaustive calibrations in about 6 minutes e Hand switch and sound room octave band tests built in Set e Audiometer specific calibrations e Track customers audiometers Call headphones companies leads 800 755 8272 and more or visit e Customized calibration reports Audiometry com e Accurate more complete calibrations e Increase your productivity e Little to no experience needed usn e Expand customer base Chicago Illinois Palatine Illinois Union Pier Michigan e Professi
316. ration Routines 253 Installing the Annual Calibration Hardware Key 253 Requirements for Annual Calibration ss 254 Requirements for Exhaustive 2 Year Calibration 254 Automatic Annual Calibration seseeeesessssss 254 Automatic Annual Calibration Procedure 255 Saving the Annual Calibration Report sssse 256 Manual Annual Calibration eeesesssseeeeessss 257 Calibration Options cocer ter rr i e Scu i ibn ad io tu RA 257 Annual Calibration Warning ssem 258 Abbreviations 259 Abbreviations auctio cxi ord c E E XE ER E Gant tena anes 259 Index 261 xii Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 81 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup Audiometer Installation and Setup Installation of your audiometer is done in two parts In the first part you will install the application software and choose the program settings In the second part you will install the hardware in your computer The audiometer is a Plug and Play device With a Plug and Play operating system e g MS Windows 2000 the audiometer can be installed automatically The first person to run the PC software will set up passwords for program access This person should therefore be the program administrator Hardware Requirements The audiome
317. rd in the destination company To move a subject to a different company and overwrite the demographic data of a subject with the same Subject ID in the destination company 1 In Subject View in the Control Window select the subject Choose Modify from the Subject menu The Modify Subject dialog box appears N o2 In the Modify Subject dialog box choose the Company push button A In the Company dialog box select the company you wish to move the subject to Choose OK A dialog box appears asking whether you wish to merge the test records of the currently displayed subject with the existing subject 6 Choose Yes A dialog box appears asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing subject data with the currently displayed subject data 7 Choose Yes The demographic data audiograms and histories of the currently displayed subject will overwrite the demographic data audiograms and histories of the existing subject 8 In the Modify Subject dialog box choose OK Nn 118 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 199 of 396 Subjects To move a subject to a different company and keep the demographic data of a subject with the same Subject ID in the destination company 1 In Subject View in the Control Window select the subject 2 Choose Modify from the Subject menu The Modify Subject dialog box appears 3 In the Modify Subject dialog box choose the Company push button 4 In the Company di
318. refore the Subject table must be included when the Audiogram table is included This happens automatically in the Add Extract Configuration dialog box The Add column and the Update column each have a check box for each record group When Add is selected for a record group new records will be added in that category for instance new audiograms in the Audiogram record group If Update is selected for a record group any new data will overwrite previous data in that category for that record group for instance a new address for a company will overwrite the old address in the Company record group In an example of how the Add and Update columns might be used suppose that a subject that already exists in the database has been recently tested in the field so there is an additional audiogram for that person that needs to be merged into the home database The home office would like to get the new audiogram but wants to keep control of all demographic data on people being tested to avoid inaccuracies being introduced into the database The Merge Configuration would then be set to Add but not Update subjects with both Add and Update being checked for audiograms and histories With these conditions the new test would be added for the subject but the person s demographic data would remain unchanged even if his or her address etc had been entered at the testing site If any new subjects came to the testing site however they a
319. rface cable 5 Connect the response switch as appropriate for either a daily calibration check or testing If a simulator is not installed connect the response switch to the RESPONSE jack on the audiometer If a simulator is installed For daily calibration checks the response switch should not be connected to the Bio Acoustic Simulator For subject testing the response switch is inserted into the RESPONSE jack of the Bio Acoustic Simulator Ifthe audiometer is mounted outside the station use standard patch cords to make connections through the station walls There should be no need to modify the station 6 Connect the remaining connector of the computer interface cable to the SPEAKER OUT connector on the PC sound card Carefully check the connector labels on the sound card as many connections use the same type of connector Do not confuse Line In with Line Out Unless otherwise documented assume that a jack marked Line refers to Line In nl Connect the microphone to the PC sound card MIC IN connector oo Connect the power cord to the power supply hz Plug the power supply cord into a wall outlet The red power LED on the audiometer front panel should glow indicating that the audiometer is powered Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 85 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup Connecting a Single CCA 200 Audiometer shown with simulator Key to Numbers in Diagram 1 Headset Cable 2 Simulator Interconnec
320. rforming an audiogram is described in the sections below It is assumed in these procedures that you are using Storage as your database interface If you are using a database other than Storage refer to the Data Transfer sections and your database documentation Assigning a Subject Each audiogram must be associated with a subject in order to save it The process of associating an audiogram with the person who is being tested is referred to here as assigning If you are using a database other than Storage refer to the sections beginning with Data Transfer for information on assigning a subject using your database STORAGE If the database interface you are using is Storage follow the instructions in this section to assign a subject You may enter data in audiogram data fields such as Examiner before during or after a test When you choose the Assign button in the Assign dialog box or the Save button in the Save Print Test dialog box all the data you are entering will be associated with the same audiogram You may thus enter data for the same audiogram several times as long as the Clear Test command has not been chosen The Clear Test command will clear the audiometer for a new subject If you wish the Assign dialog box to appear automatically when a test starts select the Automatic Assign on Start check box in the Test Configuration dialog box If a subject is assigned before testing time the language specified as part of that su
321. rmation on how to use a given button see the topic referenced in the last column Button Name ae a subject by Social ae a Subject Security number lr Add Subject Adds a subject Subjects Modify Subject Modifies a subject Modifying a Subject Delete Subject Deletes a subject Deleting a Subject Add Audiogram Add History EI Modify Audiogram Modify History EN Delete Audiogram Delete History Adds an audiogram adds a Audiograms history if Histories Tab is Subject History selected Plus Package only Modifies an audiogram Modifying an Audiogram modifies a history if Histories Modifying a History Tab is selected Plus Package only Deletes an audiogram deletes a Deleting an Audiogram history if Histories Tab is Deleting a selected Plus Package only HistoryDeleting a History Print Reports Allows you to print a report Reports Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC 51 Page 132 of 396 Control Window using select sort options f oO ls Selects a subject for selected Assigning a Subject ssign Subject F2 audiometer s 5l Saves test data to subject record Saving an Audiogram Save Print Test F3 to selected audiometer s amp Re starts an automatic test to Audiometer Control Start Test F4 selected audiometer s Functions fal Pauses test to selected Audiometer Control Stop Test F5 audiometer s Functions re Clears subject and test data
322. rning curve The Version 6 2x provides system a enhancements and bug corrections over the current Version 4 3x currently installed JU I Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review ll Theory of Operation ll The following changes have been made as requested by the Contract Windows Logo certification Add Korean and Arabic languages Add Single ear test configurations Accept all threshold on Assign Add Auto retest if gt 10 dB 2 3 4k Add Calibration Routines protected by password Remove daily calibration print function Add Simulator Information Return Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 59 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review ll Theory of Operation ll The following methods can be used for Function and Menu selection in the System E i Windows Point amp Click Selection L Hover Function will show selection TE options I Windows Dropdown Menus Ill Keyboard Function Keys Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review ll Theory of Operation I The following methods can be used for Function and Menu selection in the m System L Windows Point amp Click Selection L Hover Function will show selection options Il Windows Dropdown Menus gt Ill Keyboard Function Keys
323. rocedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Identify Left Phone Serial Number 2 Identify Right Phone Serial Number eee Audiometer Technical 7 Se Training Course as a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Click Set Calibration Date 2 Then Click Print for Printer 1 If pdf is required Check Print to Screen Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 37 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical xu Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 A Sample Calibration Report 2 Click Finish to Complete Calibration RI Audiometer Technical m te Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACS100 System AudiometerTechnical 47 Se Training Course EP a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic
324. rom the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Delete All then Histories The Delete All Histories dialog box appears 2 Choose Yes The Delete All dialog box appears 3 Type DELETE ALL in the edit box 4 Choose OK to delete all histories for the current subject 129 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 210 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 211 of 396 Analysis Audiogram Analysis Columns Messages will be displayed in the audiogram analysis columns in Audiogram View about what a given audiogram shows about the subject s hearing e g STS Improvement etc Messages can also indicate the status of the audiogram in the database such as First Test In the following sections the messages are described in alphabetical order The messages in the columns depend in part on the settings for the current company For instance if Separate Left Right Baselines has been selected for the company the analysis columns will show separate baselines for each ear In another example OSHA Recordable Shift Rec Shift will appear in the columns instead of MSHA Reportable Shift if OSHA has been selected for the company in the Regulation combo box Plus Package only To see company settings choose Company from the File menu in the Control Window If Calculate STS using Age Correction has been selected for the current company age correction will be used in the calculation of STS and Recordable Sh
325. rratis 39 level of access to software 39 setting password ssussss 13 age correction 102 225 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC definition of STS with age correction M 225 enabling use of uuuss 102 Alarm OG suus s ios tae ie 53 description 53 keyboard shortcut 54 neni T 6ITLa ovest stb i vresis edens 47 toolbar button em tres 51 All Company Eistoss cies 153 ambient noise levels 70 AN Status Ambient Noise Status 132 maximum permissible levels 67 70 MPANJLTS Sereni 67 70 Retest on Noise Above MPANL 67 Sound Level Meter 132 221 AN Status Column 133 AN abbreviation for Ambient TNOISO ua ettet a 133 analysis 2 rere 63 118 125 columns TOES e ph tear ale ES 125 during testing sess 63 on reports 146 annual calibration See calibration NEA Vesp IV N MM 235 Annual Not Used 128 ASCII fields dts 200 ASK Function 165 ASKSYS Function 165 assigning a subject 87 Automatic Assign on Start 63 with DOHRS HC 218 261 Page 342 of 396 with FOSHM eese 218 with HearTrak DOS 219 with Medgate ssssse 219 with OHM s secas elei eres 220 with Storage
326. rson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Rise Fall Test is started next 2 Rise Fall Overshoot are included Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 34 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout x E ett Audiometer Technical PR tre Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Distortion Test will queue next Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System Linearity 70dBHL to TOdBHL Next Step Error Cumulative Error AudiometerTechnical gt pute Training Course ee a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System Linearity ZOdBHL to 7 100dBHL Next Step Error Cumulative Error Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 35 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical A Say Training Cours
327. s 65 Variable Starting Level 0 2 2 cccccccccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneenteeeeeees 65 Terminate Stimulus on Response TSOR 66 Initial Response Confirmation ccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 66 Pulse and Continuous Stimulus ssseeeessssss 66 Keep BUSY erede tte e e ee eel aol ae 66 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 73 of 396 Table Of Contents Start Test Voice Instructions esses 67 Error Handlifg muon dat oe ses rats Eel ene etae ER a Rund 67 Error D SCTiptiOns cccccccecceesssseeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaasseeeeeeeeeeeneees 68 Playing Voice INStructions ccccceccceeecceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseess 69 Stop Test on Error eeeesssssssseeeeee nennen 69 Retest on Noise Above MPANL sssesemmmIR 69 Semi Automatic Manual Mode esee 70 Prohibit Audiogram without Sound Level Meter Calibration 70 Prohibit Audiogram without Annual Calibration 71 Prohibit Audiogram without Functional Check 71 Prohibit Audiogram without Daily Calibration 71 Test Sequence Tab Test Configuration 71 Historical Starting Level HSL sseeeeese 72 Programmed Retests cssccsccccscccceecneceaeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneneeaeass 72 A
328. s and selections for automatic testing that are found in the General Tab are described in the following sections Languages for Voice Instructions The Language combo box on the General page of the Test Configuration dialog box sets the language that is used for voice instructions The audiometer software can automatically play pre recorded voice instructions over the headset to instruct the subject when the test starts and when an error occurs The languages available for automatic voice instructions are English Spanish French German Vietnamese Bosnian Russian Somali Hmong Hindi Cambodian Tibetan Italian Japanese Polish and Tagalog 63 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 144 of 396 Automatic Testing The language selected as part of a subject s demographic data in the Add Subject or Modify Subject dialog box overrides the language of the chosen Test Configuration as long as the subject has been assigned The language being used for testing appears in the audiometer information tab in the Instruction Language combo box You may change the language in this combo box at testing time Following a Clear command this control is reset to the language specified in the current Test Configuration You can record the instructions in a new language of your choice To adda language see Adding a Language For the texts see the sections beginning with Start Test Voice Instructions For information on playing voice instructio
329. s in an ascending trial of a threshold determination is repeated If the subject responds to the repeated stimulus the test continues normally otherwise the stimulus intensity increases by 5 dB until the subject responds again That response is again confirmed Some users may feel that Initial Response Confirmation adds to the test validity because it ensures that the threshold determination began in audibility However because Initial Response Confirmation adds tone presentations to the audiogram the amount of time needed to complete the audiogram is increased Initial Response Confirmation has no effect when the Procedure is set to be Screening in the Test Configuration dialog box Pulse and Continuous Stimulus The audiometer can present a pulse or continuous stimulus A pulse stimulus is three short beeps of 200ms duration with 200ms between pulses Pulse tone can often allow subjects with tinnitus to distinguish the stimulus from ringing in the ears Continuous stimulus is a single tone of one second duration Keep Busy When testing multiple subjects in a common area e g a group sound booth a subject who completes the automatic test before the others may be disruptive to the 66 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 147 of 396 Automatic Testing other subjects concentration In Keep Busy mode the audiometer continues to present tones after the automatic test is finished but does not save new thresholds Since
330. s indication appears where appropriate if you are using MSHA regulations for this company Retest Not Used PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of Retest Not Used in an Analysis column means that this retest audiogram is not being used for STS calculation baseline revision and other evaluations For example if a retest shows improvement in one ear but worse hearing in the other ear the retest is not used This audiogram is kept in the database but is marked in such a way that it is not taken into account in such calculations This indication appears only if Automatic Baseline Revision has been enabled for this company STS The indication of STS in an Analysis column means that this subject s hearing shows an OSHA STS or MSHA STS in relation to the baseline audiogram The Regulation setting for the company determines whether OSHA or MSHA regulations are used in calculating STS 138 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 219 of 396 Analysis STS Persistent Improvement PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of STS Persistent improvement in an Analysis column means 1 that this subject s hearing shows both an STS and Persistent Improvement in relation to the baseline audiogram and 2 that this audiogram is the second audiogram in a row to show an Improvement for this subject The baseline was then revised because persistence was shown and the subject was found to have an STS in the current audiogram in relation to the r
331. s inserted into the RESPONSE jack of the Simulator Sound Level Meter Internal switching removes the Simulator Sound Level Meter from the circuit so that it may be left installed at all times with no effect on testing 4 Plug the microphone into the MIC jack on the Simulator Sound Level Meter 5 Suspend the microphone from the ceiling for best results 6 Plug the power supply cord into the wall outlet The red power LED on the Simulator Sound Level Meter should glow indicating that the instrument is powered 29 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 110 of 396 BAS 200slm and SLM 200 Installation 7 Repeat the preceding steps for any remaining audiometers or Simulator Sound Level Meters The power supply provided will power up to ten instruments If you are installing more than ten instruments in total contact your special instruments dealer for assistance 30 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 111 of 396 BAS 200slm and SLM 200 Installation Installing the Bio Acoustic Simulator Sound Level Meter with the CCA 200mini 31 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 112 of 396 BAS 200slm and SLM 200 Installation Key to Numbers in Diagram Simulator Interconnect Cable Headset Cable CCA 200mini Audiometer USB Computer Interface Cable Power Supply Power Cord Serial Cable Serial Cable Response Switch NO ON OQ tn RA t NY 10 Microphone 11 BAS 200slIm Bio Acoustic Simulator Sound Le
332. s may be modified To modify an Extract configuration 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Extract Configurations The Extract Configurations dialog box appears 2 Select the configuration in the list 3 Choose the Modify push button The Modify Extract Configuration dialog box appears 190 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 271 of 396 Extract and Merge 4 Make changes as desired 5 When finished with the Modify Extract Configuration dialog box choose OK 6 In the Extract Configurations dialog box choose Close Deleting an Extract Configuration PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Only user defined Extract Configurations may be deleted To delete an Extract configuration 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Extract Configurations The Extract Configurations dialog box appears 2 Select the configuration in the list 3 Choose the Delete push button The Delete Configuration dialog box appears 4 Choose Yes to delete the configuration 5 In the Extract Configurations dialog box choose Close Duplicating an Extract Configuration PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Duplicating Extract configurations saves time when you are creating your own configurations because you are starting with an existing configuration Duplicate a factory defined configuration in order to modify it To duplicate an Extract configuration 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Extract Configurations The Extra
333. s tab The audiograms for that subject appear Audiogram Context Menu An alternate method of working with audiogram data is with the Audiogram Context Menu This menu appears when the mouse pointer is over an audiogram in Audiogram View and the mouse s right button is clicked You may choose any of the menu item functions See Menu Functions The function is applied to the audiogram over which the mouse was positioned when the click occurred 102 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 183 of 396 Database View Histories Tab PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Histories page is at the bottom of Database View in the Control Window If the Histories tab is selected medical histories are displayed for the subject that is currently selected in Subject View and the Add History toolbar button is displayed History Context Menu PLUS PACKAGE ONLY An alternate method of working with subject history data is with the History Context Menu This menu appears when the mouse pointer is over a history in History View in Database View and the mouse s right button is clicked You may choose any of the menu item functions See Menu Functions The function is applied to the history over which the mouse was positioned when the click occurred Viewing Audiograms and Histories with Plus Package IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE To see the audiograms for a subject 1 In Subject View select the subject whose audiograms you wish to see
334. same Social Security number exists in the destination company the corresponding demographic fields will be overwritten by the fields from the transferred record The audiograms and histories ofthe two subjects will be merged If two audiograms or histories with the same date and time exist the transferred audiogram or history will overwrite the records in the destination company For a new company you may wish to have the same settings as for the old ones for example Notification Letter settings and paragraphs You can easily duplicate existing company settings by duplicating a company Refer to the table below for information on which settings are duplicated when you duplicate a company Aspects of a Company That Are Duplicated Name Address Phone Contact Name Comment Company settings e g Calculate STS using Age Correction Retest Period etc User defined field settings and look up lists for subjects audiograms and histories Notification Letter settings and paragraphs 105 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 186 of 396 Companies To see the Company dialog box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company Viewing Companies PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To see all companies and select a company 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Company The Company dialog box appears 2 Select a company in the list All audiograms that are saved will be assigned to this company 3 Choose Close Com
335. se View shows the company and subject data in Subject View audiograms in the Audiograms Tab and Histories in the Histories Tab Plus Package only 101 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 182 of 396 Database View Subject View If the Database Interface in Audiometer Setup is set to Storage Subject View appears in the left pane Here subjects in the company that is currently selected are listed alphabetically with their Social Security numbers and other demographic information Subject Context Menu An alternate method of working with subject data is with the Subject Context Menu This menu appears when the mouse pointer is over a subject in Subject View in Database View and the mouse s right button is clicked You may choose any of the menu item functions See Menu Functions The function is applied to the subject over which the mouse was positioned when the click occurred Audiograms Page The Audiograms Page is at the bottom of Database View in the Control Window When the Audiograms tab is selected audiograms are displayed for the subject that is currently selected in Subject View and you can add an audiogram by selecting the Add Test toolbar button Baseline audiograms are marked with an X in one or more of the baseline columns The current baseline audiogram is the one that was performed most recently To see audiograms for a subject 1 Select the subject in Subject View 2 Click on the Audiogram
336. see the Save Print Options dialog box choose Save Print Test from the Audiometer menu then choose the Options push button PLUS PACKAGE ONLY see the next section The Multiple Report Print Options dialog box instead of Save Print Options appears when the Options push button is selected For information on reports and select sorts see the sections beginning with Reports You have the option of choosing to Print on Save using the Print on Save button You can choose to print to the screen by selecting the Print to Screen check box The Copies control sets the number of copies of the report that will be printed To set the report template and to see other options 1 From the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Save Print Test N In the Save Print Test dialog box choose the Options push button The Save Print Options dialog box appears In the Report Template combo box choose the report you wish to use In the Report Select Sort combo box choose the select sort method Select whether to Print on Save Select whether to Print to Screen Choose the number of copies When finished choose OK onan ta A W 94 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 175 of 396 Testing Saving and Printing with STORAGE The choices made here will dictate which report is used for printing and how it is printed Multiple Report Print Options PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The options for printing and saving are set in t
337. shed press the Close push button to end the functional check 86 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 167 of 396 Languages Languages The languages available for automatic voice instructions are English Spanish Hmong German Hindi Tibetan Vietnamese French Bosnian Somali Russian Cambodian Italian Japanese Polish and Tagalog You may set any of these languages as the preferred language of a subject or add voice instructions in the language s of your choice The list of languages appears in the Languages dialog box It is not possible to make changes to the factory defined voice instructions The preferred language of a subject is set when you are entering subject demographic data in the Add Subject or Modify Subject dialog box The default language is English The default language for testing is set in the Test Configuration dialog box For information on the handling of languages for automatic voice instructions see Languages for Voice Instructions You may add languages using the Language dialog box Any language that you add will then appear as a language choice for subject demographic data in the Add Subject or Modify Subject dialog box If you then choose this language for the subject the subject will be automatically tested in the language when assigned In the Languages dialog box use the Add Modify and Delete push buttons at right to make changes Use the Item Up and Item Down push buttons to move languag
338. son CCA 200mini Headset provides a stable easily maintained set of components Including Telephonics THD39P Headphones w 035 Set Screws Benson Headset Cord Set V4 Phone to Headset Yoke Color Code Red Right Blue Left MXS1AR Color Coded Ear Cushions WE Static Force Padded Headband Audiometer Technical PRY ee Pile Training Course ae a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 Response Switch moisture proof and dust tight The Benson Handswitch provides consistent testing with little client fatigue Rated at 1 000 000 presses it yields a mean life of 16 18 months in heavy use environments Audiometer Technical ier Pile Training Course WES Sf a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 Software CD The Benson System Software delivered with the System is CCA 200miniVersion 6 0 The Jacket and CD Title will designate the current version Version 6 20 or higher must be used Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Version2 0 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Page 9 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Pee col Training Course aul a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer l CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 USB Computer Interface Cable USB CIC The USB Computer Interface Cable
339. st is in progress by choosing the Assign Subject push button Saving an Audiogram If the database interface you are using is Storage follow the procedure below to save an audiogram If you are using a database other than Storage Plus Package refer to the sections beginning with Data Transfer for information on saving an audiogram Ifthe Automatic Save on Test Complete check box is selected in the Test Configuration dialog box the Save Print Test dialog box will appear automatically at the end of a test if no subject has been assigned If you wish the test to be printed automatically when it is saved select Print on Save in Save Print Options accessed by pressing the Options button in the Save Print Test dialog box The report template and select sort method are set in the Save Print Options dialog box See Save Print Options Manual revision of a baseline will only be possible if Automatic Baseline Revision is not enabled for the selected company To save a audiogram 1 When the test status indicates Finished or Keep Busy choose Save Print Test from the Audiometer menu If you are controlling multiple stations choose the station to save in the Select Audiometer dialog box The Save Print dialog box appears 2 Add any data or comments you wish in the Save Print Test dialog box gt To print a report for the current subject choose the Print button in the dialog box gt To add a history for the current subject ch
340. stallation and Setup To manually alter your configuration 1 From the Control Window choose Setup from the Audiometer menu The Setup dialog box appears 2 Make all necessary changes For detailed instructions for the Setup dialog box see Audiometer Setup 3 When finished choose OK 18 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 99 of 396 Plus Package Installation Installing the Plus Package The Plus Package is a group of software features that are enabled by attaching a hardware key to your computer To install the Plus Package on your computer connect the Plus Package hardware key After the hardware key is installed simply start the audiometer software and Plus Package features will be enabled To install the Plus Package hardware key on your computer 1 Locate the parallel port on the back of your computer This port is usually used by the parallel printer 2 Attach the hardware key to the parallel port and hand tighten the thumb screws The end of the key to be attached to the port is labeled COMPUTER If you are using a parallel printer the key is first installed on the port and the printer cable is plugged into the key The key is designed to have no effect on the operation of your printer or on the operation of other keys installed on your port To start the Plus Package 1 Start the audiometer software under Programs in the Windows Start menu or double click the icon on the desktop 19 Copyright 2
341. stic Simulator Installation Connecting the Bio Acoustic Simulator with the CCA 200 Audiometer Key to Diagram Numbers 1 Headset Cable 2 Simulator Interconnect Cable 3 CCA 200 Audiometer 22 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 103 of 396 Bio Acoustic Simulator Installation 4 Computer Interface Cable 5 Power Supply 6 Power Cord 7 Response Switch 8 BAS 200 Bio Acoustic Simulator Installing the BAS 200 with the CCA 200mini The Bio Acoustic Simulator provides a convenient method for doing the required daily biologic check of the audiometer The simulator can be left installed at all times for additional convenience and time savings and may either sit on a table or shelf or be mounted on the wall with the included wall mounting bracket The simulator operates with power supplied from the audiometer so there is no need to check that the unit is switched off when not in use or change batteries To install the BAS 200 with the CCA 200mini refer to the instructions diagram and key to diagram numbers below The installation shown does not use the wall mounting bracket For instructions on installation using the bracket see Bracket for BAS 200 or BAS 200slm with CCA 200mini below The supplied interconnect cable is plugged into the RESPONSE jack of the audiometer and the AUDIOMETER jack of the simulator For daily calibrations the response switch is disconnected from the simulator For subject testing the response
342. stimulus is presented again If the ambient sound level is now below the maximum permissible level the test continues normally However if the ambient noise continues to be above permissible levels the stimulus is repeatedly presented but no responses are recorded If more than sixty seconds elapse from the start of the threshold determination without a response being recorded there is a Presentation Timeout error See Error Descriptions 69 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 150 of 396 Automatic Testing If this check box is selected the fact that it was selected is saved with the audiogram when the audiogram is saved The MPANLs will also be saved with the audiogram For this setting to have an effect the Sound Level Meter that is taking the readings must be mapped to the audiometer performing the test Mapping is done in the Sound Level Meter Mapping tab in the Setup dialog box See Configuring the Sound Level Meter If the Retest on Noise Above MPANLs check box is not checked the test will continue normally even if the sound level meter measures sound levels that exceed the MPANLs MPANLs are set in the MPANLs tab of the Test Configuration dialog box See MPANLs This setting has no effect if a Sound Level Meter is not installed in the system Semi Automatic Manual Mode When this box is checked for the Test Configuration the audiometer will automatically detect whether the subject has given a response that
343. switch is inserted into the RESPONSE jack of the simulator Internal switching removes the simulator from the circuit so that it may be left installed at all times with no effect on testing 23 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 104 of 396 Bio Acoustic Simulator Installation A7 a o C o P EPP See Connecting the Bio Acoustic Simulator with the CCA 200mini Audiometer 24 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 105 of 396 Bio Acoustic Simulator Installation Key to Diagram Numbers Headset Cable Simulator Interconnect Cable CCA 200mini Audiometer Serial Cable USB Computer Interface Cable Power Supply Power Cord Response Switch BAS 200 Bio Acoustic Simulator NO ON OQ tn FW NY 25 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 106 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 107 of 396 BAS 200slm and SLM 200 Installation Installing the BAS 200slm or SLM 200 The following sections describe how to install the BAS 200 Bio Acoustic Simulator Sound Level Meter with the CCA 200 audiometer or the CCA 200mini audiometer and how to install the SLM 200 Sound Level Meter with the CCA 200 audiometer Installing the BAS 200slm with the CCA 200 To install the BAS 200slm Bio Acoustic Simulator Sound Level Meter with the CCA 200 refer to the diagram and key to diagram numbers below Up to sixteen instruments total may be controlled from a single computer To install the BAS 200slm
344. t Audiometer Technical m PLU Training Course ad a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACS100 System 1 Test Selection an AudiometerTechnical 7 ute Training Course EP a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACS100 System 1 Calibration Results Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 40 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACSI00 System 1 Sample Calibration Form Audiometer Technical Training Course CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 2 Aussco ACS100 System 1 Automated Procedure for Multiple Audiometers Storage of previously calibrated instruments Sound Room Certification Option Audiometer Technical Training Course CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Annual 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 An
345. t BAS 200 Bracket Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Il Installation Procedures ll Install CCA 200mini Bracket EN ace I 7 Audiometer Technical IET E Training Course SEP e BAS 200 Simulator Il Installation Procedures Ill Install CCA 200mini Audiometer See CCA 200mini Install Section Three Screws Holes punched in BAS 200 Bracket ll Attach DB9 Cables to CCA 200mini Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 55 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Il Installation Procedures IV Place BAS 200 Simulator on Bracket Align BAS 200 and seat into the Bracket Level BAS 200 to cover any issues with plumb of the BAS 200 Bracket V Install 6 4 Phone Cord from BAS 200 Simulator Audiometer ack to CCA 200 Response Jack Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator lll Assembly Disassembly Procedures I The BAS 200 is disassembled by removing two screws from the back of the case Cabling Chris Crosses internally from left to right az tingle cz teft Audiometer Technical Training Course BAS 200 Simulator Ill Assembly Disassembly Procedures The BAS 200 has no user replaceable components on the circus board Fle wiring daecccis is keyed Copyright 2008 SRMi Consultin
346. t Baseline is the baseline that is used for calculating MSHA Reportable Shift IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE The OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline check box appears in the Add Audiogram Modify Audiogram dialog box If any future audiogram for this subject is marked as the Recordable Shift Baseline the database will no longer regard the present audiogram as the Recordable Shift or Reportable Shift baseline that is there is no need to go back to this audiogram and unselect the check box 133 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 214 of 396 Analysis IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE The OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline or MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline check box appears in the Add Audiogram Modify Audiogram dialog box if you have not chosen Automatic Baseline Revision for this company If on the other hand Automatic Baseline Revision is enabled the check box will be gray and you will not be able to make changes to it If you are using OSHA regulations for this company this audiogram will be the OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline audiogram for this subject If you are using MSHA regulations for this company this audiogram will be the MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline audiogram for this subject If any future audiogram for this subject is marked as the Recordable Shift or Reportable Shift Baseline the database will no longer regard the present audiogram as the Recordable Shift or Reportable Shift baseline that is there is no
347. t Cable 3 CCA 200 Audiometer Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 86 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup 4 Computer Interface Cable 5 Power Supply 6 Power Cord 7 Response Switch 8 BAS 200 Bio Acoustic Simulator Multi Station Installation of the CCA 200 To install additional stations of the CCA 200 audiometer refer to the diagram and key to diagram numbers below Follow the instructions in the previous section to install the first station Up to sixteen audiometer stations may be controlled from a single computer To add additional stations 1 Unplug the power supply cord from the wall outlet 2 Connect the serial cable between the Serial Out connector of the first station and the Serial In connector of the next station 3 Connect the headset and response switch to the second audiometer connections not shown on diagram If the audiometer is mounted outside the station use standard patch cords to make connections through the station walls 4 Plug the power supply cord into the wall outlet The red power LED on the station should glow indicating that the audiometer is powered 5 Repeat the steps above for any remaining stations The power supply provided will power up to ten stations If you are installing more than ten stations in total contact your Benson Medical Instruments dealer for assistance Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 87 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup D
348. t Level 10 100 dBHL 3dB 5dB step Output Rise Fall Time Not greater than 50msec nor less than 20msec 30msec typ Distortion Less than 396 at full output Output On Off Ratio Greater than 70dB 95dB typ Transducer Telephonics TDH39 10 ohm earphones with MX41 AAR cushions Power requirements 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 Watts max Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 12 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Version2 0 Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Il Theory of Operation A USB Plug and Play connection to computer for up to sixteen audiometer stations A Daisy Chained for ease of installation B USB to Serial for added cable length and integrity C Standard Off the Shelf Cables Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Il Theory of Operation B Intelligent IntelliTesting software scans during testing and automatically flags or retests A The innovative IntelliTesting feature understands Hearing Conservation testing It scans audiograms for test problems and responds appropriately Test instructions are delivered to the subject through the headset Previous test information from the database is used to streamline testing The result is higher quality tests with less operator intervention in less time Audiometer Technical
349. tabases have support for real time transfer from the audiometer using Benson Medical protocol This protocol is bidirectioinal in that it allows a subject to be Assigned before or during the test in order to make use of previous audiogram data Currently supported interfaces are DOHRS HC HearTrak DOS HearTrak Windows OHM and Medgate All that is required for the audiometer software to use these interfaces is to set the Database Interfaces combo box in the Setup dialog box to the correct interface In addition you must perform the needed setup in the database program Refer to the third party documentation for information on how to do this REAL TIME AUDIOGRAM TRANSFER USING RA 500 PROTOCOL In order to perform this real time transfer the audiometer must be close enough to the computer with the database that the two can be connected by cable The database must also support a transfer from an RA 500 FOSHM and Systoc support this type of transfer See Data Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol below Data Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol FOSHM RA 500 protocol SYSTOC RA 500 protocol In order to operate with these two databases the audiometer must be set up to emulate an RA 500 see the next section for the procedure The RA 500 communicates through a serial port and you will need to set the serial port settings on the audiometer to match those of an RA 500 The database must also be set up to communicate with an RA 500 that is the seri
350. ted 3 Click the Modify push button The Modify Password dialog box appears 4 Enter your password in the New Password and Confirm New Password edit boxes 5 Choose OK Do not forget this password or you will not be able to access the audiometer software 6 In the Passwords dialog box choose Close 12 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 93 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE Check with your network administrator about whether you will use a different server and database Unless you receive instructions to the contrary from your network administrator you may leave the default server and default database in place If you plan to change the server and database names from the default ones see Database Password and Windows Security below Check with your network administrator about whether there are going to be multiple users on a network if so see Multi User Installation The first time you run the audiometer software The Welcome dialog box appears The user name is already entered as Administrator Most users will not make changes to the Server and Database edit boxes 1 Leaving the Password edit box blank choose OK or press the lt Enter gt key The audiometer display appears 2 Choose Passwords from the File menu The Passwords dialog box appears The Administrator is already selected 3 Click the Modify push button The Modify Password dialog box appears 4
351. ter l CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 L CCA 200mini System Audiometer includes CCA 200mini Systems Audiometer Headset with headband and cord Response Switch moisture proof and dust tight Software CD USB Computer Interface Cable described below Serial Extension Cable 25 ft Booth Mounting Plate Mounting Screws Power Supply Power Cord 110V Calibration Certificate BrrraAmmMon eS a Audiometer Technical f DA Training Course cadi f a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer l CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 CCA 200mini Systems Audiometer The CCA 200min Computer Controlled Audiometer is a Microprocessor Instrument applying State of the Art Technologies to tie Science of Hearing Testing EN Ig ti Audiometer Technical E pA Training Course udi a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer l CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 CCA 200mini Systems Audiometer Serial In Serial Out Service Address and Jacks Serial Number CCA 200mini 1 Headphone and i CCA 200mini Response Jack Model Label Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 8 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout p it Audiometer Technical eT p Training Course adf a Introduction to the CCA 200mini Audiometer l CCA 200mini System Audiometer CLIN 0003 Headset with headband and cord The Ben
352. ter software requires an IBM PC compatible computer with a 1 GHz or higher processor running Microsoft Windows XP SP2 2000 SP4 or Vista minimum 256 megabytes 2000 XP or 1 GB Vista RAM and 500 megabytes free hard drive Talk over and voice instructions SoundBlaster 16 or 100 compatible full duplex sound card and microphone are required For the CCA 200mini one free USB port is required For the CCA 200 one free serial port or USB to serial adapter is required For the Plus Package a parallel port or additional USB port is required Installation Checklist Install the audiometer software Install the audiometer s Set up the Administrator user and security measures available with the Plus Package if applicable See Initial Administrator Log In and Setup Plus Package only If you are going to have multiple users of the software on different computers install the software on the other users computers See Multi User Installation Set up any other users with passwords See User Names and User Passwords Installing the Software on your Hard Disk To install the audiometer software 1 Insert the Audiometer Software CD in your computer s drive If AutoPlay is enabled the installation program will begin automatically Follow the instructions on your screen Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 82 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup If AutoPlay does not function 1 Choose Add Remove Progra
353. ters So we may also write the above template strings 26011966 and 19660126 more mnemonically as DdMmCcY y and CcYyMmDd Another example of the use of re formatting involves Social Security Numbers The database stores SSNs in the form xxxxxxxxx However the database you are importing from may include dashes in SSNs in its export file xxx xx xxxx In this case we would write the template strings as 123 45 6789 and 123456789 Because the dash characters appear in the ASCII string but not in the database string they are removed in the database field You can use this principle to create different date formats For example use the template strings CcYyMmDd and Mm Dd CcY y to re format 17760704 as 07 04 1776 For information on how to handle ASCII and Database fields of different sizes see ASCII and Database Fields of Different Sizes To summarize the rules of import re formatting There are no standard format characters but if a character in the ASCII string matches a character in the database string the corresponding character is copied from the ASCII field to the corresponding position in the database field gt A character that appears in the database string but not in the ASCII string is placed literally in the database field gt A format string may contain any typeable character but the maximum length of either string is 20 characters gt For fields of different sizes use format strings to handle
354. th the computer still on plug the USB CIC into the computer 2 Make sure everything is cabled correctly Detailed instructions are in the section Installing the Audiometer 3 Go to the Device Manager and find the entry for Computer Controlled Audiometer it will be preceded by the icon of a question mark 4 Right click on that entry and choose Update Driver Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 83 of 396 Audiometer Installation and Setup 5 Insert the CD ROM in the drive 6 Select the Driver from disk provided by hardware manufacturer radio button and choose OK Windows 2000 XP and Vista will copy files to your hard disk For the CCA 200 To install the audiometer automatically With the computer off connect the audiometer to the computer Detailed instructions are in the section Installing the Audiometer pi 2 Turn on the computer 3 Go to the Device Manager and find the entry for Computer Controlled Audiometer it will be preceded by the icon ofa question mark 4 Right click on that entry and choose Update Driver 5 Insert the CD ROM in the drive 6 Select the Driver from disk provided by hardware manufacturer radio button and choose OK Windows 2000 XP and Vista will copy files to your hard disk Installing the Audiometer The audiometer is a compact instrument Because of its small size it may be mounted inside or outside a sound booth and sit either on a table or shelf or be mounted
355. the subject continues to hear tones he or she will not know that the test is completed and will be less likely to bother other subjects Start Test Voice Instructions The Start Test Voice Instructions check box in the Test Configuration dialog box sets an automatic voice instructions to play at the start of the test Below is the text of the Start Test voice instructions in English If another language has been chosen a translation of these instructions into that language is used Start Test This is a hearing check You will be listening for some tones When you hear a tone press the button once and quickly release the button No matter how faint the tone press the button when you hear a tone and quickly release the button Upon completion of your hearing check please remain seated and quiet until the operator releases you Error Handling An error is an indication that the test may be producing inaccurate results Potential sources of these inaccuracies are subject errors in following instructions e g not releasing the response switch or trying to outsmart the test e g randomly pressing the response switch An error may also result when a programmed retest of a frequency yields a result that varies significantly from the original threshold The audiometer software has several reactions to an error First the technician is notified of the error by the appearance of an error code in that ear and frequency in the bo
356. the type of data that you will extract make a copy of If the Create log file check box is selected a log file will be created of the Extract that you can check later for information The name and location of the log file are set in the Log File edit box You may browse for the file using the Browse button If the indicated file already exists it is overwritten without prompting 187 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 268 of 396 Extract and Merge To see the Extract dialog box 1 Choose Extract from the File menu Extracting Records PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To extract make a copy of records from the database 1 Choose Extract from the File menu in the Control Window The Extract dialog box appears 2 In the Database Type group box choose File database or SQL database 3 Depending on whether you chose a file or SQL database either enter the name of the file that will contain the extracted data in the File mdb edit box or enter the server and database names in the Server and Database edit boxes respectively Alternatively you may use the Browse push button s 4 If you wish to create a log file select the Write log file check box 5 If desired change the name and location of the log file from the default entry in the Log File edit box If the file exists it will be overwritten without prompting Alternatively you may use the Browse push button to find the file 6 Choose the Extract Config
357. the words DELETE ALL in an edit box in order for the data to be deleted This operation cannot be undone 52 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 133 of 396 Control Window To delete all subjects or audiograms choose Delete All from the Edit menu in the Control Window then choose Subjects or Audiograms from the submenu This procedure is also described in the sections on Deleting an Audiogram Deleting a Subject etc PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To delete all histories choose Delete All from the Edit menu in the Control Window then choose Histories from the submenu Individual and Group Control Most toolbar functions may be selected for all audiometers or a single audiometer If you are controlling more than one audiometer the Select Audiometer dialog box will appear after the toolbar button is pressed Enabling an Audiometer In addition the Select Audiometer dialog box allows you to choose whether or not an audiometer is enabled This feature works with the All Enabled Audiometers button to allow you group control over the audiometers that are enabled For a variety of reasons you may wish to temporarily disable one or more audiometers in the installation for a long period of time for instance a 10 audiometer van that receives groups of 8 subjects at a time may wish to disable 2 audiometers Simply click the check box next to the Enabled box for that audiometer the check will disappear and the audiometer is not enabled fo
358. this company Missing or Invalid Data The indication of Missing or Invalid Data in an Analysis column means either that 1 in this audiogram there are data missing or some data are invalid or 2 in the previous audiogram there are data missing or some data are invalid The database therefore cannot make a determination about what this audiogram shows For instance if Calculate STS using Age Correction is selected for the company of this subject then the indication of Missing or Invalid Data in an Analysis column could mean that information about sex or birth date is missing for this subject In another example if the previous audiogram was missing data and there was not enough data for the software to determine that whether the audiogram was Better Worse etc Missing or Invalid Data would appear for the current audiogram 135 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 216 of 396 Analysis If there is an indication of Missing or Invalid Data you might want to consider whether using the NR Substitution feature for this company might be of help The NR Substitution dB check box allows you to substitute a numerical value for any NR No Response indication in an audiogram Substituting a number for NR may enable the software to analyze audiograms without an indication of Missing or Invalid Data For more information see NR Substitution dB Much Better The indication of Much Better in an Analysis col
359. ting Standard Test Configurations Standard test configurations are programmed into the audiometer software To see them choose Test Configuration under the Audiometer menu The two standard test configurations are Standard Test which presents tones from 500k to 6000k and Standard Test w 8kHz which presents tones from 500k to 8000k Standard Test does not test 8000 Hz If you wish to test 8000 Hz choose Standard Test w 8kHz Test configuration features are described in the following sections Test Configuration Dialog Box The Test Configuration dialog box has five tabs described in the following sections To see the Test Configuration dialog box choose Test Configuration under the Audiometer menu and select the Add push button General Tab settings for automatic testing Test Sequence Tab settings for presentation of tones during testing Automatic Retest choices for conditions under which subjects should be automatically retested Wait Intervals amount of time between a response and the presentation of the next stimulus MPANLs appears only if a Sound Level Meter is installed Maximum Permissible Ambient Noise Levels General Tab Test Configuration The first tab in the Test Configuration dialog box is the General Tab described in the following sections To see the Test Configuration dialog box choose Test Configuration from the Audiometer menu and choose the Add push button The feature
360. ting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 30 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical A Sey Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Identify Technician Information ses 2 Identify Facility Information ne Audiometer Technical A Hey Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Calibration Test Options 1 Acoustic 1 Used for Pre Cal Data 2 Run All 1 Complete Exhaustive Cal 2 Switch Ears at Prompts AudiometerTechnical 7 pute Training Course EP 4 a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1 Procedural Order Exhaustive Calibration 1 Automatic Calibration Systems 1 Larson Davis 824 Audiometer System 1 Select Pre Cal 2 Click OK Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 31 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical A Training Course A a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Calibration Procedure Automatic 1
361. ting LLC Page 274 of 396 Extract and Merge 3 Depending on whether you chose a file or SQL database either enter the name of the file containing the data to be merged in the File mdb edit box or enter the server and database names in the Server and Database edit boxes respectively Alternatively you may use the Browse push button s 4 If you wish to create a log file select the Write log file check box 5 If desired change the name and location of the log file from the default entry in the Log File edit box If the file exists it will be overwritten without prompting Alternatively you may use the Browse push button to find the file 6 Choose the Merge Configuration using the Config combo box 7 Choose OK The merge will proceed automatically Merge Configurations PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Merge configurations specify which data should be merged into the database You may either choose one of a number of pre defined Merge configurations or create your own Users must have administrator access to add modify delete or duplicate Merge Configurations To see the Merge Configurations dialog box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Merge Configurations Pre Defined Merge Configurations PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Pre defined Merge Configurations can be seen in the Merge Configurations dialog box to see this dialog box choose Merge Configurations from the File menu in the Control Window Factory defined M
362. to Database Field Definitions for table names and field names and to SQL Syntax Functions for information on the SQL syntax functions that have been included A relational diagram of the Extract Merge record groups can be found in Extract Merge Record Groups A Diagram Adding an Extract Configuration PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add an Extract configuration 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Extract Configurations The Extract Configurations dialog box appears 2 Choose the Add push button The Add Extract Configuration dialog box appears 3 Enter the name of the new configuration in the Name edit box 4 For each record group unselect the Extract check box if you do not wish to extract it 5 Apply a filter to each record group as desired To apply a filter choose the Filter button by that record group the Modify Filter dialog box will appear Enter the SQL expression Choose the Check SQL button to check the expression and or see any ASK dialog boxes that will appear When finished with the Modify Filter dialog box choose OK 6 Choose the Check SQL push button as desired 7 When finished with the Add Extract Configuration dialog box choose OK The new configuration will appear in the list in the Extract Configurations dialog box 8 In the Extract Configurations dialog box choose Close Modifying an Extract Configuration PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Only user defined Extract Configuration
363. to reanalyze audiograms Subject ID Format PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Subject ID Format push button in the Add Company or Modify Company dialog box enables you to change the format of the Subject ID for all subjects in a company You can specify legal characters for the Subject ID and set a maximum size and a minimum size When the Subject ID Format push button is selected the Modify Subject ID Format dialog box appears which is described below The Prompt edit box allows you to change the prompt name or label of the Subject ID Changing this setting will change the prompt of the subject ID in dialog boxes reports and also in Subject View onscreen in the column to the left of the Name column If you are changing the Subject ID format from Social Security numbers it is recommended that you change the Prompt to something other than SSN to avoid confusion The Maximum Size edit box and the Minimum size edit box set the maximum and minimum numbers of characters respectively for the Subject ID Acceptable entries are any number from 1 to 20 inclusive Also the Minimum cannot be greater than the Maximum Please note that if you change the maximum size of the Subject ID to a size smaller than that of your current Subject ID the Subject ID s of all your subjects will be too long and will be illegal according to your new format and data may be lost as a result The Legal Characters group box shows the available settings for legal ch
364. tton In the Add Format or Modify Format dialog box the Name edit box is for the name of the format you are adding The Table to include combo box lists the available choices of Tests and Histories Selecting Test will cause audiograms to be included in the format Selecting Histories will cause histories to be included A format cannot include both audiograms and histories In the Record Size group box you can choose either a fixed size record or variable size record using the Fixed or Variable radio button A fixed length format can only contain fixed length fields A variable length format may contain both fixed length and delimited fields If you choose Variable you will be able to enter information in the Record Delimiter and Field Delimiter edit boxes Otherwise these edit boxes will be gray and will not accept entries The Record Delimiter edit box is for the terminating character s for the record if any The Record Delimiter is optional and may be one or two characters The Field Delimiter edit box is for the terminating character s of all delimited fields in the record The Field Delimiter is required and may be only one character 210 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 291 of 396 Import and Export If the last delimited field of the record is the last field of the record this field will be followed by the record delimiter as opposed to the field delimiter If you choose Fixed the Size edit box will be
365. u are using OSHA regulations for this company the check box will be called OSHA STS Baseline if you are using MSHA regulations the check box will be called MSHA STS Baseline If any future audiogram for this subject is marked as the STS Baseline the database will no longer regard the present audiogram as the STS baseline that is there is no need to go back to this audiogram and unselect the check box OSHA Recordable Shift amp MSHA Reportable Shift IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE An OSHA Recordable Shift is an STS in either ear that results in a threshold average at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz of 25dB or greater in the same ear The shift is calculated from the most recent audiogram having the OSHA Recordable Baseline check box selected IF YOU HAVE THE PLUS PACKAGE An MSHA Reportable Shift is an average shift at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz of 25dB or greater in either ear The shift is calculated from the most recent audiogram having the MSHA Reportable Baseline check box selected In the Analysis columns an MSHA Reportable Shift is called Rep Shift If you are using OSHA regulations for this company Recordable Shift will appear where appropriate whereas if you are using MSHA regulations Reportable Shift or Rep Shift will appear OSHA Recordable MSHA Reportable Shift Baseline The OSHA Recordable Shift Baseline is the baseline that is used for calculating OSHA Recordable Shift The MSHA Reportable Shif
366. u may create your own format s There are two ways to create a custom import export format You may create a new format from scratch or you may duplicate an existing format and then modify that Users must have administrator access to add modify delete or duplicate formats 209 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 290 of 396 Import and Export The primary keys for each table are as follows Table Primary Keys Test Test date Test time Company ID Soc Sec No Subject Company ID Soc Sec No Company Company ID Histories History date History time Company ID Soc Sec No Formats must provide values for the fields composing the primary key The Company ID field is provided implicitly as the current company s Company ID Test Time and History Time fields will be assigned by the program if not provided Features such as field mapping re formatting export only fields and trimming leading or trailing spaces enable you to deal with special circumstances of import or export A format name may be up to 60 characters in length and include any typeable characters The Record Size that you enter should include any terminating characters See the following sections for more information Add Format Dialog Box In creating or modifying a format you will use the Add Format or Modify Format dialog box The Add Format dialog box is accessed by choosing Formats from the File menu in the Control Window then choosing the Add bu
367. ubject To add a subject 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Add then Subject The Add Subject dialog box appears 115 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 196 of 396 Subjects 2 Enter the subject s name and information in the appropriate edit boxes 3 In the Language combo box choose the language in which this subject should be tested 4 Enter any comments in the Comment edit box 5 When finished choose OK Modifying a Subject To change information about a subject 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Modify then Subject The Modify Subject dialog box appears 2 Make changes as desired 3 When finished choose OK PLUS PACKAGE ONLY For information on how to move a subject to a different company see Moving a Subject to a Different Company Deleting a Subject To delete a subject 1 Inthe Subject View in the Control Window select the person s name in the Subject list box 2 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Delete then Subject The Delete Subject dialog box appears 3 Choose Yes to delete the subject To delete all subjects and tests for the current company 1 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Delete All then Subject The Delete All Subjects dialog box appears 2 Choose Yes The Delete All dialog box appears 3 Type DELETE ALL in the edit box 4 Choose OK to delete all subjects and their audiograms and histories f
368. udiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review lll Installation Procedures XI the rest of the screens should be correct shown for reference only Audiometer Technical ER ie Training Course adf Software Systems Review IV Troubleshooting Screen Print any errors and paste to a Word Document for submission to Benson Medical Technical Support For Software Installation Issues Contact Benson Medical Instruments Co 612 827 2222 choice 5 dmayou bensonmedical com Audiometer Technical Er Training Course EP Software Systems Review 4 V Question and Answer dies e 5 p S 9 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 65 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course Computer System Review System Specifications Hardware Requirements L The audiometer software requires an IBM PC compatible computer with a 1 GHz or higher processor running Microsoft Windows XP SP2 2000 SP4 or Vista minimum 256 megabytes 2000 XP or 1 GB Vista RAM and 500 megabytes free hard drive Talk over and voice instructions SoundBlaster 16 or 100 compatible full duplex sound card and microphone are required For the CCA 200mini one free USB port is required ALL DoD Dell OptiPlex Systems meet t
369. udiometer s will not connect 1 Plug and Play PNP turned off insure the box is checked Serial Number Incorrect Cabling not intact No power to USB CIC Audiometer Technical Pee Training Course ee a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Troubleshooting 1 Audiometer s will not connect 1 Plug and Play PNP turned off insure the box is checked Serial Number Incorrect Cabling not intact No power to USB CIC Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 49 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course a CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Troubleshooting 1 Multiple Response MR Errors 1 Bad Handswitch Audiometer Technical Training Course CCA 200mini Audiometer Calibration Questions amp Answer Session Audiometer Technical Training Course USB Computer Interface Cable i Theory of Operation Installation Procedures Assembly Disassembly Procedures Troubleshooting Question and Answer Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Version2 0 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC All Rights Reserved Worldwide Page 50 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Course Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course USB Computer Interface Cable i Theory of Operation The USB CIC provides a standardized USB access to the DOEHRS HC System PC Th
370. ujawoipny c4c8 88 008 ddng 9 eoies eoi amp ojoipny NI OOSSNV c4c8 89 008 Page 395 of 396 LLC Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 396 of 396
371. ulates STS according to OSHA MSHA guidelines A baseline audiogram must be available from the database for the subject in question The definition of an STS according to OSHA and MSHA can be found in the section Standard Threshold Shift STS The available methods are listed in the sections beginning Standard Threshold Shift STS You can program the audiometer software to calculate STS using Age Correction for a company by checking the Calculate STS using Age Correction check box for the company See Companies Adding an Audiogram To add an audiogram 1 In the Control Window in Subject View select the subject for whom you wish to add an audiogram Ifthe subject is not in the database yet add the subject see Adding a Subject 2 From the Edit menu in the Control Window choose Add then Audiogram The Add Test dialog box appears 122 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 203 of 396 Audiograms and Histories 3 If the audiogram is an OSHA STS Baseline and or an OSHA Recordable Baseline check the appropriate check box es Plus Package only MSHA STS Baseline and Reportable Baseline are the available choices if you have chosen MSHA as the Regulation Plus Package only If you have chosen Automatic Baseline Revision for this company the baseline s will be indicated in the subject s records automatically 4 Enter the audiogram results in the Left Thresholds and Right Thresholds edit boxes 5 Enter the exami
372. umn means that the subject s thresholds at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz have improved an average of 5dB relative to the last audiogram performed Much Worse The indication of Much Worse in an Analysis column means that the subject s thresholds at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz have worsened an average of 10dB relative to the last audiogram performed No Change The indication of No Change in an Analysis column means that the subject s thresholds at 2000 3000 and 4000 Hz have changed less than an average of 3dB relative to the last audiogram performed Persistent Improvement PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of Persistent Improvement in an Analysis column means that this audiogram is the second audiogram in a row to show improvement in this subject s hearing over the baseline value This indication appears only if at least six months 180 days have passed since the first audiogram that showed improvement If you are using Age Correction for a company Age Correction will be used when determining persistence This indication appears only if Automatic Baseline Revision has been enabled for this company Persistent STS PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The indication of Persistent STS in an Analysis column means that this audiogram has met the criteria for persistent STS as established by the National Hearing Conservation Association NHCA in 2000 136 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 217 of 396 Analysis If you are using Age Correcti
373. uration using the Config combo box 7 Choose OK The extract will proceed automatically Extract Configurations PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The software includes a number of pre defined Extract Configurations You may also choose to create your own Extract Configuration Users must have administrator access to add modify delete or duplicate Extract Configurations User defined Extract Configurations will appear in the Configuration combo box in the Extract dialog box Pre Defined Extract Configurations PLUS PACKAGE ONLY Pre defined Extract Configurations are used to create a copy of commonly used groups of records These configurations are described in the table below 188 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 269 of 396 Extract and Merge Extract Configurations Description All all database records Current Company all records from the current company Subjects Audiograms History in date range all subjects audiograms and medical histories within a certain date range can be from different companies Current Co Subjects Audiograms History in all subjects audiograms date range and medical histories in the current company within a certain date range Daily Calibration daily calibration data Daily Calibration in date range daily calibration data in a date range Utility Record Groups reports export filters import export formats and extract merge configurations Custom Extract Configurations PLUS PACKAGE ONLY You may
374. urse Handout Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review IIl Installation Procedures IV Select DOHRS HC as the database interface This will create all required test configurations and setups Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review IIl Installation Procedures V Select Default Benson Medical Instruments folder in the program folder Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review IIl Installation Procedures VII The following are a sampling of the screens that appear during the installation process Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Click OK to confirm that the Hardware Key is not installed None is required for DOEHRS HC Operation Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting All Rights Reserved Worldwide Version2 0 LLC Page 62 of 396 DOEHRS HC Audiometer Technical Training Version2 0 Course Handout Audiometer Technical IEEE Training Course uad Software Systems Review IIl Installation Procedures VII The following are a sampling of the screens that appear during the installation process Audiometer Technical INT Training Course uad Software Systems Review Ill Installation Procedures VII The following are a sampling of the screens that appear during the installation process Audiometer Technical Training Course Software Systems Review IIl Installation Procedures VIII The DOEHRS HC Setup should be as displ
375. user defined field see Field Prompt 207 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 288 of 396 Import and Export x Company Nons SSN 1 5 O Status Pai Location dE o Doo Last Name M In Hearing Conservation Program Systoc CID E Address First Name MI I Hire Date ll Comment Birth Date sef Language Engish ll m EXPORT To export data to Systoc 7 2 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Export The Export dialog box appears 2 Choose the file to export to Refer to the figure below While the location is arbitrary Systoc 7 2 requires the file name to begin with aud and have the asc extension x File c My Documents aud001 asc Browse Format SYSTOC 7 2 Audiogrsam Data Aud ssc S Filter Test Date Range Cancel 3 Choose a filter that gives the audiograms you wish to export Take care to export no more than one test per subject per export Refer to notes 2 3 and 4 below 4 When complete click the OK button to begin the export 5 Locate the file right click on it to display the context menu and choose Open with Choose Notepad from the resulting list of choices 6 In Notepad choose Replace from the Edit menu The Replace dialog box appears Refer to the figure below 208 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 289 of 396 Import and Export Find what Replace with Replace Replace All Cance
376. ust be set to Storage See Batch Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol below Batch Transfer Using RA 500 Protocol To perform a batch transfer using RA 500 protocol 1 Make sure the Database Interface in the Setup dialog box is set to Storage To see the Setup dialog box choose Setup from the Audiometer menu 2 Choose Export from the File menu The Export dialog box appears In the Format combo box choose Tremetrics RA500 Test Choose the desired filter in the Filter combo box In the Output group box choose the Serial Port radio button ON Un A W Choose the Serial Port Settings button The Serial Port Settings dialog box appears 1 Select the same settings as are indicated in the database software for the RA 500 8 Choose OK Third Party Databases The audiometer operates with a number of different hearing conservation databases Procedures and information on assigning a subject saving an audiogram and printing an audiogram are listed below for each database These procedures are meant to be used in conjunction with the database documentation Terminology may differ slightly e g a database or its documentation may not use the word assign when discussing subjects and their audiograms DOHRS HC If you are using DOHRS HC as your database interface the procedures for assigning a subject and saving a test will be initiated on the database side Refer to your database documentation for the procedures keeping
377. ustom daily calibration reports that have been added will appears in the Print Daily Calibration Report dialog box See Custom Reports for information on custom reports 149 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 230 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage To see the available daily calibration reports 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 Choose the Print push button The Print Daily Calibration Report dialog box appears Daily Calibration Certificate report PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Daily Calibration Certificate report shows the test data of a daily calibration check For this report there are three Select Sorts available Current Audiometer Test Date Range and All Test Date Range will select all daily calibrations for audiometers that have a daily calibration in that range On the report the Audiograms section shows the daily calibration check results and compares these results with the reference audiogram The deviation from reference if any is displayed For information on the Sound Level Meter section see Reports The Results section shows whether the daily calibration passed or failed with an explanation The Key section shows that the thresholds are listed in dB HL and explains abbreviations that may appear in the report Daily Calibration Summary report PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Daily Calibration Summary report shows the test
378. ut Program version A information Available only if the Plus Package hardware key is installed Available only with Database Interface set to Storage Available only with Database Interface set to Storage OHM HearTrak Windows or Medgate T Appears only if you have chosen the Test Complete Alarm or Error Alarm to be Continuous in the Setup dialog box TT Appears only if the calibration hardware key is installed Daily Calibration Submenu The Daily Calibration submenu under the Audiometer menu is described in the table below The column at right provides a section for further reference 50 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 131 of 396 Control Window Sets the Daily Daily Calibration Check using Calibration indicator for the Bio Acoustic Simulator selected audiometer s Clears the Daily Daily Calibration Check using Calibration indicator for the Bio Acoustic Simulator selected audiometer s Configuration Toolbar Print the daily Save Print Daily Calibration calibration test update dialog box reference audiogram access to Save Print Options Plus Package only Saves the daily calibration audiogram in Daily Calibration Storage Choose or alter the test Daily Calibration configuration for daily Configuration calibration The toolbar is at the top of the Control Window The nine toolbar buttons and their functions are described in the tables below For more info
379. utomatic Retests 4 oca nicotine ese iita L a ERRARE AREE ERE Cea aU ga 73 Wait lritervals inei cats condos denn ate rr Rd le 73 MEANLES 2225 etai dri eDos Da tdi te I de eau E M old ut Dci io pr 73 Choosing an Automatic Test Configuration 74 Adding an Automatic Test Configuration 74 Modifying an Automatic Test Configuration 75 Deleting an Automatic Test Configuration 75 Manual Testing 77 Manual Testing tt d e ea oo ERER 77 Daily Calibration Check 79 Daily Calibration atit ah ete nre suas a 79 Daily Calibration Configuration seeeeeeese 79 Daily Calibration Check using the Bio Acoustic Simulator 80 Save Print Daily Calibration dialog box sss 80 Printing a Daily Calibration Report sseeeeeses 82 Updating the Daily Calibration Reference Test 82 Daily Calibration Save Print Options ssssss 83 Functional Check 85 Audiometer Functional Check sessseeeeeenee 85 Functional Check SEQUeNCE sssccceeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 85 Functional Check Procedure cccccecsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeens 86 Languages 87 LGA cm si suit tare Khotanese A edna hao An 87 Adding a Language ssese ee 88 Modifying a Language
380. vel the Historical Starting Level HSL feature reduces the time needed to determine a threshold but does so by using the stored history of the subject to be tested The initial stimulus is presented a specified level above positive HSL or below negative HSL the threshold of the previously stored audiogram For example if the threshold for left ear 1kHz of the previous audiogram was 15dB HTL an HSL of 10 will present the first tone at 25dB 10 plus 15 Choosing an HSL of 5 or 10 dB above the previous audiogram will normally reduce the number of presentations needed and hence the test length even in cases of abnormal hearing loss The first tone presentation of an automatic test should be loud enough to get the subject s attention and signal that the test has begun It is recommended that the HSL for the first threshold determination be 20 or not selected i e defaults to Start dB value to provide this wake up call If the subject does not respond to the initial stimulus the stimulus level increases by 5dB until a response is obtained if Historical Starting Level has been enabled for that ear and frequency The Historical Starting Level is used if a subject has been assigned and a previous audiogram for this person is available to the audiometer software To enable Historical Starting Level s choose a value from the HSL combo box for a given ear and frequency in the Test Sequence tab of a test configuration If a subject is
381. vel Meter Installing the SLM 200 with the CCA 200 To install the SLM 200 refer to the diagram and key to diagram numbers below Up to sixteen instruments total may be controlled from a single computer To install the Sound Level Meter refer to the figure below 1 Unplug the power supply cord from the wall outlet 2 Connect the serial cable between the Serial Out connector of the audiometer and the Serial In connector of the Sound Level Meter 3 Plug the microphone into the MIC jack on the Sound Level Meter 4 Suspend the microphone from the ceiling for best results 5 Plug the power supply cord into the wall outlet The red power LED on the Sound Level Meter should glow indicating that the instrument is powered 6 Repeat the preceding steps for any remaining audiometers or Sound Level Meters The power supply provided will power up to ten instruments If you are installing more than ten instruments in total contact your special instruments dealer for assistance 32 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 113 of 396 BAS 200slm and SLM 200 Installation Installing the SLM 200 Sound Level Meter with the CCA 200 Audiometer 33 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 114 of 396 BAS 200slm and SLM 200 Installation Key to Numbers in Diagram Headset Cable Response Switch CCA 200 Audiometer Computer Interface Cable Power Supply Power Cord Serial Cable Microphone SLM 200 Sound Level Meter N
382. w age correction and DOD Significant Threshold Shift STS refers to Standard Threshold Shift which has been defined by both OSHA and MSHA See the sections beginning with Standard Threshold Shift STS Automatic Assign Save and Clear check boxes The features described in this section depend partly on which Database Interface has been selected in the Setup dialog box If Storage OHM FOSHM Systoc HearTrak Windows or MedGate has been selected the Assign dialog box and the Save Print Test dialog box will appear whereas if you are using another database these two dialog boxes will not appear Ifthe Automatic Assign on Start check box is selected for the test configuration the Assign dialog box will appear when testing begins If the Automatic Save on Test Complete check box is selected the Save Print Test dialog box will appear when a test is finished Ifthe Automatic Clear on Test Save check box is selected the current test will be automatically cleared from the audiometer when the test is saved Variable Starting Level When performing a large number of tests the time needed to complete each test is a major consideration One way to reduce the time needed to complete an automatic test with the audiometer is to use a variable starting level in determining each threshold Rather than presenting the initial stimulus of a threshold determination at a predetermined level the audiometer will begin at a level relative to the previ
383. w uoneigyeo ay oyu rayeuorpne ayy ing MOl oJ se 13a ayy dnjac EITRTRITHR ETT dnjas CETT Page 382 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC synsay eec Buses noy 3 s2437 3nsno2 y woop paysa 10N 7359 Youispue py paisa 10N 482 snoauejjaasijy paisa 10N paisa 10N paisa 10N paisa 10N paisa 10N auo agem ppa asna Ae SUrT sisfjeury jeubls eounaa 3 sys9 eomoaj3 paisa JON sana asion aly uonioyst Ioyejros qj suog pasa ON pasa 1oN yaaa 4o3ads pasa ON paisa 10N pasa ION s2437 esioN uaaedc s aAa esioN pueqmoneN sjaA a Ioyejros auog ssa Ioje iosp euog pasa 1oN sjeAa asian alu A uoniojst Vasu paisa 10N pasa JON yaaa yosads paisa JON Peis ON paisa ON s2437 asio Yosads s eAa esioN PUEGMONE RY s a 2 Vasu s sa euoudie3 pasu paisa 10N spes 8S10N JUA uonioysiq auaydpeay paisa 10N Pasa 3oN yaaa yosads peisa 10N paisa JON paisa 10N Sja a aslo N Yosads s aA8 asio PUEQMONIERY 9uPg 011u07 UOljeIgie NI QOSShIV S e e sjsn pe pue Jejeuloipne y S oJjuoo Ulejs S SOV au se uoje pue epoul pejjozuoo Ajjny au ur
384. wosjoy uuajg 8295pEZ aquny eras 18 185 re pe18 uoseit gaquny euas fg yeas yayauoIpny yp 3 jayauoipng joaja s jajeuioiprie may sbunjas sayawoipniy yawoysn yp3 awong Paes awon MaN suyas awong d H sgol aje4que2 sayawoipny 4awojsn gt asegejeg qpurg zo ssnyyeez 00L SJV J w zs s uoreiqre 19 ouoirpny 00L SJY 8 Page 380 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC pueg daH jsaT einbuuo ONI OOSSNV WayshS uoneiquea po Say 9u wi aegea o ajdwis sr JayauwoIpNne siy FEZL L2 d BPOW 183 oipeu BEBLLOOLES 35H dept iooles 3e vi auoe 3 suajs c f oypn yig FECL 391 dBE BE HOL samoydaja Jaquny enag jepop Iojejios g euog gequny euas JEP seuoudie 3 pasu g8qunw enag PPO sauoydpeaH SeyoN x CNN es sa a rezi uequnw eues depo uoneuuoju rayeuoipnig Oju Jajswoipny Page 381 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC ON OOSSNV BIOWAUE uaaios dioyonponul siy mous 1uo qYBIY pue 127 Uaamjag 3 000 0 H v3 359N YHJ 34 ssaud jauueu pauoeai si a a pairsap au nun umop Jo dn fay 13 37 ayy ssaid 2427 fay 2uaumu Buipuodsayios au ssaid Asuanbal4 Jajawopne ay uo sBunjes ebueua oj pajonijsul aq iia nod ysa ayy Buung a2aidiea ayy 1240 ji a3e d pue 1a dnoa ay ur euoudoiaiu ay 284 7 H31N3 uat pue GL uay T9345 Buissaid q apo
385. xamples will be taken from the perspective of importing data but the same concepts apply to exporting Assume for example that the employee birth date is stored in another database in the form ddmmccyy so that January 26 1966 would be represented as 26011966 The database expects the birth date in the form ccyymmdd The employee birth date will therefore need to be re formatted 212 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 293 of 396 Import and Export The first step in re formatting the birth date is to build a pair of template strings Template strings represent how characters are moved from the ASCII field to the database field In our example we will use the strings ABCDEFGH for the ASCII field and EFGHCDAB for the database field ABCDEFGH would be entered into the Format edit box in the ASCII Field group box in the Modify Field dialog box and EFGHCDAB would be entered into the Format edit box in the Database Field group box Note that template strings are not enclosed in quotes when they are entered into Format edit boxes If a character in the first string ASCII string matches a character in the second string database string the corresponding character in the ASCII field is moved to the corresponding position in the database field There are no predetermined formatting characters to be used in these strings any typeable characters may be used This function is case sensitive i e m and M are different charac
386. y daH ZH Aauanbad4 AC AL 006 148 13487 amp unssa1g PUNOS eJeu sueaJos 271 ews ON BUY peel oj ejduuis Apo ysa UJooJ punos y Jo 4oeuo SAB esiou punoJHyoeq jue Iquie ue uuoged m Wa shs SOY eur uleBojny uie t duj yeys 0 peat 591 siy Buunp Pash jou s Jayawoipne ay woo punos aui jo juauiamseay yeg 8 a punoibyseq yuaique ay samseaui jsa siy jonuog 132 sGumjas sajawoipny IET 13437 24sno2y Wooy punos Page 385 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC NI QO2SSf0V xou fnuguo7 speja q jeubis Maly swi AQP SUI SIOA SWHO 00E swyg gol j SOMA OL swyg 0s swyg OL j seuoudpeaH e VAL 2 PEO ou WO 3 SIOA OL J SHOMMA DOL j peo e2uj23 3 auey duj AHL zH fouanbaly SyNSaY juawansea py plojsey auoydoiai jpuueyg yig NT yeg jpuueyg ys sj Jauueu yndu Jonuo Jazijeuy yeys 0 Apeay J z jeuy JPUDIS JIesuno eyep y ydes6 pue ojd ueo no os ejep jeubls y uodxe oj no Mojje ua e I M Ule is s SOY SUL S JO QWO ipne uJe qoJd yeu 100us e qnou JezAjeue jeubis e uw pJepuejs seuJoo Wajshs SOY eu Page 386 of 396 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC ONI OOSSNV snsey ameg Buses INOU AY 1 03 sii paisa 10N spese onsnooy woo 358 yoyMspueH sisdjeuy jeubis jeomnoe 3 58 snoauepaostii 158 eoinoa 3 3 s3 peuinbeiJ AEE O
387. y Plateau duration and over shoot level are also averaged and displayed on the same screen Test frequency modulated stimuli The characteristics of the FM presentation can be assessed just as easily The System 824 mea sures minimum and maximum fre quencies calculates the carrier fre quency and also measures the mod ulation rate AUDit Software offers test management audiometer database and reporting An audiometer calibration involves much mundane but time consuming and possibly error prone note taking and cal culation The AUDit software has been designed to sim plify those steps and streamline testing A precision counter accurately sam ples the period of the tone stimulus and displays it along with frequency Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Complete test information and definition Measurement system keeping track of test equipment is easy as the software maintains a database of your calibra tors microphones couplers and 824 SLM with model seri al number and calibration date information Audiometer description enter a complete description of the tested audiometer its capabilities such as type and fre quencies and its transducers Future tests can recall this configuration Level corrections these are done automatically from entered microphone coupler and other responses Perform exhaustive calibrations Ambient booth noise level test the ambient noise of an audiometric
388. y contains information about the subject s medical history and is stored along with the subject s audiograms in the database Certain questions in the Add History dialog box when answered in the affirmative result in an automatic medical referral on reports that indicate medical referral The table below shows which questions result in a medical referral on such reports To see the Add History dialog box choose Add from the Edit menu in the Control Window then History Tab Number Question Automatic Medical Referral Type on Reports Indicating Medical Referral Tab 1 AAO Yes to any question Medical Referral Criteria Questions Tab 2 User No Defined Questions Tab 3 User No Defined Questions The AAO Medical Referral Criteria tab also contains statements for the examiner to respond to For the user defined questions you can add your own questions and set up default responses See the following section You can see the History for a subject in Database View by selecting the subject in Subject View and then selecting the Histories tab See Histories Tab 124 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 205 of 396 Audiograms and Histories Subject History Questionnaire PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The subject history questionnaire lists questions for a given subject about medical history and statements about the subject for the examiner to respond to The first part of the subject history contains the following questions which are
389. y inverse coloring of display those frequencies will be tested first in order from left to right This is followed by testing of all frequencies without thresholds in order from left to right This button also restarts an automatic test that was stopped with Microphone On Off Stop This button and menu item stops the automatic test in the selected audiometer s if the audiometer status is Testing or Keep Busy Otherwise this button has no effect When the test is stopped you can restart the test with no loss of the thresholds that have been determined Clear This button and menu item stops testing removes all marks for retest and clears the subject from the audiometer to make it ready for testing a new subject If talk over was in use on the selected audiometer s it is disabled Clear also removes Other Ear First and Continuous Tone selections from audiometers Microphone On Microphone Off These buttons and menu items enable and disable the talk over microphone to the selected audiometer s respectively Use talk over to communicate with subjects in the sound booth If an automatic test was in progress when the button is pressed the test is first stopped before the talk over is enabled The audiometer is left idle after talk over is disabled Use Start to restart an automatic test that was stopped with Microphone On Off Mark for Retest This menu item allows the marking of given ear and frequency for automatic retesting If an
390. you to Add Modify Delete or Delete all daily calibration tests The Print push button enables you to print a daily calibration report When this button is selected the Print Daily Calibration Report dialog box will be displayed showing the report templates with associated select sorts See Daily Calibration Reports To see the Daily Calibration dialog box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 143 Copyright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 224 of 396 Daily Calibration Storage Add Audiometer Dialog Box PLUS PACKAGE ONLY The Add Audiometer dialog box enables you to add an audiometer for Daily Calibration Storage The Serial Number edit box is for the audiometer serial number The Model edit box is for the audiometer model The Comment button enables you to add a comment To see the Add Audiometer dialog box 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 Select the Add push button at the right of the Audiometers list box Adding an Audiometer PLUS PACKAGE ONLY To add an audiometer for daily calibration storage 1 From the File menu in the Control Window choose Daily Calibration The Daily Calibration dialog box appears 2 Select the Add push button at the right of the Audiometers list box The Add Audiometer dialog box appears 3 Enter the serial number of the audio
391. yright 2008 SRMi Consulting LLC Page 335 of 396 Annual Calibration If you wish to see pre calibration values before performing an annual calibration you can run a Pre Cal Acoustic test This test does not calibrate the audiometer Choose the Acoustic push button in the Audiometer Calibration Test Options dialog box and choose the Pre Cal radio button in the dialog box that appears At the end of the calibration you will be asked to enter the serial numbers of the earphones After this the Audiometer Calibration Complete dialog box will appear If the audiometer passed calibration you can set the annual calibration date and print the calibration certificate If the audiometer did not pass you will not be able to set the date or print the certificate The procedure for automatic annual calibration is given in the next section Automatic Annual Calibration Procedure To perform an automatic annual calibration From the Audiometer menu in the Control Window choose Automatic Annual Calibration The Audiometer Calibration dialog box appears 2 Follow the on screen instructions and choose the Next push button The Audiometer Calibration Parameters dialog box appears 3 Enter the audiometer serial number in the Audiometer Serial No edit box 4 In the Larson Davis 824 Port combo box choose the serial port that the Larson Davis sound level meter is connected to 5 Check that the entry in the Audiometer Model which was

DOEHRS-HC System Support and Service

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents